0% found this document useful (0 votes)

1K views577 pages

Ceragon FibeAir IP-10G IP-10E User Guide 20120601 Rev A

datasheet radios ceragon ip10

Uploaded by

Francisco Narvaez

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

1K views577 pages

Ceragon FibeAir IP-10G IP-10E User Guide 20120601 Rev A

datasheet radios ceragon ip10

Uploaded by

Francisco Narvaez

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

DOC-00034612 (Rev A)
Hardware Release: R2 and R3
Software Release: i6.9
BM-0252-0
June 2012
Copyright 2012 by Ceragon Networks Ltd. All rights reserved.

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Notice
This document contains information that is proprietary to Ceragon Networks Ltd. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, modified, or distributed without prior written authorization of
Ceragon Networks Ltd. This document is provided as is, without warranty of any kind.

Registered Trademarks
Ceragon Networks is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd. FibeAir is a registered
trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd. CeraView is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks
Ltd. Other names mentioned in this publication are owned by their respective holders.

Trademarks
CeraMap, ConfigAir, PolyView, EncryptAir, and CeraMon are trademarks of Ceragon
Networks Ltd. Other names mentioned in this publication are owned by their respective holders.

Statement of Conditions
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Ceragon
Networks Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential
damage in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this document or equipment
supplied with it.

Open Source Statement

The Product may use open source software, among them O/S software released under the GPL or
GPL alike license ("GPL License"). Inasmuch that such software is being used, it is released under
the GPL License, accordingly. Some software might have changed. The complete list of the
software being used in this product including their respective license and the aforementioned
public available changes is accessible on http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.

Information to User
Any changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could
void the users authority to operate the equipment and the warranty for such equipment.

Revision History
Rev

Date

Author

Description

Approved by

Date

June 16,
2012

Baruch Gitlin

Initial release for version I6.9.

Eytan Perso

June 16,
2012

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 2 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Table of Contents
1. Introduction .................................................................................................... 16
1.1 About the CeraWeb EMS (Web EMS) ......................................................................... 17
1.1.1 Browser behavior with Web EMS ................................................................................ 17
1.2

Reference Guide to Web EMS Menu Structure ........................................................... 18

2. Getting Started................................................................................................ 23
2.1

Establishing a Connection with the IDU ....................................................................... 24

2.2

Launching the Web EMS ............................................................................................. 25

2.3

Configuring IP Addresses ............................................................................................ 26

3. Configuring Secured Access Protocols........................................................ 27

3.1 Security Overview ........................................................................................................ 28
3.1.1 Defenses in Management Communication Channels .................................................. 28
3.1.2 Defenses in User and System Authentication Procedures .......................................... 29
3.1.2.1 User Identification ........................................................................................ 29
3.1.2.2 Remote Authentication ................................................................................ 29
3.1.2.3 Authorization ................................................................................................ 29
3.1.2.4 RADIUS Support .......................................................................................... 30
3.1.2.5 Attack Types Addressed .............................................................................. 30
3.1.3 Secure Communication Channels ............................................................................... 30
3.1.3.1 SSH (Secured Shell).................................................................................... 30
3.1.3.2 HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure) ............................................. 30
3.1.3.3 SFTP (Secure FTP) ..................................................................................... 31
3.1.3.4 Creation of Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File .................................... 31
3.1.3.5 SNMP .......................................................................................................... 32
3.1.3.6 Server authentication (SSL / SLLv3) ........................................................... 32
3.1.3.7 Encryption .................................................................................................... 32
3.1.3.8 SSH.............................................................................................................. 32
3.1.4 Security Log ................................................................................................................. 33
3.2 Configuring SNMP ....................................................................................................... 35
3.2.1 Configuring SNMPv3 Parameters ................................................................................ 35
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9

Configuring Secure Communication Channels ............................................................ 37

Configuring Inactivity Timeout ...................................................................................... 37
Secure File Transfer and Server Authentication .......................................................... 38
Configuring HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure) .......................................... 39
Downloading a Certificate ............................................................................................ 40
Configuring the Security File Name, Type and Format ................................................ 40
Enabling the CA Certificate .......................................................................................... 41
Configuring FTP or SFTP (Secure FTP) ...................................................................... 41
Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File .................................................. 42
Generating a Security Certificate from a CSR File ...................................................... 44

4. Working with Configuration Files .................................................................. 45

4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3

Archiving the Configuration .......................................................................................... 46

Creating a Configuration Archive File .......................................................................... 46
Viewing Configuration Archive Creation Status ........................................................... 46
Uploading a Configuration Archive File ........................................................................ 47

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 3 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

4.1.4 Viewing Configuration Archive Upload Status ............................................................. 47

4.1.5 Creating a Unit Information Archive File ...................................................................... 47
4.1.6 Viewing Unit Information Archive Creation Status ....................................................... 47
4.1.7 Uploading a Unit Information Archive File.................................................................... 48
4.1.8 Viewing Unit Information Archive Upload Status ......................................................... 48
4.1.9 Downloading a Configuration Archive File ................................................................... 48
4.1.10 Viewing configuration file download status .................................................................. 48
4.1.11 Uploading a Configuration Archive File ........................................................................ 49
4.1.12 Viewing configuration file installation status................................................................. 49
4.2

Restoring the Default Configuration ............................................................................. 50

4.3

Resetting the Unit ......................................................................................................... 50

5. Configuring Users and Password Security .................................................. 51

5.1

Configuring RADIUS .................................................................................................... 52

5.2

Adding Users ................................................................................................................ 54

5.3

Deleting Users .............................................................................................................. 55

5.4

Changing Your Password ............................................................................................ 56

5.5

Configuring a Timeout for Inactive Users..................................................................... 57

6. Configuring Software ..................................................................................... 58

6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4

Configuring IDU Software ............................................................................................ 59

Viewing IDU Version Information ................................................................................. 60
Downloading IDU Software Files ................................................................................. 61
Upgrading the IDU Software Version ........................................................................... 62
Rolling Back a Software Upgrade ................................................................................ 64

6.2 Configuring RFU Software and Firmware .................................................................... 65

6.2.1 Viewing RFU Version Information ................................................................................ 66
6.2.2 Updating the RFU Software Version ............................................................................ 68

7. Configuring and Viewing Basic System Information ................................... 69

7.1

Configuring and Viewing Unit System Information ...................................................... 70

7.2

Configuring System Date and Time ............................................................................. 71

7.3

Configuring Network Timing Protocol (NTP) Parameters ............................................ 72

7.4

Configuring Unit Serial and Part Numbers ................................................................... 73

7.5

Viewing System Application Files ................................................................................ 74

8. Configuring Feature and Capacity Licenses ................................................ 75

8.1

Viewing Current License Details .................................................................................. 76

8.2

Loading a New License Key ........................................................................................ 77

8.3

Replacing a License ..................................................................................................... 79

8.4

Working with a Demo License ..................................................................................... 81

8.5

Viewing Licensed Usage and Features ....................................................................... 82

9. Configuring Unit Management ....................................................................... 84

9.1

Management Overview ................................................................................................ 85

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 4 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

9.2

Configuring the Management Ports ............................................................................. 86

9.3

Configuring Out-of-Band Management ........................................................................ 88

9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4

Configuring In-Band Management ............................................................................... 89

Configuring In-Band Management in a 1+1 Link ......................................................... 90
In-Band Management in Nodal Configurations ............................................................ 92
GbE In-Band Management in a Node .......................................................................... 94
In-Band Management Isolation in Smart Pipe Mode ................................................... 95

10. Configuring Traffic Interfaces ........................................................................ 96

10.1 Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode.................................................................... 97
10.1.1 Switch Configurations Overview .................................................................................. 98
10.1.2 Configuring Smart Pipe Switch Mode ........................................................................ 100
10.1.3 Configuring Managed and Metro Switch Mode .......................................................... 101
10.2 Configuring Ethernet Ports ......................................................................................... 104
10.2.1 Configuring a Single Pipe Port ................................................................................... 104
10.2.2 Configuring a Managed Switch or Metro Switch Port ................................................ 106
10.3 Assigning VLANs to a Port ......................................................................................... 108
10.4 Configuring Automatic State Propagation .................................................................. 109
10.5 Configuring LAGs ....................................................................................................... 112
10.5.1 LAG Overview ............................................................................................................ 113
10.5.2 Creating a LAG .......................................................................................................... 115
10.5.3 Configuring a LAG ...................................................................................................... 116
10.5.4 Removing Ports from a LAG ...................................................................................... 118
10.5.5 Configuring LAG Load Balancing ............................................................................... 119
10.6 Configuring Peer Port Settings .................................................................................. 120
10.7 Configuring E1/DS1 Interfaces .................................................................................. 121
10.8 Configuring STM-1/OC-3 Interfaces .......................................................................... 123
10.9 Configuring Pseudowire ............................................................................................. 126
10.9.1 Pseudowire Overview ................................................................................................ 127
10.9.2 Configuring an Ethernet Port for Pseudowire ............................................................ 129
10.9.3 Configuring the Pseudowire TDM Ports ..................................................................... 131
10.9.4 Configuring TDM Trails for Pseudowire ..................................................................... 134
10.9.5 Configuring Pseudowire Synchronization .................................................................. 135
10.9.6 Configuring the Pseudowire T-Card........................................................................... 137
10.9.7 Configuring Pseudowire Profiles ................................................................................ 139
10.9.8 Configuring Pseudowire Encapsulation (Tunnels) ..................................................... 142
10.9.9 Configuring DS0 Bundles ........................................................................................... 144
10.9.10
Configuring Pseudowire Services .............................................................. 146

11. Configuring Auxiliary Channels .................................................................. 148

11.1 Configuring the Wayside Channel ............................................................................. 149
11.2 Configuring the User Channel .................................................................................... 150
11.3 Viewing the EOW Channel Status ............................................................................. 151

12. Configuring the Radio Parameters .............................................................. 152

12.1 Enabling and Disabling the Radio .............................................................................. 153
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 5 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

12.2 Configuring the Radio Frequencies ........................................................................... 154

12.3 Specifying the Radio Link ID ...................................................................................... 155
12.4 Configuring the Remote Radio IP Address ................................................................ 156
12.5 Configuring the Radio Thresholds ............................................................................. 157
12.5.1 Radio Threshold Levels ............................................................................................. 158
12.5.2 RSL and TSL Thresholds ........................................................................................... 159
12.5.3 MSE Threshold .......................................................................................................... 159
12.5.4 XPI Threshold ............................................................................................................ 160
12.5.5 Ethernet Throughput Threshold ................................................................................. 160
12.5.6 Ethernet Capacity Threshold ..................................................................................... 161
12.5.7 Ethernet Utilization Threshold .................................................................................... 161
12.6 Enabling RSL Degradation Alarms ............................................................................ 162
12.7 Selecting a Radio Script and Configuring ACM ......................................................... 163
12.7.1 ACM Radio Scripts ..................................................................................................... 164
12.7.2 ACM with 1+1 HSB Protection ................................................................................... 166
12.7.3 ACM Adaptive Power ................................................................................................. 167
12.7.4 Enabling Alarms on MRMC Profile Degradation ........................................................ 169
12.7.5 Activating an Asymmetrical Script .............................................................................. 170
12.8 Configuring Compression........................................................................................... 171
12.8.1 Configuring Enhanced Header Compression ............................................................ 172
12.8.1.1 Enhanced Header Compression Flow Type Bitmask and Supported
Configurations ............................................................................................ 173
12.8.1.2 Enhanced Header Compression Compatibility .......................................... 175
12.9 Configuring Radio Traffic Priorities ............................................................................ 176
12.10 Configuring the Power Options and Green Mode ...................................................... 178
12.10.1
Configuring ATPC Override ....................................................................... 179
12.10.2
Configuring Green Mode ........................................................................... 181

13. Configuring QoS and Enhanced QoS ......................................................... 182

13.1 QoS Overview ............................................................................................................ 183
13.1.1 Standard QoS Overview ............................................................................................ 183
13.1.1.1 Standard QoS Classifier ............................................................................ 183
13.1.1.2 Standard QoS Policers .............................................................................. 184
13.1.1.3 Queue Management, Scheduling, and Shaping ........................................ 185
13.1.2 Enhanced QoS Overview ........................................................................................... 186
13.1.2.1 Queue Management .................................................................................. 188
13.1.2.2 Scheduling and Shaping ............................................................................ 189
13.1.2.3 Configurable P-Bit and CFI/DEI Re-Marking ............................................. 190
13.2 Configuring Standard QoS ......................................................................................... 191
13.2.1 Opening the QoS & Rate Limiting Page .................................................................... 192
13.2.2 Configuring the Classification Settings ...................................................................... 193
13.2.3 Configuring the Egress Scheduler ............................................................................. 194
13.2.4 Configuring Ingress Rate Limiting .............................................................................. 195
13.2.5 Remapping P-Bits ...................................................................................................... 196
13.2.6 Configuring VLAN-ID to Queue .................................................................................. 197
13.2.7 Assigning IP P-Bits to Queue ..................................................................................... 198
13.2.8 Assigning Queues According to P-Bits ...................................................................... 199
13.2.9 Assigning Queue Weights .......................................................................................... 199
13.2.10
Configuring Policers................................................................................... 200
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 6 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

13.2.11
13.2.12

User Guide

Defining the Static MAC Table .................................................................. 201

Copying QoS Settings from One Port to Another ...................................... 202

13.3 Configuring Enhanced QoS ....................................................................................... 203

13.3.1 Preparing the System for Enhanced QoS .................................................................. 203
13.3.1.1 Classifying In-Band Management Traffic................................................... 203
13.3.1.2 Disabling the QoS Egress Shaper ............................................................. 204
13.3.2 Enabling Enhanced QoS ............................................................................................ 205
13.3.3 Enabling PTP Optimized Transport ........................................................................... 206
13.3.4 Configuring Queue Size ............................................................................................. 208
13.3.5 Configuring Enhanced QoS Classification ................................................................. 209
13.3.5.1 Configuring Services.................................................................................. 209
13.3.5.2 Configuring the egress CoS and Color Modifier (Marker) ......................... 210
13.3.5.3 Enabling Classification Rules .................................................................... 211
13.3.5.4 Setting the Default Classification Settings ................................................. 212
13.3.5.5 Configuring First Hierarchy Classification Rules ....................................... 214
13.3.5.6 Configuring Second Hierarchy Classification Rules .................................. 218
13.3.5.7 Configuring Third Hierarchy Classification Rules ...................................... 220
13.3.6 Configuring Egress Policers ....................................................................................... 226
13.3.6.1 Policer per Cos Option............................................................................... 229
13.3.7 Configuring WRED ..................................................................................................... 230
13.3.8 Configuring the Egress Shaper and Scheduler ......................................................... 232

14. Setting Up Protected Configurations .......................................................... 234

14.1 Protection Overview ................................................................................................... 235
14.2 Configuring 1+1 HSB ................................................................................................. 236
14.2.1 1+1 HSB Overview ..................................................................................................... 237
14.2.2 Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New Standalone System ................................ 238
14.2.3 Replacing the Standby Unit in a 1+1 HSB Standalone System ................................. 240
14.2.4 Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New Nodal System ......................................... 241
14.2.5 Replacing the Standby Unit in a 1+1 HSB Nodal System ......................................... 243
14.3 Configuring a 2+0 System .......................................................................................... 245
14.3.1 2+0 Overview ............................................................................................................. 246
14.3.2 Configuring 2+0 Protection ........................................................................................ 247
14.4 Configuring 2+2 HSB ................................................................................................. 248
14.4.1 2+2 Overview ............................................................................................................. 249
14.4.2 Deploying a 2+2 Configuration ................................................................................... 250
14.4.3 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection ................................................................................ 251
14.4.4 XPIC and 2+2 Protection ........................................................................................... 252
14.4.5 Replacing Units in a 2+2 Configuration ..................................................................... 253
14.5 Specifying Active and Standby Mode ........................................................................ 254
14.6 Configuring Switchover Criteria ................................................................................. 255
14.7 Viewing Mate Parameters .......................................................................................... 256
14.8 Configuring Multi-Unit LAG ........................................................................................ 257

15. Configuring Diversity ................................................................................... 259

15.1 Diversity Overview ..................................................................................................... 260
15.2 Configuring 1+1 Space Diversity (BBS) ..................................................................... 261
15.3 Configuring 1+1 Frequency Diversity (BBS) .............................................................. 262
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

22.3.4 Displaying Utilization Statistics .................................................................................. 341
22.4 Displaying TDM PMs .................................................................................................. 342
22.4.1 Displaying E1/DS1 Line PMs ..................................................................................... 343
22.4.2 Displaying TDM Channel PMs ................................................................................... 344
22.4.3 Displaying TDM Trail PMs.......................................................................................... 345
22.4.4 Displaying STM-1/OC-3 Line PMs ............................................................................. 346
22.4.5 Displaying Pseudowire PMs ...................................................................................... 347
22.5 Displaying Radio PMs ................................................................................................ 353
22.5.1 Displaying Signal Level PMs ...................................................................................... 354
22.5.2 Displaying Aggregate Radio PMs .............................................................................. 355
22.5.3 Displaying Radio MRMC PMs .................................................................................... 356
22.5.4 Displaying Radio MSE PMs ....................................................................................... 357
22.5.5 Displaying Radio XPI PMs ......................................................................................... 358
22.6 Viewing Radio Status ................................................................................................. 359
22.6.1 Viewing RFU Status ................................................................................................... 360
22.6.2 Viewing MRMC Status ............................................................................................... 361
22.6.3 Viewing Current Tx Status ......................................................................................... 362
22.6.4 Viewing Current Rx Status ......................................................................................... 363
22.6.5 Viewing Remote Radio Parameters ........................................................................... 364
22.6.6 Viewing XPIC Status .................................................................................................. 364
22.7 Viewing Ethernet Interface Status .............................................................................. 365
22.8 Viewing RSTP Status ................................................................................................. 366
22.9 Viewing Enhanced Traffic Management Statistics ..................................................... 367

23. Fault Management ........................................................................................ 370

23.1 Overview of Fault Management ................................................................................. 371
23.2 LED Indicators ............................................................................................................ 373
23.3 Configuring External Alarms ...................................................................................... 374
23.4 Configuring Traps ....................................................................................................... 376
23.5 Configuring Power Supply Alarms ............................................................................. 377
23.6 Viewing Current Alarms ............................................................................................. 378
23.7 Viewing the Event Log ............................................................................................... 379
23.8 Monitoring the IDU-RFU Interface ............................................................................. 380
23.9 Loopback .................................................................................................................... 381
23.9.1 Radio Loopback ......................................................................................................... 382
23.9.2 E1/DS1 Line Loopback .............................................................................................. 383
23.9.3 STM-1/OC-3 Line Loopback ...................................................................................... 384
23.9.4 Pseudowire Line Loopback ........................................................................................ 385
23.10 Troubleshooting Protection ........................................................................................ 386
23.10.1
Switchover Triggers ................................................................................... 387
23.10.2
Copy-to-Mate ............................................................................................. 387
23.10.3
Mismatch Mechanism ................................................................................ 388
23.11 XPIC Recovery Mechanism ....................................................................................... 389
23.11.1
XPIC Events .............................................................................................. 389
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 10 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Page 16 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

1.1

User Guide

About the CeraWeb EMS (Web EMS)

The CeraWeb Element Management System (Web EMS) is an HTTP web-based
element manager that enables the operator to perform configuration
operations and obtain statistical and performance information related to the
system, including:
Configuration Management Enables you to view and define
configuration data for the IP-10 system.
Fault Monitoring Enables you to view active alarms.
Performance Monitoring Enables you to view and clear performance
monitoring values and counters.
Maintenance Association Identifiers Enables you to define
Maintenance Association Identifiers (MAID) for CFR protection.
Diagnostics and Maintenance Enables you to define and perform
loopback tests, software updates, and IDU-RFU interface monitoring.
Security Configuration Enables you to configure IP-10G/E security
features.
User Management Enables you to define users and user groups.
A Web-Based EMS connection to the IP-10G/E can be opened using an HTTP
Browser (Explorer or Mozilla Firefox). The Web-Based EMS uses a graphical
interface. All system configurations and statuses are available via the WebBased EMS, including all L2-Switch configurations such as port type, VLANs,
QoS.
The Web-Based EMS shows the actual node configuration and provides easy
access to any IDU in the node.

1.1.1

Browser behavior with Web EMS

The Web EMS does not disable any innate browser functionality. However,
some browser functions will not function as expected.
The browsers Back button will load the page that was open before you
logged into the Web EMS. Therefore, you should use the navigation pane in
the Web EMS to select pages, rather than the browsers Back button.
Selecting Refresh from the browsers menu or pressing F5 will not update
the information on the page. Rather, it will start a new Web EMS session.
Therefore, you should use the Refresh buttons within the Web EMS GUI to
update data.
Note:

For multi-radio configurations, protection, and extension

units, available options will vary according to the available
interfaces and configured features for selected slot.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 17 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

1.2

User Guide

Reference Guide to Web EMS Menu Structure

The following table shows the Web EMS menu hierarchy, with links to the
sections in this document that provide instructions for the relevant menu
item.
Note:

Some menu items are only available if the relevant license

or feature is enabled.
IP-10G/E Web EMS Menu Hierarchy

Root Menu Item

Faults

PM & Counters

Signal Level

IP-10G/E

RSL and TSL Thresholds

Displaying Signal Level PMs

Aggregate

IP-10G/E

Displaying Aggregate Radio PMs

MRMC

IP-10G/E

Displaying Radio MRMC PMs

MSE

IP-10G/E

MSE Threshold

Displaying Radio MSE PMs

XPI Threshold

Displaying Radio XPI PMs

Radio
XPI
TDM Channel

IP.10G only

Displaying TDM Channel PMs

Ethernet > Capacity

IP-10G/E

Displaying Capacity Statistics

Ethernet Capacity Threshold

Displaying Utilization Statistics

Ethernet Utilization Threshold

Ethernet > Utilization

Radio

IP-10G/E

Ethernet > Frame Error

Rate

IP-10G/E

Displaying Frame Error Rate Statistics

Ethernet > Throughput

IP-10G/E

Ethernet Throughput Threshold

Displaying Throughput Statistics

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 18 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Root Menu Item

Sub-Menus
Unit Parameters

Configuration

General

User Guide

Applicability

For Further Information

IP-10G/E

Configuring and Viewing Unit System

Information

Configuring System Date and Time

Configuring Unit Serial and Part Numbers

Loading a New License Key

Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New

Standalone System

External Alarms

IP-10G/E

Configuring External Alarms

Management

IP-10G/E

Configuring IP Addresses

Configuring the Management Ports

Preparing the System for Enhanced QoS

Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New

Standalone System

Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New

Nodal System

Traps Configuration

IP-10G/E

Configuring Traps

Licensing

IP-10G/E

Viewing Current License Details

Loading a New License Key

Replacing a License

Working with a Demo License

Viewing Licensed Usage and Features

Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New

Standalone System

Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New

Nodal System

NTP

IP-10G/E

Configuring Network Timing Protocol (NTP)

Parameters

IP Table

IP-10G/E

Configuring Peer Port Settings

SNMP

IP-10G/E

Configuring SNMP

Configuring Ring-Optimized RSTP

Configuring Ethernet Ports to Support

RSTP

Configuring RSTP Priority

Viewing RSTP Status

Enabling and Disabling the Radio

Configuring the Radio Frequencies

Specifying the Radio Link ID

Enabling RSL Degradation Alarms

Configuring Green Mode

Configuring IF Combining Diversity

Configuring Multi-Radio

Displaying XPI Values

Viewing RFU Status

Viewing XPIC Status

Configuring the Radio Frequencies

Viewing Remote Radio Parameters

Radio Parameters

IP-10G/E

Configuration

Radio

Remote Radio

IP-10G/E

Radio Thresholds

IP-10G/E

Radio Threshold Levels

MRMC

IP-10G/E

Selecting a Radio Script and Configuring

ACM

Viewing MRMC Status

Viewing Current Tx Status

Viewing Current Rx Status

Compression

IP-10G/E

Configuring Compression

Traffic Priority

IP-10G/E

Configuring Radio Traffic Priorities

ATPC

IP-10G/E

Configuring ATPC Override

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 20 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Root Menu Item

Sub-Menus
Ethernet Ports

Interfaces

Configuration

User Guide

Applicability

For Further Information

IP-10G/E

Configuring a Single Pipe Port

Configuring a Managed Switch or Metro

Switch Port

Configuring Automatic State Propagation

Configuring LAGs

Configuring an Ethernet Port for

Pseudowire

Viewing Ethernet Interface Status

E1 Ports/DS1 Ports

IP.10G only

Configuring E1/DS1 Interfaces

STM Ports/OC-3 Ports

Synchronization > Clock IP-10G/E

Source

Configuring the Outgoing Signal Clock

Protection Parameters

Configuring 2+0 Protection

Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection

Specifying Active and Standby Mode

Configuring Switchover Criteria

Viewing Mate Parameters

IP-10G/E

Protection

Trails

Configuration

Pseudowire

Multi-Unit LAG

IP-10G/E

Configuring Multi-Unit LAG

Radio Diversity

IP-10G/E

Configuring Diversity

TDM Trails

IP-10G only

Configuring TDM Trails

Card Configuration

IP-10G only

Configuring Pseudowire Synchronization

Configuring the Pseudowire T-Card

TDM Ports

IP-10G only

Configuring the Pseudowire TDM Ports

PSN Profiles

IP-10G only

Configuring Pseudowire Profiles

PSN Tunnels

IP-10G only

Configuring Pseudowire Encapsulation

(Tunnels)

DS0 Bundles

IP-10G only

Configuring DS0 Bundles

Pseudowire Service

IP-10G only

Configuring Pseudowire Services

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 21 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Root Menu Item

Service OAM

User Guide

Sub-Menus

Applicability

For Further Information

MAID List

IP-10G/E

Working with MAIDs

Managing Local MEPs

Managing Remote MEPs

Working with MEPs

Working with MIPs

MEP and MIP List

Advanced

Loopback

IP-10G/E

Configuring FTP or SFTP (Secure FTP)

Archiving the Configuration

Restoring the Default Configuration

Configuration Management

Channels

Page 22 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Getting Started
This chapter includes:

Establishing a Connection with the IDU

Launching the Web EMS
Configuring IP Addresses

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 23 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

2.1

User Guide

Establishing a Connection with the IDU

The default factory configuration of a new IP-10 IDU is:
IP Address: 192.168.1.1, IP Mask 255.255.255.0.
Active management ports: ports 6, and 7 (far right RJ45 ports), out-of band
management.
License: Basic capacity 10Mbps, no ACM, Smart Pipe (only GbE ports,
ports #1 or #3)
SW package: Basic 6.xx.xx.
Protection: Disabled. 1+0 configuration
To establish a connection with the IDU:
1 Verify that no Ethernet traffic (cables or fibers) is connected.
2 Power up the IDU.
3 Connect your PC or laptop to one of the IDU management ports (ports
6 or 7, far right RJ45 ports).

4 Set your PC or laptop to the following configuration:

IP Address: 192.168.1.240
IP Mask 255.255.255.0
No default gateway.
5 Verify connectivity to the IDU by pinging 192.168.1.1. If there is no
connectivity, verify IDU IP management configuration using the Command
Line Interface (CLI).

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 24 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

2.2

User Guide

Launching the Web EMS

You can use the Web EMS to perform initial IDU configuration. To launch the
Web EMS:
1 Start your web browser.
2 In the URL address field at the top, type http://yourIP, where yourIP is the
IP address of the IDU. The default IDU IP address is 192.168.1.1.
3 Press Enter. The IP-10 Login page is displayed.

4 Enter the user name and password:

Default user name: admin
Default password: admin.
5 Click Apply. The Main View page opens, displaying all the units populated
slots.
Note:

For multi-radio configurations, protection, and extension

units, available options will vary according to the available
interfaces and configured features for selected slot.
Main View - Multi Radio Configuration

Main View - Single Unit Configuration

Configuration and other operations are performed by clicking the menus on

the left side of the page.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 25 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

2.3

User Guide

Configuring IP Addresses
You can configure the local IDUs IP address in the Local IP Configuration
section of the Management page.
You can configure the remote IDUs IP address in the Remote IP Configuration
section of the Management page.
In protected configurations, the floating IP address feature provides a single IP
address that will always provide direct access to the currently active main
unit. This is used primarily for web-based management and telnet access.
The user can configure a floating IP address in the active unit, and this IP
address will be automatically copied to the standby unit.
To configure local IP settings:
1 Select Configuration > General > Management. The Management page
opens.
2 In the Local IP Configuration section of the Management page, enter the IP
address of the local unit, its subnet mask, and the default gateway.

3 Optionally, enter a floating IP address. The following limitations apply to a

floating IP address:
The floating IP address must be different from the system IP address.
The floating IP address must be in the same subnet as the system IP
address.
To configure remote IP settings:
1 Select Configuration > General > Management. The Management page
opens.
2 In the Remote IP Configuration section of the Management page, enter the
IP address of the remote unit and its subnet mask.

3 Click Open Remote to open the remote unit's management page.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 26 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Configuring Secured Access Protocols

This chapter includes:

Security Overview
Configuring SNMP
Configuring Secure Communication Channels

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 27 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

3.1

User Guide

Security Overview
To guarantee proper performance and availability of a network as well as the
data integrity of the traffic, it is imperative to protect it from all potential
threats, both internal (misuse by operators and administrators) and external
(attacks originating outside the network).
System security is based on making attacks difficult (in the sense that the
effort required to carry them out is not worth the possible gain) by putting
technical and operational barriers in every layer along the way, from the
access outside the network, through the authentication process, up to every
data link in the network.

3.1.1

Defenses in Management Communication Channels

Since network equipment can be managed from any location, it is necessary to
protect the communication channels contents end to end.
These defenses are based on existing and proven cryptographic techniques
and libraries, thus providing standard secure means to manage the network,
with minimal impact on usability.
They provide defense at any point (including public networks and radio
aggregation networks) of communications.
While these features are implemented in Ceragon equipment, it is the
responsibility of the operator to have the proper capabilities in any external
devices used to manage the network.
In addition, inside Ceragon networking equipment it is possible to control
physical channels used for management. This can greatly help deal with all
sorts of DoS attacks.
Operators can use secure channels instead or in addition to the existing
management channels:
SNMPv3 for all SNMP-based protocols for both NEs and NMS
HTTPS for access to the NEs web server
SSH-2 for all CLI access SFTP for all software and configuration download
between NMS and NEs
All protocols run with secure settings using strong encryption techniques.
Unencrypted modes are not allowed, and algorithms used must meet modern
and client standards.
Users are allowed to disable all insecure channels.
In the network elements, the bandwidth of physical channels transporting
management communications is limited to the appropriate magnitude, in
particular, channels carrying management frames to the CPU.
Attack types addressed
Tempering with management flows

Management traffic analysis

Unauthorized software installation

Attacks on protocols (by providing secrecy and integrity to messages)

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 28 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Traffic interfaces eavesdropping (by making it harder to change

configuration)
DoS through flooding

3.1.2

Defenses in User and System Authentication Procedures

3.1.2.1

User Identification
IP-10G/E supports the following user identification features:
Configurable inactivity time-out for closing management channels

3.1.2.2

Password strength is enforced; passwords must comply with the following

rules:
Be at least 8 characters long
Include both numbers and letters (or spaces, symbols, etc.)
Include both uppercase and lowercase letters
When calculating the number of character classes, upper-case letters
used as the first character and digits used as the last character of a
password are not counted
A password cannot be repeated within the past 5 password changes
Password aging: users can be prompted do change passwords after a
configurable amount of time
Users may be suspended after a configurable number of unsuccessful login
attempts
Users can be configured to expire at a certain date
Mandatory change of password at first time login can be enabled and
disabled upon user configuration. It is enabled by default.

Remote Authentication
Certificate-based strong standard encryption techniques are used for remote
authentication. Users may choose to use this feature or not for all secure
communication channels.
Since different operators may have different certificate-based authentication
policies (for example, issuing its own certificates vs. using an external CA or
allowing the NMS system to be a CA), NEs and NMS software provide the tools
required for operators to enforce their policy and create certificates according
to their established processes.
Server authentication capabilities are provided.

3.1.2.3

Authorization
Users are assigned to user groups. Each group has separate and well-defined
authorization to access resources. Security configuration can only be
performed by the group with the highest permission level.
In the NMS, it is possible to customize groups and group permissions.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 29 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

3.1.2.4

User Guide

RADIUS Support
IP-10G/E supports RADIUS user authentication. RADIUS can be enabled or
disabled by the user. Vendor-specific permission levels can be configured on
the RADIUS server.
The following RADIUS servers are supported:
FreeRADIUS
RADIUS on Windows Server (IAS)
First priority - Windows Server 2008
Second priority - Windows Server 2003
Cisco ACS

3.1.2.5

3.1.3

Attack Types Addressed

Impersonation

Unauthorized software installation

Traffic interfaces eavesdropping

Secure Communication Channels

IP-10G/E supports a variety of standard encryption protocols and algorithms,
as described in the following sections.

3.1.3.1

SSH (Secured Shell)

SHHv1 and SSHv2 are supported.
SSH protocol can be used as a secured alternative to Telnet.
SSH protocol will always be operational. Admin users can choose whether
to disable Telnet protocol, which is enabled by default. Server
authentication is based on IP-10G/Es public key.
Key exchange algorithm is RSA.
Supported Encryptions: aes128-cbc, 3des-cbc, blowfish-cbc, cast128-cbc,
arcfour128, arcfour256, arcfour, aes192-cbc, aes256-cbc, aes128-ctr,
aes192-ctr, aes256-ctr.
MAC (Message Authentication Code): SHA-1-96 (MAC length = 96 bits, key
length = 160 bit). Supported MAC: hmac-md5, hmac-sha1, hmacripemd160, hmac-sha1-96, hmac-md5-96'
The server authenticates the user based on user name and password. The
number of failed authentication attempts is not limited.
The server timeout for authentication is 10 minutes. This value cannot be
changed.

3.1.3.2

HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure)

Administrators can configure secure access via HTTPS protocol.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 30 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

3.1.3.3

User Guide

SFTP (Secure FTP)

SFTP can be used for the following operations:

Configuration upload and download,

Uploading unit information

Uploading a public key

Downloading certificate files
Downloading software

Users with admin privileges can enforce secure FTP by disabling standard
FTP.
3.1.3.4

Creation of Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File

In order to create a digital certificate for the NE, a Certificate Signing Request
(CSR) file should be created by the NE. The CSR contains information that will
be included in the NE's certificate such as the organization name, common
name (domain name), locality, and country. It also contains the public key that
will be included in the certificate. Certificate authority (CA) will use the CSR to
create the desired certificate for the NE.
While creating the CSR file, the user will be asked to input the following
parameters that should be known to the operator who applies the command:
Common name The identify name of the element in the network (e.g., the
IP address). The common name can be a network IP or the FQDN of the
element.
Organization The legal name of the organization.
Organizational Unit - The division of the organization handling the
certificate.
City/Locality - The city where the organization is located.
State/County/Region - The state/region where the organization is located.
Country - The two-letter ISO code for the country where the organization is
location.
Email address - An email address used to contact the organization.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 31 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

3.1.3.5

User Guide

SNMP
IP-10G/E supports SNMP v1, V2c or v3. The default community string in NMS
and the SNMP agent in the embedded SW are disabled. Users are allowed to
set community strings for access to IDUs.
SNMPv3 connections are authenticated with a single user ID and password.
Admin users can configure this user ID and password.
IP-10G/E supports the following MIBs:
RFC-1213 (MIB II)

RMON MIB
Ceragon (proprietary) MIB.

Access to all IDUs in a node is provided by making use of the community and
context fields in SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c/SNMPv3, respectively.

For additional information:

3.1.3.6

Server authentication (SSL / SLLv3)

3.1.3.7

All protocols making use of SSL (such as HTTPS) use SLLv3 and support
X.509 certificates-based server authentication.
Users with type of administrator or above can perform the following
server (IDU) authentication operations for certificates handling:
Generate server key pairs (private + public)
Export public key (as a file to a user-specified address)
Install third-party certificates
The Admin user is responsible for obtaining a valid certificate.
Load a server RSA key pair that was generated externally for use by
protocols making use of SSL.
Non-SSL protocols using asymmetric encryption, such as SSH and SFTP,
can make use of public-key based authentication.
Users can load trusted public keys for this purpose.

Encryption

3.1.3.8

FibeAir IP-10G/E I6.9 MIB Reference, DOC- 00015446

Encryption algorithms for secure management protocols include:

Symmetric key algorithms: 128-bit AES
Asymmetric key algorithms: 1024-bit RSA

SSH

The CLI interface supports SSH-2

Users of type of administrator or above can enable or disable SSH.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 32 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

3.1.4

User Guide

Security Log
The security log is an internal system file which records all changes performed
to any security feature, as well as all security related events.
Note:

The Security log can only be accessed via the CLI.

The security log file has the following attributes:

The file is of a cyclic nature (fixed size, newest events overwrite oldest).
The log can only be read by users with "admin" or above privilege.

The log can be viewed using the following command:

/management/mng-services/log-srv/security log/view-security log
The contents of the log file are cryptographically protected and digitally
signed.
In the event of an attempt to modify the file, an alarm will be raised.
Users may not overwrite, delete, or modify the log file.

The security log records:

Changes in security configuration
Carrying out security configuration copy to mate
Management channels time-out
Password aging time
Number of unsuccessful login attempts for user suspension
Warning banner change
Adding/deleting of users
Password changed
SNMP enable/disable
SNMP version used (v1/v3) change
SNMPv3 parameters change
Security mode
Authentication algorithm
User
Password
SNMPv1 parameters change
Read community
Write community
Trap community for any manager
HTTP/HTTPS change
FTP/SFTP change
Telnet and web interface enable/disable
FTP enable/disable
Loading certificates
RADIUS server
Radius enable/disable
Remote logging enable/disable (for security and configuration logs)
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 33 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Syslog server address change (for security and configuration logs)

System clock change
NTP enable/disable
Security events

Successful and unsuccessful login attempts

N consecutive unsuccessful login attempts (blocking)

Configuration change failure due to insufficient permissions

SNMPv3/PV authentication failures

User logout
User account expired

For each recorded event the following information is available:

User ID

Communication channel (WEB, terminal, telnet/SSH, SNMP, NMS, etc.)

IP address, if applicable

Date and time

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 34 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

3.2

User Guide

Configuring SNMP
To configure SNMP:
1 Select Configuration > General>SNMP. The SNMP page opens.
2 Go to the In the SNMP Parameters section.

3 In the SNMP version field, select V1, V2c, or V3 to specify the SNMP
version.
4 In the SNMP read community field, enter the password for the SNMP read
community.
5 In the SNMP write community field, enter the password for the SNMP
write community.
6 Click Apply.

3.2.1

Configuring SNMPv3 Parameters

If you are using SNMPv3, you must configure the security mode,
authentication, user name, and password. To configure SNMPv3 parameters:
1 Select Configuration > General>SNMP. The SNMP page opens.
2 Go to the In the SNMP V3 User Settings section.

3 In the Security mode field, select the SNMPv3security mode: Options are:
No security
Authentication (default)
Authentication privacy

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 35 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

4 In the Authentication algorithm field, select either MDS or SHA.

Note:

This field is only configurable if the Security mode is not set

to No security.

5 In the User name field, enter the SNMPv3 user name.

6 In the Password field, enter the SNMPv3 password.
This field is only configurable if the Security mode is not set to No
security.
SNMPv3 passwords must be at least eight characters.
7 Click Change User Settings to apply the SNMP V3 changes.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 36 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

3.3

User Guide

Configuring Secure Communication Channels

IP-10G and IP-10E work with several standard encryption protocols and
algorithms for increased system security. The following sections provide
instructions for configuring these protocols and algorithms and other
communication security features:
Configuring Inactivity Timeout
Secure File Transfer and Server Authentication
Configuring HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure)
Downloading a Certificate
Configuring the Security File Name, Type and Format
Enabling the CA Certificate
Configuring FTP or SFTP (Secure FTP)
Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File
Generating a Security Certificate from a CSR File

3.3.1

Configuring Inactivity Timeout

The system automatically times out after a specified number of minutes with
no activity. To configure this timeout period:
1 Select Security > Security Configuration. The Security Configuration
page is displayed.

2 In the Communication inactivity timeout field, enter the timeout period

in minutes. The timeout can be from 1 to 60 minutes..
3 Click Apply.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 37 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

3.3.2

User Guide

Secure File Transfer and Server Authentication

IP-10G and IP-10E support Secured Shell protocol (SSH) and Telnet for secure
file transfer. SSHv1 and SSHv2 are supported. SSH is always operational. In
contrast, Telnet, which is enabled by default, can be disabled.
To disable Telnet:
1 Select Security > Security Configuration. The Security Configuration
page is displayed.

2 In the Telnet protocol field, select Disable.

3 Click Apply.
Server authentication is based on IP-10G/Es public key. The key exchange
algorithm is RSA. Supported encryptions are: aes128-cbc, 3des-cbc, blowfishcbc, cast128-cbc, arcfour128, arcfour256, arcfour, aes192-cbc, aes256-cbc,
aes128-ctr, aes192-ctr, aes256-ctr.
The server timeout for authentication is 10 minutes. This value cannot be
changed.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 38 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

3.3.3

User Guide

Configuring HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure)

The web interface protocol can be configured to be HTTP (default) or HTTPS,
but it cannot be set to both at the same time.
To configure HTTPS web protocol:
1 Create a CSR file, upload it and provide it to the Certificate Authority or
certificate generator. Refer to Generating a Certificate Signing Request
(CSR) File on page 42.
2 Configure the certificate file name, type, and format for each certificate
that you wish to download. Refer to Configuring the Security File Name,
Type and Format on page 40
3 Download the certificate to the NE. Refer to Downloading a Certificate on
page 40.
4 Download the CA certificate to the NE (optional). Refer to Downloading a
Certificate on page 40.
5 Enable the CA certificate (optional).
6 Set the web-protocol parameter to HTTPS:
i

Select Security > Security Configuration. The Security Configuration

page opens.
ii In the Security Parameters section, select HTTPS.
iii Click Apply to save your changes.
While switching to HTTPS mode, the following conditions must exist:
A WEB server certificate file must exist.
The certificates public key must be compatible with the IDUs private
key.
Notes:

For security reasons, this parameter is NOT copied by a

copy to mate operation. An unsecured unit should not be
able to override the security parameters of a secured unit
just by performing a copy to mate operation.

To configure HTTPS without certificates:

1 Upload the units public key:
i

Select Security > Security Configuration. The Security Configuration

page opens.

ii In the Upload Public Key Status & Command section, click Upload
Public Key. You can monitor the upload status in the Upload public
key status field of the Security Configuration page.
Note:

Uploads are performed using FTP/SFTP. The public key file

will be in PEM format.

2 Set the web-protocol parameter to HTTPS by performing Step 6 on

page 39.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 39 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

3.3.4

User Guide

Downloading a Certificate
To download an IDU server or CA certificate, you must perform the following
steps for each file type:
Note:

You must have admin privileges to perform this procedure.

1 Select Security > Security Configuration. The Security Configuration

page opens.
2 In the Security file name field, enter the certificate file name.
3 In the Security file type field, enter the digital certificate type. Options are
"Target certificate" for WEB server digital certificate, or "Target ca
certificate" for WEB CA digital certificate.
4 In the Security file format field, select the certificate file format: PEM (for
PEM formatted file) or DER (for DER formatted file).
5 In the WEB CA Certificate field, select Enable if the downloaded file is a
WEB CA digital certificate or Disable if the file is a "WEB server digital
certificate.
6 Click Download Certificate. You can monitor the status of the download
operation in the Download security status field in the Security
Configuration page.
7 It is recommended to refresh the Security Configuration page once the
certificate download operation is complete.
8 To apply the new certificate, the web server should be restarted. The web
server is automatically restarted when it is configured to HTTPS.

3.3.5

Configuring the Security File Name, Type and Format

To configure the security certificate file name, type, and format:
1 Select Security > Security Configuration. The Security Configuration
page opens.

2 In the Download Certificate Parameters section, define the security

certificate:
In the Security file name field, enter a name for the certificate.
In the Security type field, select the file type.
Valid file type values are either: Target Certificate for WEB server
digital certificate, or Target CA certificate for WEB CA digital
certificate.
In the Security type format field, select the file format.
Valid file formats are PEM and DER.
3. Click Apply to save your changes.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 40 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

3.3.6

User Guide

Enabling the CA Certificate

Determine whether to include the CA certificate into the web configuration
definitions. This is an optional configuration and is recommended for adapting
the web interface to all the web browsers applications.
To enable the CA certificate:
1. Select Security > Security Configuration. The Security Configuration
page opens.
2. Enable or disable the CA certificate in the Download Certificate Parameters
section:

Select Enable if the downloaded file is a WEB CA digital certificate.

Select Disable if the file is "WEB server digital certificate".

3. Restart the web server to apply the new certificate.

3.3.7

Configuring FTP or SFTP (Secure FTP)

Before uploading or downloading configuration archives, you must define FTP
settings.
IP-10G and IP-10E support the use of SFTP for the following operations:
Configuration upload and download

Uploading IDU unit information

Uploading a public key
Downloading certificate files

Downloading software

To configure local FTP or SFTP:

1. Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management and
click the FTP parameters link at the bottom of the Configuration
management page.

2. Specify the FTP server host.

In the Server IP address field, enter the IP of the host where the
archive is to be stored.
In the Server files location path field, enter the path in the host (FTP
directory) where the archive is to be stored.
For the default FTP path use set // for Windows, or set / for Linux.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 41 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

3. In the File transfer protocol field, select Ftp or Sftp to specify the FTP
mode.
4. Specify FTP login information.
In the User name field, enter the user name for the FTP session.

In the User password field, enter the password for the FTP session. If
you use the default user name (anonymous), use the host login for the
password.

5 Click Apply.
To configure remote FTP:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Software Management and click the
FTP parameters link at the bottom of the Software management page.

2. Specify the FTP server host.

In the Server IP address and path field, enter software update server
URL, where the software updates reside.
3. Specify FTP login information.
In the User name field, enter the user name for the FTP session.

In the User password field, enter the password for the FTP session. If
you use the default user name (anonymous), use the host login for the
password.

4 Click Apply.

3.3.8

Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File

In order to create a digital certificate for an IP-10G/E unit, or any other
network element (NE), a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) file should be
generated by the NE. The CSR contains information that will be included in the
NE's certificate such as the organization name, common name (domain name),
locality, and country. It also contains the public key that will be included in the
certificate. Certificate authority (CA) will use the CSR to create the desired
certificate for the NE.
When creating the CSR file, you will be prompted to input the following
parameters:

Common name The identify name of the element in the network (e.g.,
the IP address). The common name can be a network IP or the FQDN of the
element.
Organization The legal name of the organization.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 42 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Organizational Unit - The division of the organization handling the

certificate.
City/Locality - The city where the organization is located.
State/County/Region - The state/region where the organization is
located.
Country - The two-letter ISO code for the country where the organization
is location.
Email address - An email address used to contact the organization.

To generate a CSR file:

1 Select Security > CSR file. The CSR File page opens.

2 In the Country name field, enter the two-letter ISO code for the country
where the organization is location.
3 In the State or Province Name field, enter the state or region where the
organization is located.
4 In the Locality Name field, enter the city where the organization is
located.
5 In the Organization name field, enter the legal name of the organization.
6 In the Organizational unit name field, enter the division of the
organization handling the certificate.
7 In the Common Name field, enter the identify name of the element in the
network (e.g., IP address).
8 In the Email address field, enter an email address used to contact your
organization. The common name could be network IP or the FQDN of the
element.
9 Click Create CSR file.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 43 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

3.3.9

User Guide

Generating a Security Certificate from a CSR File

To generate a security certificate from the CSR text only:
1 Select Security > CSR file. The CSR File page opens.
2 Click the View CSR file link at the bottom of the page. The CSR file opens.

3 Copy the CSR file to paste into a CSR generator and give it to a certificate
generator or the Certificate Authority.
To generate a certificate from a CSR file via upload:
1 Select Security > CSR file. The CSR File page opens.
2 Enter the name of the CSR file in the Security file name field.

3 Click Apply.
4 When the Upload CSR file status field indicates Ready, click Upload File.
5 Give the CSR file to a certificate generator or the Certificate Authority.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 44 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Working with Configuration Files

This chapter includes:

Archiving the Configuration

Restoring the Default Configuration
Resetting the Unit

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 45 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

4.1

User Guide

Archiving the Configuration

In the Configuration Management page, you can manage unit information and
configuration archives.

4.1.1

Creating a Configuration Archive File

To create a unit information archive file:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 In the Configuration section under Upload Status & Commands, click
Create Archive.

4.1.2

Viewing Configuration Archive Creation Status

To view configuration archive creation status:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 In the Upload Status & Commands section of the Configuration
Management page, view the configuration archive creation status in the
Config creation status field. Possible status values are:
Ready
In Progress
Succeeded
Failed

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 46 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

4.1.3

User Guide

Uploading a Configuration Archive File

To upload a unit information archive file:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 In the Configuration section under Upload Status & Commands, click
Upload Archive.

4.1.4

Viewing Configuration Archive Upload Status

To view archive upload status:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 In the Upload Status & Commands section of the Configuration
Management page, view the archive upload status in the Config upload
status field. Possible status values are:
Ready
In Progress
Succeeded
Failed

4.1.5

Creating a Unit Information Archive File

To create a unit information archive file:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 In the Unit Information section under Upload Status & Commands, click
Create Archive.

4.1.6

Viewing Unit Information Archive Creation Status

To view unit information archive creation status:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 In the Upload Status & Commands section of the Configuration
Management page, view the unit information archive creation status in the
Unit info creation status field. Possible status values are:
Ready
In Progress
Succeeded
Failed

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 47 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

4.1.7

User Guide

Uploading a Unit Information Archive File

To upload a unit information archive file:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 In the Unit Information section under Upload Status & Commands, click
Upload Archive.

4.1.8

Viewing Unit Information Archive Upload Status

To view the unit information archive upload status:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 In the Upload Status & Commands section of the Configuration
Management page, view the archive upload status in the Unit info upload
status field. Possible status values are:
Ready
In Progress
Succeeded
Failed

4.1.9

Downloading a Configuration Archive File

To download a configuration archive file:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 In the Upload/Download Status & Commands section, click Download
Archive(s).

4.1.10 Viewing configuration file download status

To view configuration file download status:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 View the download status in the Config download status field, located in
the Upload/Download Status & Commands section. Possible values are:
Ready
In Progress
Succeeded
Failed
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 48 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

4.1.11 Uploading a Configuration Archive File

To download an archive file:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 In the Upload/Download Status & Commands section, click Upload
Archive(s).

4.1.12 Viewing configuration file installation status

To view configuration file download status:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 View the upload status in the Config upload status field, located in the
Upload/Download Status & Commands section. Possible values are:
Ready
In Progress
Succeeded
Failed

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 49 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

4.2

User Guide

Restoring the Default Configuration

You can reset the IDU to the default factory configuration:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 In the Set to factory default configuration section, click Activate.

3 Click OK to confirm the reset, or Cancel to return to the Configuration

Management window.

4.3

Resetting the Unit

To perform a system reset:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Resets. The Resets page opens.

2 In the Click to perform reset section, click Reset.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 50 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Configuring Users and Password Security

This chapter includes:

Configuring RADIUS
Adding Users
Deleting Users
Changing Your Password
Configuring a Timeout for Inactive Users

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 51 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

5.1

User Guide

Configuring RADIUS
IP-10G/E supports RADIUS user authentication. RADIUS can be enabled or
disabled by the user. Vendor-specific permission levels can be configured on
the RADIUS server.
The following RADIUS servers are supported:
FreeRADIUS
RADIUS on Windows Server (IAS)
First priority - Windows Server 2008
Second priority - Windows Server 2003
Cisco ACS
To configure RADIUS on the IP-10G/E:
1 Select Security > RADIUS. The RADIUS page opens.

2 In the Radius admin field, select Enable to enable RADIUS server.

3 In the Server ip address field, enter the IP address of the RADIUS server.
4 In the Server shared secret field, enter a secret word (up to 128
characters). This word must also be configured in the RADIUS server.
5 In the Server port field, enter a port number for the server (1 to 65536).
The RADIUS server must be configured with the same port number.
6 In the Server request attempts field, enter the number of retries (1 to
10).
7 In the Server timeout field, enter the timeout between retries (in
seconds) when attempting to connect to the RADIUS server (3-30).
8 Click Apply.
The RADIUS should be configured with the same parameters as the RADIUS
client.
In order to support IP-10G/E- specific privilege levels, the vendor-specific
field must be used. Ceragons IANA number for this field is 2281.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 52 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

The RADIUS server should be configured with the privilege levels supported
by IP-10G as follows:
Type of privilege (TLV) in
Vendor-Specific Field

Values

Interpretation

1-4

IP-10 privileges:

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

1 Viewer

2 Operator

3 Technician

4 Admin

Root privilege

Page 53 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

5.2

User Guide

Adding Users
When you add a new user, you must assign the user to a User Privilege group.
You must also assign a password to the user.
Passwords must comply with the following rules:
Must include at least 8 characters
Must include both numbers and letters (or spaces, symbols, etc.)
Must include both uppercase and lowercase letters
When calculating the number of character classes, upper-case letters used
as the first character and digits used as the last character of a password
are not counted
A password cannot be repeated within five password changes
Users can be required to change passwords at the interval set in the
Password Aging field. Passwords can also be set to expire at a fixed date.
To add a new user:
1 Select Security > Users and Groups. The Users and Groups page opens.

2 Click Add User underneath the Users list to define a new user. The Add a
user window opens.

3 In the User Privilege field, select a user group. Each user group includes a
set of user privileges, which are assigned to users in that group. Options
are:
Viewer - The user can only view, not configure, parameters.
Operator - The user can configure all parameters in the system, except
for security-related parameters (such as adding privilege groups).
Admin - The user has all Operator privileges, as well as the ability to
add new users.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 54 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Tech (technician) The user has all Admin privileges, as well as

access to the Linux OS shell.
4 Define the user login parameters:
In the User Name field, enter a user name for the user.
In the Password field, enter a password that will authenticate the user.
5

Specify the user password settings:

In the Expiration date field, click the calendar icon and select the
expiration date for the users password. To configure no expiration
date for the password, select Never.
In the Password Aging field, select the number of days for which a
password is valid for this user. Whenever this interval is reached, the
system will require the user to change his or her password. If you
select No aging, the user will never be required to change his or her
password.

6 Click Apply to add the new user.

5.3

Deleting Users
To delete a user:
1 Select Security > Users and Groups. The Users and Groups page opens.
2 In the Users table:
i Select the checkbox next to each user that you want to delete.
ii Click the Delete selected button underneath the Users list.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 55 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

5.4

User Guide

Changing Your Password

To change your password:
1 Select Security > Change Password. The Change Password page opens.

2
3
4
5

New IDUs contain the basic software version (6.xx.xx.), and require a software
upgrade in order to support all system features. You must download the new
software by FTP.
When downloading software, the IDU functions as an FTP client. You must
install FTP server software on the PC or laptop you are using to perform the
software upgrade. You may use Windows FTP Server or any other FTP server
application to perform the upgrade.
Note:

It is recommended to use FileZilla_Server-0_9_26 software

that can be downloaded from the web (freeware).

IP-10G/E includes a timed software installation feature that enables you to

configure a software upgrade to take place at a later time. This enables you to
perform software upgrades during periods of off-peak user traffic.
IP-10G/E software versions are released as zipped Linux RPM (Red Hat
Package Manager) files (22 files or more).
Note:

IDU software versions do not include RFU software, which

much be configured separately. Refer to Configuring RFU
Software and Firmware on page 65.

This section includes the following topics:

Viewing IDU Version Information

Downloading IDU Software Files
Upgrading the IDU Software Version
Rolling Back a Software Upgrade

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 59 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

6.1.1

User Guide

Viewing IDU Version Information

To view IDU version information:
1 Select Configuration > General > Versions > IDU. The IDU Versions
window opens.

The IDU Versions table includes the following columns:

Package Name Indicates the name of the software package.

Target Device Indicates the specific component that is contains the
version.
Running Version Indicates the version that is currently running on the
IDU.
Installed Version Displays IDU software files that were successfully
installed.
Upgrade Package Displays IDU software files that were successfully
downloaded to the IDU, and are ready to be installed when IDU upgrade is
executed.
Downgrade Package Displays IDU software files that were successfully
downloaded to the IDU, and are ready to be installed when IDU downgrade
is executed.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 60 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

6.1.2

User Guide

Downloading IDU Software Files

To download IDU software files:
1 Verify that your Windows firewall is disabled.
2 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Software Management. The
Software Management page opens.

3 Verify that the FTP server and remote server are properly configured.
Refer to Configuring FTP or SFTP (Secure FTP) on page 41.
4 In the New Version section, click Download to download a software
upgrade package. This may take a few minutes.

Note:

If you want to install an older version of the software, click

Download in the Old Version section rather than the New
Version section of the Software Management page.

5 Download or take the zipped software package (e.g., aidu-6.9.X.X.X.X.zip)

from FTP and save it under C:\updates.
6 Extract the files to C;\updates.
7 Remove the ZIP file and store it in another location (e.g., C:\IP-10).

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 61 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

The Download Status field displays the status of the software download.
Options are:
Ready
In-Progress
Success
Failure
To view the software download log, click the icon next to the Download
Status field.

6.1.3

Upgrading the IDU Software Version

If you are upgrading the software in a 1+1 nodal configuration, make sure to
perform the following steps:
1 Before initiating the upgrade, connect to the active IDU in the local site.
2 Select Configuration > Protection > Protection Parameters. The
Protection Parameters page opens.
3 Set Protection Lockout to: On.
4 Click Apply.
If you are upgrading the software in a 1+1 standalone configuration, upgrade
the standby IDU first, then upgrade the active IDU.
If you are upgrading the software in a 2+2 configuration, upgrade the I
To upgrade an IDUs software:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Software Management. The
Software Management page opens.
2 In the Installation Type section, specify the type of installation:
Regular The upgrade will be initiated immediately when you click
Upgrade.
Timed The upgrade will be initiated after a defined time interval.
3 For a timed installation, specify the number of minutes in the Timed Install
section of the Software Management page. When you click Upgrade, the
upgrade will be initiated after the defined number of minutes.
4 In the New Version section, click one of the following:
In a 1+1 nodal configuration, select the standby IDU and click Upgrade
Selected to upgrade the software in the standby IDU. This may take a
few minutes. Once the upgrade is complete, the standby IDU will
automatically reboot. Then, select the active IDU and click Upgrade
Selected. Once the upgrade is complete, verify in the Configuration >
General > Versions > IDU page that the new version is installed and
running.
In a 2+0 system, click Upgrade All to upgrade the software in both
IDUs.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 62 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

In a 2+2 configuration, click Upgrade All to upgrade the software in

both IDUs in the standby enclosure. Once the upgrade is complete in
both IDUs, the IDUs will automatically reboot. Then, go to the active
enclosure and click Upgrade All to upgrade both IDUs in the active
enclosure.
Note:

If you are downgrading to an older software version, click

Downgrade Selected or Download All in the Old Version
section instead of Upgrade Selected or Upgrade All in the
New Version section. Software downgrade requires a
special package for downgrade. For example:
downgrade-aidu-6.9.X.X.X.X.zip.

5 For a 1+1 configuration, select Configuration > Protection > Protection

Parameters, set Protection Lockout to Off, and click Apply.
The Install Status section indicates the current download status. Options are:
Ready
In-Progress
Success
Failure
For a timed installation, the Install Status section indicates the number of
remaining minutes until the installation begins.
Note:

Cancelling a timed installation operation will not abort an

installation that is already in progress.

To view the software installation log, click the icon next to the slot you want to
view in the Install Status section.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 63 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

6.1.4

User Guide

Rolling Back a Software Upgrade

Rolling back an installation restores the select unit or units to the previous
software version.
Note:

Rolling back is not the same as a downgrade. For example,

you could rollback a downgrade operation, which in effect
upgrades the unit to the software version it was running
before the downgrade.

To rollback a software installation:

1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Software Management. The
Software Management page opens.
2 In the Installation Type section, specify the type of software rollback:
Regular The rollback will be initiated immediately when you click
Upgrade.
Timed The rollback will be initiated after a defined time interval.
3 For a timed rollback, specify the number of minutes in the Timed Install
section of the Software Management page. When you click Rollback, the
rollback will be initiated after the defined number of minutes.
4 Optionally, in a 1+1 or 2+0 system, select Slot #1 or Slot #2 in the Install
Status section to rollback the software in only one IDU in the pair.
5 Underneath the Timed Install section, click one of the following:
To rollback the software in only one unit, click Rollback Selected to
upgrade the software in the unit selected in the Install Status section.
To rollback both units in a 1+1 or 2+0 pair, click Rollback All.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 64 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

6.2

User Guide

Configuring RFU Software and Firmware

RFU software and firmware is configured via the IDU. You can initiate RFU
software downloads and upgrades, and view the status of these operations, in
the RFU Download page.

This section includes:

Viewing RFU Version Information

Updating the RFU Software Version

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 65 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

6.2.1

To initiate an RFU download:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> RFU Download. The RFU Download
page opens.

2 Click Software Download.

The following fields display the RFU software download status:
RFU software download status - Displays the current state of RFU
software download.
RFU software download progress - Displays the download progress.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 68 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Configuring and Viewing Basic System

Information
This chapter includes:

Configuring and Viewing Unit System Information

Configuring System Date and Time
Configuring Network Timing Protocol (NTP) Parameters
Configuring Unit Serial and Part Numbers
Viewing System Application Files

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 69 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

7.1

User Guide

Configuring and Viewing Unit System Information

You can view and configure system information on the Unit Parameters page:
1 Select Configuration > General > Unit Parameters. The Unit Parameters
page opens.
2 The following fields in the Unit Parameters section of the Unit Parameters
page can be modified:

System name A name for the node (optional). By convention, this is

the nodes fully qualified domain name.
Slot label A name for the link. By convention, this is the name and
slot label of the unit across the radio link.
Contact person - The name of the person to be contacted when a
problem with the system occurs (optional).
System location - The actual physical location of the node or agent
(optional).
Measurement system The type of measurement you want the
system to use: Metric or Imperial.
3 The following fields in the Unit Parameters section of the Unit Parameters
page are read-only. The values in these fields are either automatically
generated or configured elsewhere.
IP address Displays the IP address that is configured in the
Management page
System description Provides a general description of the system.
System up time The length of time for which the system has been
continuously operating.
Voltage input The current input voltage.
IDU temperature The current temperature of the IDU.
RFU temperature The current temperature of the RFU.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 70 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

7.2

User Guide

Configuring System Date and Time

By default, the system date and time are derived from the operating system
clock. You can set new date and time values in the Unit Parameters page.
1 Select Configuration > General > Unit Parameters. The Unit Parameters
page opens.
2 You can set the following parameters in the Date & Time Configuration
section:

Click the calendar to set the date.

Click the time area to set the time.
Specify the offset from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) in the Offset from
GMT section.
To configure Daylight Saving Time:
1 Select Configuration > General > Unit Parameters. The Unit Parameters
page opens.
2 In the Daylight Saving Time section:

In the Start date field, click the calendar to set the date when daylight
saving time will automatically be activated.
In the End date field, click the calendar to set the date when daylight
saving time will automatically be terminated.
In the Offset field, specify the offset (in hours) from Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 71 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

7.3

User Guide

Configuring Network Timing Protocol (NTP)

Parameters
You can view and set Network Timing Protocol (NTP) parameters in the NTP
Server Parameters window.
1 Select Configuration > General > NTP. The NTP Server Parameters page
opens.

2 In the Admin field, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable the NTP
server.
3 In the Server IP field, enter the IP address of the NTP server.
The following fields are read-only:

Status Indicates whether the NTP server is Up or Down.

Sync server Displays details about the NTP server with which the
system is currently synchronized. The following values may appear:
IP address of the remote NTP server
Local, if locked to the local elements real-time clock
NA, when Admin is set to Disable and not synchronized with any
clock.
Poll interval The interval used by the NTP client to maintain
synchronization with the current NTP server.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 72 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

7.4

User Guide

Configuring Unit Serial and Part Numbers

User Guide

Viewing Current License Details

The Licensing page displays details about the current IDUs license status. To
view the IDUs current license:
1 Select Configuration > General > Licensing. The Licensing page opens.

The License type field in the Current License section displays the current
license type.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 76 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

8.2

User Guide

Loading a New License Key

A new license key must be obtained from your Ceragon representative. Once
you receive a new license key, you must load the new license key into the IDU:
1 Select Configuration > General > Unit Parameters. The Unit Parameters
page opens.

2 Verify that the three left characters of the license key match the three right
characters of the IDU Serial Number, displayed near the bottom of the Unit
Parameters page.
Note:

You may have to scroll down the Unit Parameters page to

display the IDU Serial Number.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 77 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

3 Select Configuration > General > Licensing. The Licensing page opens.

4 Enter the license key in the License code field.

5 Click Apply.
6 Perform a cold reset of the IDU. The new license will take be activated only
after a cold reset.
7 Select Configuration > General > Licensing. The Licensing page opens.
8 Verify that the license parameters were updated.
Note:

If the license key itself is not legal (e.g., a typing mistake or

an invalid serial number), a License Violation alarm is raised
specific to the problem with the license. In the event of a
License Violation alarm, radio port capacity is automatically
limited to ~3Mbps, allowing only management channels to
the remote end. In order to clear the alarm, you must
configure the system to comply with the loaded license, then
issue a cold-reset. When the system returns online, it checks
the legality of the configuration against the license limits. If
no violation is detected, no alarm is raised, and the radio is
fully operational.

For additional information:

Resetting the Unit

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 78 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

8.3

User Guide

Replacing a License
This feature requires:

Software version I6.9 or higher

If an operator needs to change its level of feature support or capacity, a new

license key can be issued to support the new level of feature support and
capacity. Once the license is entered into the IP-10G, a validation key is issued
confirming the license change in the event that the operator is entitled to a
refund. Once the new license key is entered, any previously used license keys
become invalid and can no longer be used.
The IP-10G/E licensing mechanism provides license keys per IDU serial
number. You cannot use the same license key on a different IDU. However, in
some cases, it may be necessary to downgrade the IDUs capabilities and
obtain a refund for the difference between the supported features and
capabilities on the old and the new license.
To replace the IDU license and obtain a refund:
1 In the LMS server, select the IDU and the set of license you want to reclaim
for a refund. The LMS generates a new license for the specified IDU
without the reclaimed features. The new generated license key is of a new
type (30 characters long, as opposed to 17 characters long).
2 Load the new license key to the IDU and reset the IDU, as described in
Loading a New License Key on page 77.
3 After loading the new license, the IDU generates a Validation Number.

4 Provide the Validation Number to your Ceragon representative, or load the

Validation Number into the LMS server. Available credits for the reclaimed
licenses part numbers will be updated. You can use refunded credits to
generate licenses for other IDUs.
Note:

For instructions on using the LMS server, refer to FibeAir IP10 License Management System, DOC-00019183.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 79 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

The license replacement/reuse feature is subject to the following limitations:

The new license key is a new type of license key that consists of 30
characters. The old license key is only 17 characters long.
The new license key can only be loaded on an IDU running software
version I6.9 or later. Earlier software releases will not accept the 30
characters license key, and license reuse will therefore not be possible. If
the IDU is running earlier software release, you must upgrade the IDU
software to I6.9 or higher before performing the license
replacement/reuse procedure.
License replacement/reuse does not have any impact on the IDUs
functionality unless the license is violated.
An IDU will not accept old type (17 characters) license keys after a new
(30 characters) license key has been loaded.
The license replacement/reuse and refunding procedure may be
performed several times on the same IDU. Each time, a new 30 character
license key is generated by the LMS.
An IDU will not accept a 30 character license key that was generated
before the license key currently installed on the IDU.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 80 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

8.4

User Guide

Working with a Demo License

You can use a Demo license for 60 days for full capacity and a full feature-set.
To enable or disable the demo license:
1 Select Configuration > General > Licensing. The Licensing page opens.
2 In the Demo admin field, in the Demo License section, select Enable to
enable the Demo license, or Disable to disable the Demo license.

Demo timer is a read-only field that displays the time remaining for use of the
Demo license.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 81 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

8.5

User Guide

Viewing Licensed Usage and Features

The License Features section of the Licensing page indicates which features
are licensed for use according to the currently-installed license key.
1 Select Configuration > General > Licensing. The Licensing page opens.

The following fields appear in the License Features section of the Licensing
page:
ACM license Indicates whether Adaptive Coding Modulation (ACM) is
installed.
Switch application license Displays the type of Ethernet Switching
application licensed for the IDU (Single Pipe or Switch).
Capacity Displays the maximum licensed radio capacity.
Network resiliency license Indicates whether the resiliency
(RSTP/SNCP) feature is available.
TDM-only capacity license Indicates whether the TDM capacity license
is installed. This license limits the amount of TDM trails that can be
mapped to a radio. If this license is installed, any radio script can be loaded
but the number of TDM trails is limited.
Note:

This license is not relevant for the IP-10E.

TDM-only capacity value Indicates the amount of TDM trail capacity

User Guide

Management Overview
An IP-10G/E system can be configured to use between 0 and 3 Ethernet
management ports. The default number of ports is 2. Ethernet ports 5, 6, and 7
are the only ports that can be assigned to be management ports:
Configured Number of Management Ports

Management Interfaces

Ethernet 7

2 (default)

Ethernet 7, Ethernet 6

Ethernet 7, Ethernet 6, Ethernet 5

None

Management ports are connected to the switch (bridge) and are configured to
Learning mode.
Note:

Management ports can be configured to have one of the

following capacities: 64kbps, 128kbps, 256kbps, 512kbps,
1024kbps, 2048kbps (default). Capacity is limited by the
port ingress rate limit.

In a nodal configuration, all management is carried out through the main unit,
which communicates with the extension units via the nodal backplane.
Therefore, management traffic must reach the main unit in order for
management to be available.
A local craft terminal can be used to configure each IDU individually using CLI.
However, with the exception of the main unit, functionality is limited to local
configurations. Access to all other units is provided via the main units CLI. For
remote channels (e.g., CeraWeb, PolyView, and Telnet) this requires IP traffic
to be directed to the main unit.
The IP address of the node is the address of the main unit in the node. In a 1+1
configuration, the node will have two IP addresses (the addresses of each of
the main units) and should be managed via the Active unit.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 85 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

9.2

User Guide

Configuring the Management Ports

1 Select Configuration > General > Management. The Management page
opens. Management ports are configured in the Management Ports section,
towards the bottom of the Management page.
2 In the bottom of the Management page, click Refresh. The current
parameters are displayed.

3 In the Number of ports field, specify the number of ports that are used for
management data. The IDU has three ports for local management: Port 7,
Port 6 and Port 5. You may enable none or up to 3 ports.
4 When you are using In-band management, in the In-band Management
VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN ID that is used to identify management
traffic.
5 In the Type drop-down menu, select the management mode of operation:
In band or Out of band.
In-band management refers to a method in which the network
management software sends management packets through the same
network it is managing. Out-of-band management uses an overlay
network to communicate with the managed elements.
Out-of-band management uses the Wayside Channel (WSC) for
management access to the IDUs in the network. An external switch
using some form of STP should be used to obtain resilient management
access and resolve management loops.
6 In the Capacity drop-down menu, select the bandwidth that is allocated to
the management port(s).
7 In the Auto negotiation drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:
On - Enables this feature.
Off - Disables this feature.
8 In the Rate drop-down menu, select the bit rate you want for the
management port(s).
9 In the Duplex drop-down menu, select Half or Full.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 86 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10 Specify whether to block management frames towards the line interface by

selecting Enable or Disable from the Block management frames drop
down list.
Note:

This option applies only if the Ethernet application type is

configured as Smart Pipe.

11 Click Apply. The parameters for the management port(s) are configured.

For additional information:

Configuring Out-of-Band Management

Configuring In-Band Management

Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode

Configuring the Wayside Channel

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 87 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

9.3

User Guide

Configuring Out-of-Band Management

With Out-of-Band management, the remote system is managed using the
wayside channel. On both local and remote units, the wayside channel must be
connected to a management port using an Ethernet cross-cable. The Wayside
channel can be configured to Narrow capacity (~64kbps) or Wide capacity
(~2Mbps). It is recommended to use Wide capacity in order to achieve better
management performance.

For additional information:

Configuring the Wayside Channel

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 88 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

9.4

User Guide

Configuring In-Band Management

With In-Band management, the remote IDU is managed by specific frames that
are sent as part of the traffic. These frames are identified as management
frames by a special VLAN ID configured by the user. This VLAN ID must be
used ONLY for management. It is NOT possible to configure more than a single
VLAN ID for management.
Important:

It is highly recommended to classify the management VLAN

ID to the highest queue, in order to ensure the ability to
manage remote units even under congestion scenarios.

The local unit is the gateway for In-Band management. The remote unit is
managed via its traffic ports (the radio port, for example), so that no
management ports are needed.

This section includes:

Configuring In-Band Management in a 1+1 Link

In-Band Management in Nodal Configurations

GbE In-Band Management in a Node

In-Band Management Isolation in Smart Pipe Mode

For additional information:

Configuring the Management Ports

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 89 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

9.4.1

User Guide

Configuring In-Band Management in a 1+1 Link

In-Band management in node with protected main units

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 93 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

9.4.3

User Guide

GbE In-Band Management in a Node

In nodal configurations, the Ethernet bandwidth available between extension
units and main units is limited by the Fast Ethernet interfaces to 100Mbps.
In order to achieve resiliency and have a configuration ready for higher
bandwidth traffic, it is possible to set up the node in a ring configuration, using
optical SFP connections between the IDUs as shown in the following figure.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 94 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

9.4.4

User Guide

In-Band Management Isolation in Smart Pipe Mode

This feature is required by carrier of carriers customers that provide
Ethernet leased lines to third party users. The third party user connects its
equipment to the Ethernet interface of the IP-10, while all the other network
interfaces, particularly the radios, are managed by the carrier of carriers
user. In that case, management frames that are sent throughout the network
to manage the carrier of carrier equipment must not egress the line
interfaces that are used by the third party customer, since these frames will, in
effect, spam the third party user network.
The following figure describes the management blocking scenario.

3rd Party User

Network

Carrier of carriers network

(Provider Network)
IP-10

IP-10
Mng
Frames

Mng
Frames

Block providers
management Frames

3rd Party User

Network

Block providers
management Frames

Provider Network
Management Center

In switch modes, it is very easy to achieve the required functionality by a

simple VLAN exclude configuration on the relevant ports. However, in Smart
Pipe mode, VLANs cannot be used to block traffic, since the line and radio
interfaces are transparent by definition to all VLANs. Thus, this management
blocking capacity is a special feature for Smart Pipe applications that blocks
management frames from egressing the line interface.
This feature is relevant only to Smart Pipe applications. It is also relevant only
to standalone units or the main unit in a nodal configuration. There is no
purpose in blocking the In-Band management VLAN in extension units, since
the management VLAN can be blocked in the Ethernet switch port.
Management isolation and blocking behavior is controlled by the blockmanagement-towards-line CLI parameter. The default is disable. To enable this
feature, enter:
block-management-towards-line enable
You can also set this parameter in the Management page of the Web EMS. For
instructions, refer to Configuring the Management Ports on page 86.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 95 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

10.

User Guide

Configuring Traffic Interfaces

This chapter includes:

Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode

Configuring Ethernet Ports
Assigning VLANs to a Port
Configuring Automatic State Propagation
Configuring LAGs
Configuring Peer Port Settings
Configuring E1/DS1 Interfaces
Configuring STM-1/OC-3 Interfaces

Configuring Pseudowire

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 96 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

10.1

User Guide

Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode

FibeAir IP-10G/E supports Smart Pipe, Managed Switch, and Metro Switch
configurations. Smart Pipe is the default configuration, and does not require a
separate license. Configuring the system to Managed or Metro Switch requires
a separate license.

This section includes:

Switch Configurations Overview

Configuring Smart Pipe Switch Mode
Configuring Managed and Metro Switch

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 97 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10.1.1 Switch Configurations Overview

Single (Smart) Pipe allows only a single GbE interface for traffic (optical GbESFP or Electrical GBE, 10/100/1000 mbps). Traffic originating from any GbE
interface is sent directly to the radio and vice versa. The Smart Pipe method
enables you to use QoS configurations. The Fast Ethernet interfaces (10/100
mbps) interfaces are "functional" interfaces (WSC, Protection, Management).
Managed Switch is a 802.1Q VLAN-aware bridge, allowing L2 switching based
on VLANs. Each traffic port can be configured as an "access" port or a "trunk"
port. A port can also be configured as a hybrid port that allows both tagged
and untagged frames.
Managed Switch Mode
Type

VLANs

Allowed Ingress Frames

Allowed Egress Frames

Access

A default VLAN should be

attached to access port.

Only Untagged frames (or Tagged

with VID=0 "Priority Tagged").

Untagged frames.

Trunk

A range of VLANs, or "all"

VLANs should be attached to
trunk port

Only Tagged frames.

Tagged frames.

Hybrid

A range of VLANs, or all VLANs Tagged and untagged frames.

should be attached to trunk
port.

Tagged and untagged

frames.

A default VLAN should be

attached to access port.

The Managed Switch method allows QoS configuration, and all Ethernet ports
are allowed for traffic.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 98 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

The following table lists VLANs that are reserved for internal use in Managed
Switch mode.
VLANs Reserved for Internal Use in Managed Switch Mode
VLAN

Description

Remark

Frames with VLAN=0 are considered untagged. This

VLAN is used in order to prioritize untagged traffic

Default VLAN. This VLAN is always defined in the

database, and all trunk ports are members of this
VLAN. VLAN 1 cannot be deleted from the database
and not from Trunk port membership.

4091

Cannot be used for in-band management. Traffic

frames carrying this VLAN are not allowed in Smart
Pipe mode.

4092

Internal VLANs.

4093

Smart Pipe: Frames carrying these VLANs are not

allowed.

Used for protection internal

communication.
Used for Wayside.

4094

Managed Switch: "Access" traffic ports cannot be

associated with any of these default VLANs.

Used for internal management.

4095

Not defined.

Metro Switch is an 802.1ad Provider Bridge, allowing Q-in-Q switching

capabilities. Each traffic port can be assigned as a "Customer Network" port or
a "Provider Network" port. The port attributes are listed in the following
table:
Allowed Egress
Type
VLANs
Allowed Ingress Frames
Frames
Customer
Network

Specific S-VLAN should be

Untagged frames or tagged (C- Untagged frames of
associated with the
tag) frames
tagged (C-tag) frames
customer network port

Provider
Network

A range of S-VLANs or all

S-VLANs should be
associated with the
provider network port

Note:

Only S-tagged frames, (in

accordance with the configured
"provider ether-type", which is
0x88a8 by default)

S-tagged frames,
carrying the configured
provider ether-type,
(0x88a8 by default)

S-Tag Ether type can be configured to one of the following

values: 0x88a8 (default), 0x8100, 0x9100, or 0x9200.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 99 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10.1.2 Configuring Smart Pipe Switch Mode

This section explains how to configure the Ethernet switch to Smart Pipe
mode. When you are using the Smart Pipe mode, Ethernet switching is
disabled, and only a single Ethernet interface is used for traffic. The IDU
operates as a point-to-point microwave Ethernet radio.
To configure the Ethernet switch to Smart Pipe:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Switch Configuration. The
Switch Configuration page opens.
2 Click Refresh. The current Ethernet switch configuration opens.

3 In the Ethernet Application Type section, select Single pipe.

4 Click Apply. The IDU is configured to Smart Pipe mode.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 100 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10.1.3 Configuring Managed and Metro Switch Mode

This feature requires:

L2 Switch license

To configure the Ethernet switch to Managed Switch or Metro Switch:

1 select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Switch Configuration. The
Switch Configuration window opens.
2 Click Refresh. The current Ethernet switch configuration opens.
3 In the Ethernet Application Type section, select one of the following
options:

Managed switch - Ethernet switching is enabled and all the ports are
used for traffic.

Metro switch - Ethernet switching is enabled and all the ports are
used for traffic. You must select this option to use Ethernet Q-in-Q
provider switch.

4 Click Apply. The Managed or Metro switch is enabled.

Note:

Depending on the current configuration, the Apply button

may be located in LAG load balancing section.

5 From the bottom of the Switch Configuration window, click Refresh. The
current Switch Configuration parameters are displayed.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 101 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Configure the LAG load balancing setting.

In the LAG load balancing section, select one of the following load
balancing options:
Simple XOR - Performs XOR on the last three bits of the Packet
Source MAC address (SA) and the Destination MAC address (DA).
Depending on the XOR result, the system selects the link to be used
in the LAG.
The HASH mechanism distributes flows across multiple egress
ports in a LAG. It uses a proprietary scrambling function, and uses
the last three bits (LSBs) of the DA, SA. This means that two flows
with the same three LSB bits, but different MSB bits, still egress on
the same port.

ii In the LAG load balancing section, click Apply. The LAG load balancing
options are configured.
7 In the bottom of the Switch Configuration window, click Refresh. The
current VLAN ID parameters are displayed beneath the Unit Allowed VIDs
section.

8 The following list explains the columns are in the Units allowed VIDs
section:
VLAN ID - Specific ID for this VLAN.

Name - Configured name for the VLAN.

Status - Indicates whether this VLAN is Active or Passive.

Member Ports - Lists which IDU ports allow this VLAN.

9 Configure the VLAN IDs for the switch.

From the Operation drop-down menu, select the VLAN operation you
want to perform for the switch:
Set - Add VLANs to the database.
Remove - Remove VLANs from the database.
Change name - Change the name of a configured VLAN.
Disable - Suspend usage of a configured VLAN.
Enable - Activate a configured VLAN.

ii In the Start VID and End VID fields, enter the VLAN start and end IDs.
iii In the Name field, specify a unique name for the VLAN.
10 Click Apply. The VLANs for the switch are defined.
11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 as necessary and click Refresh. The parameters of
the defined VLANs are displayed beneath the Unit Allowed VIDs section.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 102 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

For additional information:

Configuring Feature and Capacity Licenses

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 103 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

10.2

User Guide

Configuring Ethernet Ports

Related topics:

Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode

IP-10G/E supports two dual GbE interfaces. For each of these interfaces, you
can configure the desired interface: Electrical GbE (10/100/1000) interface or
Optical GbE (SFP) interface. You cannot use SFP with electrical stack. SFP
supports only optical stack.
In Smart Pipe mode, only a single Ethernet interface can be used. The options
are:
Eth1: Electrical GbE or Optical GbE.

Eth3: Electrical FE

In Managed Switch and Metro Switch modes, there are no interface

limitations. This means that any GbE and/or FE ports can be used.
It is possible to use an electrical interface at one end of the link, and an optical
interface at the other end. In order to change interfaces, it is essential to
disable the active interface first, and then to enable the other interface.
Port configuration differs somewhat depending on which switching mode
your system is using. The following sections explain how to configure a Smart
Pipe port and a Metro Switch or Managed Switch port, respectively.

10.2.1 Configuring a Single Pipe Port

1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Ethernet Ports. The Ethernet Ports
page opens.
2 Click Refresh. The current Ethernet Ports parameters are displayed.
Ethernet Ports Page

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 104 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

3 Click next to the port you want to configure. The Ethernet port settings
are displayed.

4 From the Port admin drop-down menu, select Enable to activate the port.
5 From the Connector type drop-down menu, select RJ 45 or Optical
connector type.
Note:

This field is only relevant for the two GbE ports, Eth1 and
Eth2. All the other Ethernet ports are RJ-45 ports only.

6 From the Auto negotiation drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:
Enable - The system controls the flow of data.
Disable - Deactivates the Auto negotiation feature.
7 From the Port learning drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:

Enable
Disable

8 From the Flow control drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:

On
Off

9 From the Port service type drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:

Note:

Service network point

Access port
The Port service type is configured for the PolyView NMS
Ethernet services.

10 Click Apply. The Smart Pipe Ethernet port settings are configured.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 105 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10.2.2 Configuring a Managed Switch or Metro Switch Port

To configure the settings for an Ethernet port in Managed Switch or Metro
Switch mode:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Ethernet Ports. The Ethernet Ports
page opens.
2 Click Refresh. The current Ethernet Ports parameters are displayed.
3 Expand the Ethernet port. The port settings are displayed.

4 From the Port admin drop-down menu, select Enable to activate the port.
5 From the Connector type drop-down menu, select RJ 45 or Optical
connector type.
Note:

This field is only relevant for the two GbE ports, Eth1 and
Eth2. All the other Ethernet ports are RJ-45 ports only.

6 From the Type drop-down menu select the option that is appropriate to
your configuration.
i

Managed Switch ports can be can be one of the following types:

Access
Trunk
Hybrid

ii Metro Switch ports can be one of the following types:

Customer Network
Provider Network
7 In the Default VLAN ID field, enter the default VLAN ID for tagged frames
on this port.
8 From the Auto negotiation drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:
Enable - The system controls the flow of data.

Disable - Deactivates the Auto negotiation feature.

9 From the Port learning drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:
Enable

Disable

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 106 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10 From the Flow control drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:
On

Off

From the Port service type drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:
Service network point

Note:

Access port
The Port service type is configured for the PolyView NMS
Ethernet services.

11 Click Apply. The port settings are configured.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 107 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

10.3

User Guide

Assigning VLANs to a Port

To assign VLAN IDs to a port:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Switch Configuration. The
Switch Configuration page opens.
2 In the Unit allowed VIDs section of the Switch Configuration page, select a
VLAN.

3 Select one of the following options in the Operation field:

Set - Adds the VLANs to the database.
Remove - Removes the VLANs from the database.
Change name - Changes the VLAN name.
Disable - Suspends usage of the selected VLAN.
Enable - Activates the selected VLAN.
4 In the Start VID and End VID fields, enter the VLAN start and end IDs.
5 In the Name field, enter a unique name for the VLAN.
6 Click Apply to save your VLAN definitions.
The defined VLANs are summarized at the bottom of the window.
VLAN ID Displays the specific ID for this VLAN.
Name Displays the configured name for the VLAN.
Status Indicates whether the VLAN is Active or Passive.
Member Ports - Lists which IDU ports allow this VLAN.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 108 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

10.4

User Guide

Configuring Automatic State Propagation

Automatic state propagation enables propagation of radio failures back to the
line, to improve recovery performance. The feature enables the user to
configure which criteria will force the GbE port (or ports in case of remote
fault) to be muted/shut down, to allow the network find alternative paths.
In Smart Pipe mode, upon radio failure, Eth1 is muted when configured as
optical or shutdown when configured as electrical.
In Managed Switch or Metro Switch mode, the switchs Radio port (Eth8) is
forced to be disabled. Eth8 cannot be muted, but only disabled in both
directions.
In 2+0 Multi-Radio mode, Automatic State Propagation can be triggered upon
a failure in a single IDU or upon a failure in both IDUs.
It is recommended to configure both ends of the link to the same Automatic
State Propagation configuration.
If the link uses in-band management, when the port is muted or shut down,
management distributed through the link might be lost. If this occurs, the unit
will not be manageable. The unit will only become manageable again when the
port is un-muted or enabled.
To configure automatic state propagation for an Ethernet port:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Ethernet Ports. The Ethernet Ports
page opens.
2 In the Automatic State Propagation field underneath the ports table,
select Enable or Disable to enable or disable Automatic State Propagation.

3 In the Fault criteria section of the Ethernet Ports page:

Note:

In the Ethernet shutdown Rx profile threshold field, select a profile.

Ethernet shuts down when radio performance degrades below the
specified profile.
This option is only enabled if ACM adaptive mode is active.

ii In the Local Excessive BER field, select Enable or Disable to

determine whether local excessive BER is propagated as a fault.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 109 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

iii In the Local LOC field, select Enable or Disable to determine whether a
Loss of Carrier alarms is propagated as a fault.
Note:

This is only relevant for optical GbE interfaces in Smart Pipe

mode.

4 In the Remote Fault field, select Enable or Disable to enable these settings
for the remote interface.
5 Click Apply.
When Automatic State Propagation is enabled:

Local LOF will always be set to Enable, which means that Radio Loss of
Frame (LOF) faults are always propagated.
Link ID Mismatch will always be set to Enable, which means that Radio
Link ID Mismatch faults are always propagated.

The following table describes interface behavior based on the Automatic State
Propagation configuration
User Configuration

Optical (SFP) GbE port

Electrical GbE port
Functionality - Smart Pipe Mode (10/100/1000) Functionality
- Smart Pipe Mode

Radio Port functionality

Managed/Metro Switch
Mode

Automatic State Propagation No mute is issued.

disabled.

No shutdown.

Local LOF, Link-ID mismatch

(always enabled)

Mute the LOCAL port when one or

more of the following events occurs:

Shut down the LOCAL port when one or more of the following
events occurs:

1. Radio-LOF on the LOCAL unit.

2. Link ID mismatch on the LOCAL

unit.

2. Link ID mismatch on the LOCAL unit.

Mute the LOCAL port when ACM Rx

profile degrades below a preconfigured profile on the LOCAL unit

Shut down the LOCAL port when ACM Rx profile degrades

below a pre-configured profile on the LOCAL unit.

Ethernet shutdown threshold

profile.

This capability is applicable only when ACM is enabled.

Local Excessive BER

Mute the LOCAL port when an

Shut down the LOCAL port when an Excessive BER alarm is
Excessive BER alarm is raised on the raised on the LOCAL unit
LOCAL unit

Local LOC

Mute the LOCAL port when a GbELOC alarm is raised on the LOCAL
unit.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

No shutdown.

N/A

Note1: Electrical-GbE cannot be

muted. Electrical-GbE LOC will
not trigger Shutdown, because it
will not be possible to enable the
port when the LOC alarm is
cleared

Page 110 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

User Configuration

Optical (SFP) GbE port

Electrical GbE port
Functionality - Smart Pipe Mode (10/100/1000) Functionality
- Smart Pipe Mode

Radio Port functionality

Managed/Metro Switch
Mode

Remote Fault

Mute the LOCAL port when one or

Shut down the LOCAL port,
more of the following events is raised when one or more of the
on the REMOTE unit:
following events is raised on the
REMOTE unit:
1. Radio-LOF (on remote).

Shut down the LOCAL port,

when one or more of the
following events is raised on
the REMOTE unit:

2. Link-ID mismatch (on remote).

1. Radio-LOF (on remote).

3. GbE-LOC alarm is raised (on

remote).

2. Link-ID mismatch (on remote). 2. Link-ID mismatch (on

remote).
3. ACM Rx profile crossing

4. ACM Rx profile crossing threshold

(on remote), only if enabled on the
LOCAL.

threshold (on remote), only if

enabled on the LOCAL.

3. ACM Rx profile crossing

threshold (on remote), only
if enabled on the LOCAL.

4. Excessive BER (on remote),

5. Excessive BER (on remote), only only if enabled on the LOCAL. 4. Excessive BER (on
if enabled on the LOCAL.
Note1: Electrical-GbE cannot be remote), only if enabled on
muted. Electrical-GbE LOC will the LOCAL.
not trigger "Shut-down", because
it will not be possible to enable
the port when LOC alarm is
cleared

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 111 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

10.5

User Guide

Configuring LAGs
This section includes:

LAG Overview
Creating a LAG
Configuring a LAG
Removing Ports from a LAG
Configuring LAG Load Balancing

Related topics:

Configuring Multi-Unit LAG

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 112 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10.5.1 LAG Overview

Link aggregation enables you to group several ports into a single logical
channel bound to a single MAC address. Traffic sent to the ports in such a
group is distributed through a load balancing function. The group is called a
LAG.
LAGs are virtual ports that do not permanently exist in the system. A LAG is a
logical port with its own MAC address that differs from that of the component
ports. A LAG is created as soon as the first physical port is added to the LAG.
LAGs may include ports with the following constraints:

Only traffic ports (including the radio port), not functional ports (e.g.,
management and WSC), can belong to a LAG.
LAG can only be used in IDUs which are configured for Managed Switch or
Metro Switch.
All ports in a LAG must be in the same IDU (same switch)
There can be up to three LAGs per IDU.
A LAG can contain from 1 to 5 physical ports
GbE ports (1 and 2) and FE ports (3-7) cannot be in the same LAG, even if
the GbE ports are configured as 100Mbps.
For GbE LAGs, both interfaces must be of the same type (electrical or
optical).
The Radio port (Eth8) can only be in a LAG with GbE ports. The GbE ports
can be either electrical or optical.
The ports in a LAG must have the same configuration.
All ports in a LAG group must have the same data rate (10, 100, or 1000
Mbps).

When a LAG is created by adding a first port to it, the LAG automatically
inherits all the ports characteristics, except for the following:
xSTP role (edge, non-edge)
Path cost
All Ethernet port parameters can be configured in a LAG. These parameters
are inherited by the LAGs physical component ports, and are unavailable for
physical ports belonging to the LAG, with the following exceptions:
Admin
Flow control
Ingress rate limiting policer name
Shaper (egress rate limiting)

Peer port parameters

MAC address
IP address
Slot ID
Port number
Description

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 113 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

The following settings must be identical between a LAG and the ports being
added to it. If they are not identical, the ports inclusion in the LAG will be
blocked:
QoS configuration
Port MAC DA QoS classification
Port VID QoS classification
Port initial QOS classification
Port default QoS classification
Port VLAN PBITs priority remap
Egress scheduling scheme
Data rate
Type (access/trunk or cn/pn)
Interface (electrical/optical)

Duplex
Auto-negotiation

VLANs
VLAN list must be identical
allow all is considered a different value (must be equal in all ports)
Learning state

In addition, ports with CFM MEP/MIPs cannot be added to a LAG (which may
have its own MEP/MIPs).

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 114 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10.5.2 Creating a LAG

To define a LAG:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Ethernet Ports. The Ethernet Ports
page opens.
2 Click the Create LAG port button underneath the ports table. The Create
new LAG port window opens.

3 In the representation of the IDU in the Create new LAG port window, select
the ports to include in the LAG. Selected ports are highlighted.
Note:

Ports that do not meet the criteria described in LAG

Configuring Peer Port Settings

The IP table page enables you to configure the characteristics of the peer port,
to which the local port of the element is connected.
Each IDU port has its own IP table, which enables the configuration of the
characteristics of the peer port to which it is connected.
To configure peer port settings:
1 Select Configuration > General > IP Table. The IP Table page opens.

2
3
4
5

Click + to the left of the port to open the ports IP table

In the Peer MAC address field, enter the MAC address of the peer port.
In the Peer IP address field, enter the IP address of the peer port.
In the Peer slot ID field, enter the slot ID of the IDU in which the peer port
is located. The slot can be from 0 to 6, where 0 is used when the other side
is a standalone unit, and 1-6 are used for the other sides nodal enclosure
slot IDs.
6 In the Peer port number field, enter the peer port number.
7 Optionally, in the Peer description field, add a general description of the
peer port.
8 From the LLDP admin drop down list, select the LLDP protocol for the
port. Options are:
Enable transmit only LLDP agent will transmit LLDP frames on this
port and it will not update information about the remote systems.
Enable receive only LLDP agent will receive, but it will not transmit
LLDP frames on this port.
Enable receive and transmit LLDP agent will transmit and receive
LLDP frames on this port.
Disable (default) LLDP agent will not transmit or receive LLDP
frames on this port.
9 Click Apply to save your configuration settings.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 120 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

10.7

User Guide

Configuring E1/DS1 Interfaces

Note:

This section is not relevant for the IP-10E.

IP-10G contains an MDR69 connector in which 16 E1/DS1 ports are available

(ports 1 through 16).
Above the MDR69 connector is an add-on slot which can contain a fieldupgradable T-Card with either 16 additional E1/DS1 ports, an STM-1/OC-3
port, or 16 E1/DS1 pseudowire processing. The T-Cards are field-upgradable.
The T-Card is not a standalone entity within the IP-10G. When inserted in the
system, the new interfaces become integral interfaces of the IP-10G and
E1/DS1 ports 17-32 will be added to the existing 1-16.
To configure E1/DS1 ports:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > E1 ports or Configuration >
Interfaces > DS1 ports. The E1 Ports or DS1 Ports page opens.

2 In the Excessive BER threshold field, select the level above which an
excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link
3 In the Signal degrade threshold field, select the level above which a
Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected over the link.
4 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 121 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

The following information opens about the E1/DS1 ports in the E1 Ports and
DS1 Ports pages:
The Line Coding 1-8 and Line Coding 9-16 fields display the T1 line
coding, which can be B8ZS or AMI.
In the E1 or DS1 Ports table:
Enabled Indicates whether the port is enabled.
Interface Indicates the port number.
Priority Indicates the port priority.
Current BER Indicates the current BER level.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 122 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

10.8

User Guide

Configuring STM-1/OC-3 Interfaces

Note:

This section is not relevant for the IP-10E.

Above the MDR69 connector is an add-on slot which can contain a fieldupgradable T-Card with either 16 additional E1/DS1 ports, an STM-1/OC-3
port, or 16 E1/DS1 pseudowire processing. The T-Cards are field-upgradable.
The STM-1/OC-3 T-Card provides an interface for up to 63 E1s inside a
standard channelized STM-1 signal, or 84 DS1s for OC-3 channels.
Each E1/DS1 is transported by a VC-12 container (or DS1 in VC-11), which
behaves like a regular line interface. TDM trails can be configured ending in
VC-11/12 in the same manner as they are configured for E1/DS1 interfaces.
The STM-1/OC-3 T-Card includes a LED that indicates the status of the
interface:
Critical or major severity alarm raised: RED

Minor or warning severity alarm raised: YELLOW

No SFP detected or STM-1/OC-3 interface disabled: OFF
Otherwise the LED is GREEN

To configure the STM-1/OC-3 T-Card interface:

1 For an STM-1 configuration, select Configuration > Interfaces > STM1
Ports. For an OC-3 configuration, select Configuration > Interfaces > OC3 Ports. The STM-1 Ports or OC-3 Ports page opens.

2 From the Port Admin field drop down list, select Enable or Disable to
enable or disable the port.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 123 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

3 From the Mute Tx drop down list, select Mute or Unmute to enable or
disable the mute Tx option on the interface. If muted, the radio will still
receive signals, but will not transmit any signals.
4 From the Outgoing signal clock source drop down list, specify the
outgoing signal clock source. Options are Internal clock, Loop, and STM-1
VC.
The clock source and the clock source status may be different when the
configuration does not match the current clock source in use, due to
the signal failures listed below.
If you choose Internal Clock (the default option), the quality will be
SMC/SEC (ITU-T G.813).
If you choose Loop (CDR mode), the signal clock source will be taken in
accordance with the following table:
# LOF from framer

LOS from optics

Mode of operation

Clock source

LOF

LOS

Free run/holdover

Local clock

LOF

NO LOS

Free run/holdover

Local clock

NO LOF

LOS

N/A

Local clock

NO LOF

NO LOS

Lock mode (loop timing) CDR

If you choose STM-1 VC, the signal will be synchronized to the signal
clock derived from a TDM trail. The clock will be taken from the first
VC-12 configured in the STM-1 port.
The VC source can be changed using the following CLI commands:
cd interfaces/sdh/stm1/get sync-vc (shows the VC that the
system will use as the clock and sync)
Set sync-vc XX

Note:

(XX = VC number)

The Clock source status field Indicates the current clock

source.

5 In the Synchronization VC field, specify the VC channel used to

synchronize the STM-1/OC-3 interface.
6 From the AIS VC Signaling Admin drop down list, select Enable or
Disable to enable or disable AIS VC signaling. When enabled, if a signal
failure at the trail outgoing from the STM-1/OC-3 interface occurs, the
system will signal AIS at the VC level (AIS-V) in the V5 byte of the
overhead.
7 From the Line Tx protection mode drop down list, select Normal or
Uni-direction MSP to configure the behavior of the transmitting line in a
1+1 HSB configuration:
In Normal mode the standby signal is silenced. The redundant
STM-1/OC-3 will not transmit signals unless the primary IDU performs
a switch due to a failure.
Choose Uni-direction MSP when the system is configured for 1+1 with
STM-1/OC-3 cards. Both cards will transmit, and the decision as to
which one will actually function will be made by other equipment
connected to it.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 124 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

8 Optionally, you can configure STM-1/OC--3 trace identifiers in the Trace

Identifiers section of the STP-1/OC-3 Ports page:

In the Transmitted field, specify the string used as the transmitted

STM-1/OC-3 signal J0 trace identifier. This is used to verify ongoing
connection to the receiver.
ii In the Expected field, configure the J0 trace identifier signal that is
expected to be received on the STM-1/OC-3 interface. This is used to
verify an ongoing connection to the remote side of the link.
iii From the String Length drop down list, select a string length for the
STM-1/OC-3 signal J0 trace identifier.
Note:

The Received field indicates the J0 trace identifier signal

that was received on the on the STM-1/OC-3 interface.

9 You can configure STM-1/OC--3 thresholds in the Thresholds section of

the STP-1/OC-3 Ports page:

From the Excessive BER drop down list, select the threshold value
above which an excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected over
the radio link. The value can be 1e-3, 1e-4, or 1e-5.
ii From the Signal degrade drop down list, select the threshold value
above which a Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected over
the link. The value can be 1e-6, 1e-7, 1e-8, or 1e-9.
10 Click Apply to save your configuration changes.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 125 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

10.9

User Guide

Configuring Pseudowire
This section includes:

Pseudowire Overview
Configuring an Ethernet Port for Pseudowire
Configuring the Pseudowire TDM Ports
Configuring TDM Trails for Pseudowire
Configuring Pseudowire Synchronization
Configuring the Pseudowire T-Card
Configuring Pseudowire Profiles
Configuring Pseudowire Encapsulation (Tunnels)
Configuring DS0 Bundles

Configuring Pseudowire Services

Note:

This section is not relevant for the IP-10E.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 126 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10.9.1 Pseudowire Overview

Above the MDR69 connector is an add-on slot which can contain a fieldupgradable T-Card with either 16 additional E1/DS1 ports, an STM-1/OC-3
port, or 16 E1/DS1 pseudowire processing.
IP-10Gs 16 E1/DS1 pseudowire (PW) processing T-Card processes E1 data,
sends the data through the system in Ethernet packet format that can be
processed by the IDUs Ethernet ports. The T-Card also re-converts data
received via pseudowire processing back to TDM format.
Note:

Release I6.9 only supports pseudowire for E1 lines.

IP-10G supports the following pseudowire protocols:

SAToP (Structure-Agnostic TDM-Over-Packet) E1 lines must be
transferred to pseudowire as full E1s. SAToP is agnostic with respect to
the data being sent, which can be either 1 TS or 30 with CAS, or even
unframed.
CESoP (Circuit Emulation Services-Over-Packet) E1 lines can be divided
into individual bundles of DS0 channels.
Pseudowire operates by encapsulating E1 input and sending it via one of the
IP-10Gs Ethernet ports. Traffic sent via pseudowire is de-encapsulated at the
other end of the link. Traffic must be passed to the pseudowire card by means
of TDM trails from the E1 port to the pseudowire port. A cable must be
connected between the pseudowire card and an Ethernet port in the same IDU
as the PW T-Card.
Proper synchronization is vital to ensure that traffic being transported via
pseudowire is processed properly at the other end of the link. IP-10G offers
the following synchronization options for pseudowire:

Absolute (common) clock A timing source external to the PW T-Card,

such as a GPS, an E1 line from external equipment, or the IDUs reference
clock, is configured to provide synchronization on both sides of the link.
Adaptive Clock Recovery (ACR) Timing information is embedded in
the packets containing pseudowire traffic and used for synchronization at
the far end of the link.

Pseudowire encapsulation is defined by one or more pseudowire tunnels. IP10G pseudowire encapsulation can be performed using:
MEF-8 (Ethernet)

UDP/IP

You can configure up to 16 pseudowire services on the IP-10G. You can use a
mixture of MEF-8 and UDP/IP services. Before configuring pseudowire
services, you must configure one or more pseudowire profiles and tunnels. If
you are using CESoP, you must also configure one or more DS0 bundles.
Important Note: Once a profile, tunnel, or bundle has been assigned to a
service, you cannot modify that profile, tunnel, or bundle
until you first delete the service.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 127 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Pseudowire Configuration Flow

Ethernet Port
Configuration

TDM Port
Configuration

TDM Trail
Configuration

PW T-Card
Configuration

Pseudowire Profile
Configuration

Pseudowire
Tunnel
Configuration
(Encapsulation)

DS0 Bundle
Configuration

For CESoP
services only

For SAToP
services

Pseudowire
Service
Configuration

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 128 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10.9.2 Configuring an Ethernet Port for Pseudowire

2 Click + next to the port you want to configure to display the port
configuration settings.

3 From the Admin drop down list, select Enable.

Note:

The Line coding field is read only.

4 From the Line type drop down list:

For SAToP, select E1 unframed.
For CESoP, select from the following:
E1
E1 Double-Frame CRC
E1 Multi-Frame
E1 Multi-Frame CRC
5 From the Channelization drop down list:
For SAToP, select Disable.
For CESoP, select Enable:
6 From the Timing mode drop down list, select the synchronization mode
for the port. Options are:
Loop Transmits with the clock received from the TDM signal. Select
this option if an E1 line is connected directly to the PW T-Card.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 132 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Absolute Transmits with the clock selected in the Clock source

reference field. Select this option if the clock is received from the front
panel or from NativeSync.
Clock recovery Uses Adaptive Clock Recovery (ACR). If you select
this option, you must define the E1 port from which to receive the
clock in the Clock source ref port field.
7 From the Clock source reference drop down list, you must select from
the following clock source options if you selected Absolute in the Timing
mode field:
Sys ref clk Select this option if the clock is received from the
NativeSynch mechanism.
Front panel Select this option if clock is received from the front
panel.
8 If you selected Clock Recovery in the Timing mode field, enter the E1
port from which to receive the clock.
Note:

Several E1s can use the same PW as a clock reference.

9 Click Apply.
Note:

The idle code is transmitted when the time slot is not being
used.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 133 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10.9.4 Configuring TDM Trails for Pseudowire

In order to pass traffic between E1s and the PW T-Card, you must configure
one or more TDM trails with the pseudowire interface as their start point or
end point. If the pseudowire interface is not assigned to any TDM trail, a Loss
of Frame (LOF) alarm will occur.
For instructions, refer to Configuring TDM Trails on page 274.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 134 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10.9.5 Configuring Pseudowire Synchronization

The following synchronization modes are available to determine which clock
is used to generate the outdoing TDM signals at the other end of the link.
Smart TDM Pseudowire supports the following synchronization modes:
Absolute (Common) Clock The pseudowire mechanism takes the
timing from either an external clock reference connected to the PW T-Card
on the front panel or from IP-10Gs NativeSync mechanism.
Loop Timing The pseudowire TDM port recovers the timing from the
incoming E1.

Adaptive Clock Recovery (ACR) Clock information is added to the TDM

data stream at the point where the data is packetized. The clock
information is extracted at the point where the packets are received and
reconverted to TDM. The extracted clock information is used for the
reconversion to TDM. ACR can provide very accurate synchronization, but
requires low jitter.

To configure the PW T-Card:

1 Select Configuration > Pseudowire > Card Configuration. The Card
Configuration page opens.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 135 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

2 From the Front panel clock admin drop down list, select Enable if you
are using an external clock source such as a GPS or an E1 line from
external equipment. In this case, the external clock source must be
physically connected to the Sync interface on the PW T-Card.
3 From the Signal to system sync distribution reference drop down list,
select the clock source that will be transmitted towards the general IP-10G
synchronization mechanism. Options are:
None Select this if you do not want to transmit a clock source to the
general IP-10G synchronization mechanism (e.g., if you are using the
front panel for input only).
Front Panel Only available if Front panel clock admin is set to
Enable. Select this option to use the front panel as the timing source.
Clock Recovery System uses Adaptive Clock Recovery (ACR) for
synchronization.
4 From the Signal to front panel clock interface drop down list, select the
clock source the system transmits to the front panel. Options are:
None Select None if the timing is coming from the front panel.
Front Panel Select this option to use an external clock source.
Clock Recovery System uses Adaptive Clock Recovery (ACR) for
synchronization.
5 From the Front panel clock signal input drop down list, select the type of
signal to be input at the Sync port on the PW T-Card:
Sync A digital 2 MHz signal.
E1/DS1 A normal coded TDM signal.
6 From the Front panel clock signal output drop down list, select the type
of signal to be transmitted from the Sync port on the PW T-Card:
Sync A digital 2 MHz signal.
E1/DS1 - A normal coded TDM signal.
7 If Signal to front panel clock interface field is set to Clock Recovery,
then in the TDM port for front panel clock recovery reference field,
enter the TDM port that serves as the clock recovery reference.
8 If Signal to system sync distribution reference field is set to Clock
Recovery, then in the TDM port for system clock recovery reference
field, enter the TDM port that serves as the clock recovery reference.
9 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 136 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10.9.6 Configuring the Pseudowire T-Card

To configure the PW T-Card:
1 Select Configuration > Pseudowire > Card Configuration. The Card
Configuration page opens.

2 Configure the Synchronization parameters. Refer to Configuring

Pseudowire Synchronization on page 135.
3 In the IP Addresses section of the Card Configuration page, enter a unique
IP address and subnet mask for the PW T-Card.
Note:

The IP address and subnet mask are only necessary for

UDP/IP encapsulation. Therefore, if all pseudowire in the
system uses MEF-8 encapsulation, it is not necessary to
configure an IP address and subnet mask for the PW T-Card.

4 In the Ethernet Port Configuration section of the Card Configuration page,

configure the Ethernet port being used for pseudowire traffic:
i From the Admin drop down list, select Enable to enable the port.
ii From the Auto negotiation drop-down menu, select one of the
following options.
Note:

The Auto negotiation setting must be the same as the autonegotiation setting of the port connected to the IP-10G.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 137 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

On - The data flow between the IP-10G port and the external port is
negotiated between the two ports.
Off The duplex type and Ethernet rate are determined by user
configuration.

iii From the Ethernet rate drop down list, select the Ethernet rate for the
port.
iv From the Flow control drop down list, select On or Off to enable or
disable flow control for the port.
Note:

The remaining fields are read-only. The Mac address field

displays the T-Cards MAC address, which is unique to the
card and used for Ethernet encapsulation.

5 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 138 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10.9.7 Configuring Pseudowire Profiles

Each pseudowire service must include a pseudowire profile. The profile
determines the behavior of the pseudowire service, including the buffer, alarm
thresholds, payload suppression, and other parameters. A profile can be used
by multiple pseudowire services.
To configure pseudowire profiles:
1 Select Configuration > Pseudowire > PSN Profiles. The PSN Profiles
page opens.

2 In the Add New Entry section, select a profile ID from the New profile ID
drop down list, and do one of the following:
Click Create new; or
To create a new profile based on an existing profile select an existing
profile from the Copy from profile drop down list and click Copy
existing.
The new profile appears in the Profiles Table.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 139 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

3 Click + next to the new profile (or any profile you want to edit). The profile
is expanded.

4 In the Payload size field, enter the number of TDM frames per packet
(from 1 to 64). This number multiplied by the number of DS0 channels in a
specific bundle equals the size of the TDM payload, and does not include
the Ethernet header.
5 In the Jitter buffer depth field, enter the desired jitter buffer depth (from
1 to 32, in milliseconds). This is used to enable the network to
accommodate PSN-specific packet delay variation. The jitter buffer can be
increased if the network experiences a higher-than-normal level of jitter.
6 From the Use RTP header drop down list, select Yes if you want the
system to add RTP headers to Ethernet packets carrying pseudowire
traffic. The default value is No.
7 From the RTP timestamp mode drop down list, select from the following
RTP timestamp mode options:
Absolute
Differential
The default value is Absolute.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 140 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Note:

User Guide

This parameter is only relevant if you select Yes in the Use

RTP header drop down list.

8 In the RTP timestamp multiplication factor field, enter the number by

which the reference frequency is multiplied. This must be set to the same
value at both ends of the pseudowire service.
9 from the Payload suppression drop down list, select Enable or Disable
to enable or disable payload suppression. The default value is Disable.
10 In the Payload type field, enter a value between 96 and 127. This value is
used to distinguish between signaling and data types. The default value
is 96.
11 From the LOPS detection drop down list, select Enable or Disable to
enable or disable LOPS detection. The default value is Enable.
12 In the Consecutive Packets in Sync for LOP field, enter the number of
missing packets required in order for the system to indicate a loss of
packet state (1-10). The default value is 2.
13 In the Consecutive Missing Packets Out of Sync for LOP field, enter the
packets required in order for the system to go out of a loss of packet state
(1-10). The default value is 2.
14 In the Packet loss time window, field, enter the time (in milliseconds) the
system period (in seconds) the system uses to compute the average packet
loss rate in order to detect excessive packet loss (1-65535). The default
value is 3000.
15 In the Alarm threshold, field, enter the amount of time (in milliseconds)
the system waits after a fault condition exists before indicating an alarm
(1-65535). The default value is 2500.
16 In the Excessive packet loss threshold field enter the alarm threshold (in
percentage) for excessive packet loss (1-100). The default value is 5.
17 In the Clear alarm threshold field, enter the time (in milliseconds) the
system waits before clearing an alarm once the alarm condition has ended
(1-65535). The default value is 10000.
18 In the Missing packets for SES threshold field, enter the percentage of
missing packets detected within a one second window that will cause SES
to be counted.
19 In the CAS alarm pattern field, enter the CAS alarm pattern transmitted
on the E1 interface when packets overflow or underflow the jitter buffer.
20 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 141 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10.9.8 Configuring Pseudowire Encapsulation (Tunnels)

Each pseudowire service must include an encapsulation tunnel to determine
how traffic over the service passes through the network. Encapsulation can
use one of the following protocols:
MEF-8

UDP/IP

To configure a tunnel:
1 Select Configuration > Pseudowire > PSN Tunnels. The PSN Tunnels
page opens.

2 Click Add Entry to add a tunnel. The Add Entry window opens.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 142 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

3 From the Tunnel ID drop down list, select a unique Tunnel ID from 1 to
512.
4 From the PSN type drop down list, select the encapsulation protocol for
the tunnel:
UDP/IP The tunnel uses UDP/IP encapsulation.
Ethernet The tunnel uses MEF-8 encapsulation.
5 From the VLAN type drop down list, select the VLAN type used by the
tunnel. Options are:
None
C type
S type
6 In the VLAN ID field, enter a VLAN ID for the tunnel.
7 In the VLAN p-bits field, enter a p-bit value. This value will be assigned to
frames transversing the tunnel.
8 For MEF-8 tunnels, enter the MAC address of the card at the other site of
the link in the Remote MAC address field.
Note:

If the card at the other side of the link is replaced, you will
have to re-configure the tunnel.

9 For UDP/IP tunnels, enter a destination IP address in the Destination IP

address field.
10 For UDP/IP tunnels, if the destination is on a different segment of the
network, enter a next hop IP address in the Next hop IP address field.
11 For UDP/IP tunnels, enter a ToS/DSCP value in the ToS-DSCP field.
12 Click Apply to add the entry.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 143 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

10.9.9 Configuring DS0 Bundles

For CESoP-based services, you must allocate DS0 channels, splitting one E1
port into several DS0 bundles. To configure DS0 bundles:
1 Select Configuration > Pseudowire > DS0 Bundles. The DS0 Bundles
page opens.

2 Click Add Bundle. The Add New Bundle window opens.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 144 of 577

User Guide

Configuring Auxiliary Channels

This chapter includes:

Configuring the Wayside Channel

Configuring the User Channel
Viewing the EOW Channel Status

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 148 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

11.1

User Guide

Configuring the Wayside Channel

This feature cannot be used with:

PTP Optimized Transport mode

Wayside channel and PTP optimized transport mode are mutually exclusive
features. You should verify that PTP optimized transport mode is not enabled
before enabling the Wayside channel. Refer to Enabling PTP Optimized
Transport on page 206.
To configure the wayside channel:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Wayside Channel. The Wayside
Channel page opens.
2 Click Refresh. The current settings for the wayside channel are displayed.

3 From the Wayside admin drop-down menu, select Enable.

4 From the Capacity drop-down menu, select Narrow or Wide for the
wayside channel capacity.
5 From the Auto negotiation drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:

On - The system controls the data flow between the wayside channel
and the other active ports.

Off - The data flow between the wayside channel and the other ports is
not controlled by the system.

6 From the Duplex drop-down menu, select Full or Half duplex.

7 From the Rate drop-down menu, select the data rate for the port.
8 Click Apply. The settings for the Wayside Channel are configured.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 149 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

11.2

User Guide

Configuring the User Channel

Note:

This section is not relevant for the IP-10E.

To configure the user channel:

1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > User Channel. The User Channel
page opens.

2 In the Admin field, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable the user
channel.
3 In the Type field, specify the channel type:
Asynchronous RS-232
Asynchronous V.11/X.21
4 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 150 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

11.3

User Guide

Viewing the EOW Channel Status

Note:

This section is not relevant for the IP-10E.

The EOW page displays the EOW (Engineering Order Wire) channel status. To
display the EOW channel status, select Configuration > Interfaces > EOW.
The EOW page opens.

The status of the EOW channel (Enable or Disable) opens in the Admin field.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 151 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

12.

User Guide

Configuring the Radio Parameters

This chapter includes:

Enabling and Disabling the Radio

Configuring the Radio Frequencies
Specifying the Radio Link ID
Configuring the Remote Radio IP Address
Configuring the Radio Thresholds
Enabling RSL Degradation Alarms
Selecting a Radio Script and Configuring ACM
Configuring Compression

Configuring Radio Traffic Priorities

Configuring the Power Options and Green Mode

Related topics:

Configuring QoS and Enhanced QoS

Configuring Diversity
Configuring XPIC

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 152 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

12.1

User Guide

Enabling and Disabling the Radio

To enable or disable the radio:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Parameters. The Radio
Parameters page opens.
2 In the Configuration parameters section, select Enable or Disable from
the Radio IF interface drop down list to enable or disable the radio.

Note:

The Radio IF operational status field indicates the current

radio status.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 153 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

12.2

User Guide

Configuring the Radio Frequencies

You can configure both the local and the remote radio frequencies.
To configure the Tx and Rx frequencies of the local radio:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Parameters. The Radio
Parameters page opens.
2 In the Frequency Control section:

i In the Tx frequency field, enter the transmission radio frequency.

ii In the Rx frequency field, enter the received radio frequency.
iii Optionally, select Set also remote unit to apply these frequency
settings to the remote unit.
3 In the Configuration Parameters section:
i

In the Mute Tx field, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable Tx

muting.
ii In the Max Tx level field, enter a number between 2-20 as the
maximum transmission frequency.
To configure remote radio frequency settings:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Remote Radio. The Remote Radio
window opens.

2 In the Remote force max Tx level field, enter a number between 2-20 as
the maximum transmit level for the remote radio.
3 In the Remote ATPC reference Rx Level field, enter a number
between -70-30 as the ATPC receive level.
4 Click Apply.
To unmute the remote unit transmitter output:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Remote Radio. The Remote Radio
window opens.
2 Click Force Unmute.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 154 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

12.3

User Guide

Specifying the Radio Link ID

To specify the radio link ID:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Parameters. The Radio Parameters
page opens.
2 In the Configuration parameters section, enter the identification number of
the link in the Link ID field.

Note:

When working with an IDU that has the Link ID feature on

one end and an IDU that does not have this feature on the
other end, set the Link ID to 1.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 155 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

12.4

User Guide

Configuring the Remote Radio IP Address

To set the remote radio IP address:
1 Select Radio > Remote Radio. The Remote Radio page opens.
2 In the Remote Radio Parameters section:

In the Remote IP address field, enter the IP address of the remote unit.
In the Remote floating IP address field, enter the remote floating IP
address.

3 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 156 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

12.5

User Guide

Configuring the Radio Thresholds

This section includes:

Radio Threshold Levels

RSL and TSL Thresholds
MSE Threshold
XPI Threshold
Ethernet Throughput Threshold
Ethernet Capacity Threshold
Ethernet Utilization Threshold

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 157 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

12.5.1 Radio Threshold Levels

To configure the radio threshold levels:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Thresholds. The Radio Thresholds
page opens.
2 Click Refresh. The current remote radio unit settings are displayed.

3 From the Radio excessive BER threshold drop-down list, select the level
above which an excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the
radio link.
4 From the Radio signal degrade threshold drop-down list, select the level
above which a Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected over the
radio link.
5 The Radio BER field displays the value above which a BER alarm is issued
for errors detected over the radio link.
6 Click Apply. The radio threshold levels are configured.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 158 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

12.5.2 RSL and TSL Thresholds

To configure signal level thresholds:
1 Select PM & counters > Radio> Signal Level. The Signal Level page
opens.
2 Go to the Thresholds Configuration section.

3 In the RSL Threshold #1 field, specify the number of seconds below which
RSL 1 exceeded seconds will be counted.
4 In the RSL Threshold #2 field, specify the number of seconds below which
RSL 2 exceeded seconds will be counted.
5 In the TSL Threshold field, specify the number of seconds below which
TSL exceeded seconds will be counted.
6 Click Apply to save your changes.
7 Click Refresh to update the threshold values.

12.5.3 MSE Threshold

To configure the MSE threshold:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio> MSE. The MSE page opens.
2 Go to the Thresholds Configuration section.

3 In the MSE Threshold field, specify the number of seconds below which
MSE exceeded seconds will be counted.
4 Click Apply to save your changes.
5 Click Refresh to update the threshold value.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 159 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

12.5.4 XPI Threshold

To configure the XPI threshold:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio> XPI. The XPI page opens.
2 Go to the Threshold Configuration section.

3 In the XPI Threshold field, specify the number of seconds below which
XPI exceeded seconds will be counted.
4 Click Apply to save your changes.

12.5.5 Ethernet Throughput Threshold

To configure the throughput threshold:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio> Ethernet > Throughput. The
Throughput page opens.
2 Go to the Thresholds configuration section.

3 In the Throughput Threshold field, specify the throughput threshold (in

Mbps), above which will be counted as Throughput Exceeds seconds.
4 Click Apply to save your changes.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 160 of 577

To apply a radio script:

1 Select Configuration > Radio > MRMC. The MRMC Table opens.

2 Specify which types of scripts to display.

Select FCC to display only FCC compatible scripts.
Select ETSI to display only ETSI compatible scripts.
Select Both to display both FCC and ETSI scripts.
3 Click the + icon for a regular script (without the ACM prefix) to open the
script configuration options.
4 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 163 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

12.7.1 ACM Radio Scripts

Related topics:

Configuring Radio Traffic Priorities

In ACM mode, a range of profiles determines Tx and Rx rates.

This allows the radio to modify its transmit and receive levels in response to
environmental conditions.
The ACM TX profile is determined by the remote RX MSE performance.

The RX end is the one that initiates an ACM profile upgrade or downgrade.

To apply an ACM script:

1 Select Configuration > Radio > MRMC. The MRMC page opens.
2 Go to the MRMC Table, near the bottom of the page.

3 Click the + icon of an ACM script (scripts with an ACM prefix) to open the
script configuration options.
4 Select the ACM mode: Fixed or Adaptive.
Fixed ACM mode applies constant Tx and Rx rates. However, unlike
regular scripts, with a Fixed ACM script you can specify a maximum
profile to inhibit inefficient transmission levels.
In Adaptive ACM mode, Tx and Rx rates are dynamic. An ACM-enabled
radio system automatically chooses which profile to use according to
the channel fading conditions.
For ACM Fixed Mode scripts:
1 Select the MRMC profile.
2 Click Apply.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 164 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

For ACM Adaptive Mode scripts:

1 Specify the radios maximum allowed transmission frequency.
In the Select Maximum ACM Profile section, select the maximum ACM
profile.
2 Specify the radios minimum allowed transmission frequency.
In the ACM Minimum Profile field, select the minimum ACM profile.
3 Specify whether the system should automatically align power usage to the
current bandwidth utilization.
Select Enable or Disable from the Adaptive Power field drop down
list.
In the Reference Class field, specify class-2/4/5B/6A for ETSI, or FCC
for FCC.
4 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 165 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

12.7.2 ACM with 1+1 HSB Protection

When activating an ACM script together with 1+1 HSB protection, if an LOF
alarm is raised, both the active and the standby receivers degrade to the
lowest available profile (highest RX sensitivity). Because RX sensitivity is very
high, the receivers may have false lock, which will result in a switchover. If
the LOF alarm remains, protection switchovers may appear alternately every
1 sec. This may cause management instability and may even prevent
management access to the units completely.
In order to avoid this scenario, it is important to follow the instructions for
setting up 1+1 HSB protection. In particular, make sure that the link is
established with lockout configuration in order to avoid alternate
switchovers. Once the link is up and running, lockout can be disabled.
The following ACM behavior should be expected in a 1+1 configuration:
In the TX direction, the Active TX will follow the remote Active RX ACM
requests (according to the remote Active Rx MSE performance).
The Standby TX might have the same profile as the Active TX, or might stay
at the lowest profile (profile-0). That depends on whether the Standby TX
was able to follow the remote RX Active units ACM requests (only the
active remote RX sends ACM request messages).
In the RX direction, both the active and the standby units follow the
remote Active TX profile (which is the only active transmitter).

For additional information:

Configuring 1+1 HSB

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 166 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

12.7.3 ACM Adaptive Power

This feature requires:

RFU-C, running software version 2.01 or above

When configuring an ACM script with Adaptive Mode, you can determine
whether or not the RFU power will be adaptive as well.
During fade conditions requiring a modulation drop, a constant power scheme
cannot increase transmit power to compensate for the signal degradation,
further reducing capacity.
Adaptive power dynamically adjusts the power to the lowest transmit level for
the current modulation.
When disabled, the maximum Tx power in lower constellations is
limited by the highest modulation.
When enabled, the maximum Tx power in lower constellations is
limited by the reference class.
To enable adaptive power:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > MRMC. The MRMC Table opens.

2 Select an ACM script.

3 Expand an ACM script to configure its options.
Note:

ACM scripts are indicated by the ACM prefix.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 167 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

4 Enable or disable adaptive power.

Select Enable or Disable from the Adaptive Power field drop down
list.
5 Specify the adaptive power reference class.
In the Reference Class field, select class-2/4/5B/6A for ETSI, or FCC
for FCC.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 168 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

12.7.4 Enabling Alarms on MRMC Profile Degradation

If the current radio script supports Adaptive Code Modulation (ACM), when
enabled, traps can be generated upon Tx ACM profile degradation below the
user-defined threshold.
To enable alarms on MRMC profile degrade:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > MRMC. The MRMC Table opens.
2 Go to the MRMC Configuration section.

3 From the Alarm generation on MRMC profile degrade drop down list,
select Enable to enable the MRMC profile degrade alarm.
4 In the Threshold for MRMC profile degrade alarm field, specify the
profile above which will generate the profile degrade alarm.
5 In the Alarm generation for MRMC profile degrade field, select Enable
or Disable to enable or disable event and trap generation on ACM profile
degrade.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 169 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

12.7.5 Activating an Asymmetrical Script

This feature requires:

Asymmetrical Scripts license

Note:

When using an asymmetrical script, the capacity license

relates to the TX side of each link.

To activate an asymmetrical script, you must upgrade the uplink script

(narrow TX, wide RX) at one end of the link, and upgrade the downlink script
(wide TX, narrow RX) at the other end of the link. This operation requires
reset.
The number of TDM trails is determined by the capacity of the uplink (narrow
script).
To avoid loss of management while upgrading the scripts, it is recommended
to upgrade the remote side first.
Asymmetrical scripts are supported in both R2 and R3 hardware.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 170 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

12.8

User Guide

Configuring Compression
IP-10G/E offers several Ethernet header compression methods, which enable
operators to significantly improve Ethernet throughout over the radio link
without affecting user traffic:
No Header Compression (Layer 1 Header Suppression) Removes the
IFG and Preamble fields. This mechanism operates automatically even if no
header compression is selected by the user.
MAC Header Compression (Legacy Mode) Operates at Layer 2,
compressing the MAC SA and the MAC DA. The user can enable or disable
MAC header compression.
Multi-Layer Header Compression (Enhanced Compression) Users
can configure the depth of Enhanced Compression, up to Layer 4. You must
balance the depth of compression against the number of flows in order to
ensure maximum efficiency. Up to 256 concurrent flows are supported.
To configure header compression:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Compression. The Compression page
opens.

2 In the Compression mode field, select Legacy or Enhanced.

Select Legacy if you want to use MAC header compression or no
compression. Then, select Enable or Disable in the MAC header
compression field to enable or disable MAC header compression, and
click Apply.
Select Enhanced if you want enhanced (multi-layer) header
compression. Then, perform the steps in the next section.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 171 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

12.8.1 Configuring Enhanced Header Compression

This feature requires:

Enhanced Compression License

Hardware version R3
Software version I6.9 or higher

Enhanced (multi-layer) header compression identifies traffic flows and

replaces header fields with a flow ID. The Enhanced Compression module
includes an algorithm for learning each new flow, and implements
compression on the flow type starting with the next frame of that flow type.
In Enhanced Compression mode, you can determine the depth to which the
compression mechanism operates, from Layer 2 to Layer 4. You must balance
the depth of compression against the number of flows in order to ensure
maximum efficiency. Multi-Layer (Enhanced) compression supports up to 256
flow types.
To configure enhanced (multi-layer) header compression:
1 In the Compression mode field of the Compression page, select Enhanced.
2 Click Apply. The fields in the Compression Configuration section of the
Compression page change as shown in the following figure.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 172 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

In the Enhanced Header Compression Mode field, select the layer depth
to which compression will operate. Options are:
L2 Ethernet and MPLS
L3 Ethernet and IP
L4 All supported layers up to L4

4 Optionally, you can configure excluding rules to restrict the number of

compressed flow. To add an excluding rule:
i In the Rule Name field, enter a name for the rule.
ii In the Rule Type field, select from the following options:
Flow Type
VLAN
MAC DA
MAC SA
Ethertype
iii In the Rule Value field, enter the value that you want to exclude,
according to the following table:
Rule Type
Rule Value
Flow Type

1 byte hexadecimal identifier of the protocol stack. For details, refer to Enhanced
Header Compression Flow Type Bitmask and Supported Configurations on
page 173.

VLAN

4 bytes, including VLAN Ethertype to distinguish S-VLAN from C-VLAN, VLAN ID,
and VLAN P-Bit.

MAC DA

6 bytes in hexadecimal format.

MAC SA

6 bytes in hexadecimal format.

Ethertype

2 bytes in hexadecimal format.

5 Click Apply.
12.8.1.1 Enhanced Header Compression Flow Type Bitmask and Supported
Configurations
The following table shows the flow type bitmask.
Bit 6-7 (MSB)

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 0-1 (LSB)

PBB-TE

MPLS

L3 - IPv4

L3 - IPv6

00 untag

0 no

00 no

10 reserved

1 - yes

1 yes

01 UDP

01 single tag

10 TCP

11 double tag

11 - GRE

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 173 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

The following lookup table shows all supported flow type configurations:
Flow Attributes

Flow-type

untag-no L4

0x00

untag-IPV6-no L4

0x04

untag-IPV6-UDP

0x05

untag-IPV6-TCP

0x06

untag-IPV4-no L4

0x08

untag-IPV4-UDP

0x09

untag-IPV4-TCP

0x0A

untag-MPLS-no L4

0x10

untag-PBB-no L4

0x20

S-tag-no L4

0x40

S-tag-IPV6-no L4

0x44

S-tag-IPV6-UDP

0x45

S-tag-IPV6-TCP

0x46

S-tag-IPV4-no L4

0x48

S-tag-IPV4-UDP

0x49

S-tag-IPV4-TCP

0x4A

S-tag-MPLS-no L4

0x50

C-tag-no L4

0x80

C-tag-IPV6-no L4

0x84

C-tag-IPV6-UDP

0x85

C-tag-IPV6-TCP

0x86

C-tag-IPV4-no L4

0x88

C-tag-IPV4-UDP

0x89

C-tag-IPV4-TCP

0x8A

C-tag-MPLS-no L4

0x90

SC-tag-no L4

0xC0

SC-tag-IPV6-no L4

0xC4

SC-tag-IPV6-UDP

0xC5

SC-tag-IPV6-TCP

0xC6

SC-tag-IPV4-no L4

0xC8

SC-tag-IPV4-UDP

0xC9

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 174 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Flow Attributes

Flow-type

SC-tag-IPV4-TCP

0xCA

SC-tag-MPLS-no L4

0xD0

12.8.1.2 Enhanced Header Compression Compatibility

The IP-10G/Es configuration monitoring mechanism is used to provide
backwards compatibility with legacy hardware and software versions that do
not support Multi-Layer (enhanced) header compression.
A configuration mismatch may occur in the following scenarios:

The remote IDU is using a pre-I6.9 software release.

The remote IDU is using a pre-R3 hardware release.
The remote IDU is configured to Legacy compression mode.

In each of these scenarios, both sides of the link will use Legacy compression
mode and an alarm will be raised to indicate that there is a configuration
mismatch.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 175 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

12.9

User Guide

Configuring Radio Traffic Priorities

Related topics:

ACM Radio Scripts

Configuring QoS and Enhanced QoS

Since radio bandwidth may vary in ACM, situations may arise in which it is
necessary to drop some of the outgoing traffic. The system dynamically
allocates bandwidth to traffic according to user-defined priorities.
At the radio level, the system can discern between the following types of
traffic:
High-priority Ethernet traffic
Low-priority Ethernet traffic
High-priority TDM trails

Low-priority TDM trails

Users can configure the following parameters:

The amount (in Mbps) of high priority Ethernet Bandwidth
For each TDM trail, whether it is high or low priority
The priority order between the different types of traffic. the following
schemes are available (from high to low priority):
High-TDM-over-high-Ethernet, meaning:
1. TDM high priority
2. Ethernet high priority
3. TDM low priority
4. Ethernet low priority
High-Ethernet-over-TDM, meaning:
1. Ethernet high priority
2. TDM high priority
3. TDM low priority
4. Ethernet low priority
TDM-over-Ethernet (default), meaning:
1. TDM high priority
2. TDM low priority
3. Ethernet
For this mechanism to work properly, both sides of the link should be
identically configured:

Each TDM trail on both sides of a link should be assigned the same
priority.

Both sides of the link should have the same amount of high priority
Ethernet bandwidth.
Both sides of the link should use the same priority scheme.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 176 of 577

Green Mode

ATPC is a closed-loop mechanism by which each RFU changes the transmitted

signal power according to the indication received across the link, in order to
achieve a desired RSL on the other side of the link.
Without ATPC, if loss of frame occurs the system automatically increases its
transmit power to the configured maximum. This may cause a higher level of
interference with other systems until the failure is corrected.
In order to minimize this interference, some regulators require a timer
mechanism which will be manually overridden when the failure is fixed. The
underlying principle is that the system should start a timer from the moment
maximum power has been reached. If the timer expires, ATPC is overridden
and the system transmits at a pre-determined power level until the user
manually re-establishes ATPC and the system works normally again.
The user can configure the following parameters:
Override timeout (0 to disable the feature): The amount of time the timer
counts from the moment the system transmits at the maximum configured
power.
Override transmission power: The power that will be transmitted if
ATPC is overridden because of timeout.
The user can also display the current countdown value.
When the system enters into the override state, ATPC is automatically
disabled and the system transmits at the pre-determined override power. An
alarm is raised in this situation.
The only way to go back to normal operation is to manually cancel the
override. When doing so, users should be sure that the problem has been
corrected; otherwise, ATPC may be overridden again.
To configure ATPC override:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > ATPC. The ATPC page opens.
2 Go to the ATPC Configuration section.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 179 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

3 In the ATPC admin field, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable

ATPC.
4 In the ATPC override Tx level field, enter a number between -50 and 34
as the ATPC override transmit level.
5 In the ATPC reference RSL field, enter a number between -70 and 30 as
the reference value for the ATPC mechanism.
6 In the ATPC timeout field, specify the number of seconds before
overriding the current Tx level with the ATPC override Tx level.
Note:

The ATPC timer counter field displays the number of

seconds remaining until ATPC timeout.

7 Click Apply.
To cancel ATPC override:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > ATPC. The ATPC page opens.
2 Go to the ATPC Configuration section.

3 Click ATPC Override Cancel. The cancel option aborts the current ATPC
override for a radio that is transmitting at the ATPC override Tx level.
Following execution, the system goes back to normal ATPC operating
mode.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 180 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

12.10.2 Configuring Green Mode

This feature requires:

RFU-HP or RFU-A

This feature cannot be used with the following:

ATPC

FibeAir IP-10G/E offers an optional ultra-high power radio solution that

transmits the highest power in the industry, while employing an innovative
Power Saving Mode that saves up to 30% power consumption. Power Saving
Mode enables the deployment of smaller antennas, and reduces the need for
repeater stations. Moreover, installation labor cost and electricity
consumption are reduced, achieving an overall diminished carbon footprint.
To configure radio Green mode:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Parameters. The Radio
Parameters page opens.
2 Go to the Green Mode section.

3 In the Green mode admin field, select Enable or Disable to enable or

disable Green Mode.
4 In the Green mode reference RX level field, enter a number between -70
-30 as the Green Mode reference level.
5 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 181 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

13.

User Guide

Configuring QoS and Enhanced QoS

This section includes:

QoS Overview
Configuring Standard QoS
Configuring Enhanced QoS

Related topics:

Configuring Radio Traffic Priorities

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 182 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

13.1

User Guide

QoS Overview
IP-10G/E offers integrated QoS functionality in all switching modes. In
addition to its standard QoS functionality, IP-10G/E offers an enhanced QoS
feature. Enhanced QoS is license-activated.
IP-10G/Es standard QoS provides for four queues and six classification
criteria. Ingress traffic is limited per port, Class of Service (CoS), and traffic
type. Scheduling is performed according to Strict Priority (SP), Weighted
Round Robin (WRR), or Hybrid WRR/SP scheduling.
IP-10G/Es enhanced QoS provides eight classification criteria instead of six,
color-awareness, increased frame buffer memory, eight priority queues with
configurable buffer length, improved congestion management using WRED
protocols, enhanced counters, and other enhanced functionality.

13.1.1 Standard QoS Overview

QoS enables users to configure classification and scheduling to ensure that
packets are forwarded and discarded according to their priority. QoS
configurations are available in all switch applications (Smart Pipe, Managed
Switch, and Metro Switch).
Since it is common to set QoS and rate limiting settings identically in several
ports, the QoS configuration can be copied from one port to another. This
saves considerable time and prevents configuration mistakes.
The following diagram illustrates the QoS flow:
Ingress Port #x

Classifier
(4 Queues)

Egress Port #y
5 Policers
(Ingress
Rate
Limiting)

Marker

Queue
Controller

Scheduler

Shaper
(Egress rate
limiting)

13.1.1.1 Standard QoS Classifier

Using IP-10G/Es standard QoS functionality, the system examines the
incoming traffic and assigns the desired priority according to the marking of
the packets (based on the user port/L2/L3 marking in the packet). In case of
congestion in the ingress port, low priority packets are discarded first.
The standard QoS classifier is made up of four classification criteria
hierarchies:
MAC DA (Destination Address) Overwrite Classification and marking
is performed for incoming frames carrying a MAC DA that appears in the
Static MAC table, according to the following options:
Disable No MAC DA classification or VLAN P-Bit overwrite
(marking).
Queue Decision Only classification to queue. No marking.
VLAN P-Bit Overwrite Only VLAN P-Bits overwrite (marking).
Classification according to a lower criterion.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 183 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Queue Decision and VLAN P-Bit Overwrite Both classification and

VLAN P-Bits overwrite.
VLAN ID Overwrite If the first criteria is not fulfilled (either because it is
disabled, or because the ingress frame does not carry any MAC DA that
appears in the S MAC table), classification and/or marking (VLAN P-Bit
overwrite, assuming the frame egress is tagged) is decided according to
the VLAN ID to Queue table according to the following options:
Disable No VLAN ID classification or VLAN P-Bit overwrite
(marking).
Queue Decision Only classification to queue. No marking.
VLAN P-Bit Overwrite Only VLAN P-Bit overwrite (marking).
Classification is according to the lower criteria (P-Bits or port priority). In
this case, P-Bits are assigned as follows (if egress frame is tagged):
Frames classified to 1st queue are given p-bits=0
Frames classified to 2nd queue are given p-bits=2
Frames classified to 3rd queue are given p-bits=4
Frames classified to 4th queue are given p-bits=6
Queue Decision and VLAN P-Bit Overwrite Both classification and
VLAN P-Bit overwrite. Initial Classification is according to the following
configuration:
VLAN P-Bit Classification is according to VLAN P-Bit. And the queue
is assigned according to the VLAN P-Bit to Queue table.
IP TOS Classification is according to IP TOS (IP precedence, or IP
diffserv). The queue is assigned according to the IP P-Bit to Queue
table.
VLAN P-Bit over IP TOS Classification according to VLAN P-Bit, if the
ingress frame carries a VLAN. For untagged packets with an IP header,
classification is according to IP TOS.
IP TOS over VLAN P-Bit Classification is according to IP TOS, if the
ingress frame has an IP header. If the ingress frame without an IP
header carries a VLAN, classification is according to VLAN P-Bit.
Port (Default) If any of the above criteria are not fulfilled, the default
classification is assigned to the ingress frame according to the port
priority.
Default Classification. Default priority for frames incoming at the
port.

13.1.1.2 Standard QoS Policers

IP-10G/Es standard QoS provides up to five policers to perform ingress rate
limiting. The policers are based on a color blind leaky bucket scheme, and can
be applied per port or CoS.
For each policer, users can define up to five class maps. Each class map
includes the following parameters:

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 184 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Committed Information Rate (CIR) IP-10G/E supports CIR granularity

of 64kbps up to 1 Mbps of CIR, 1 Mbps from 1 Mbps to 1 Gbps of CIR.
Packets within the CIR defined for the service are marked green and
passed through the QoS module.

Committed Burst Size (CBS) IP-10G/E supports CBS up to a maximum

of 128 kbytes. The default value is 12 kbytes. Packets within the CBS
defined for the service are marked green and passed through the QoS
module.
Committed Information Rate (CIR) IP-10G/E supports the following
granularity for CIR:
64Kbps <= CIR <= 960Kbps, in steps of 64Kbps.
1000Kbps <= CIR <= 100,000Kbps in steps of 1000Kbps.
100,000Kbps < CIR <= 1,000,000Kbps in steps of 10,000Kbps.
Committed Burst Size (CBS) IP-10G/E supports the following
granularity for CBS:
For 64Kbps <= CIR <= 960Kbps, 0 < CBS <= 273,404 Bytes.
For 1000Kbps <= CIR <= 100,000Kbps, 0 < CBS <= 132,585 Bytes.
For 100,000Kbps < CIR <= 1,000,000Kbps, 0 < CBS <= 4,192,668 Bytes.
Data type The rate can be limited based on the following data types:
None (no limiting), Unknown unicast, Unknown multicast, Broadcast,
Multicast, Unicast, Management, ARP, TCP-Data, TCP-Control, UDP,
Non- UDP, Non-TCP-UDP, Queue1, Queue2, Queue3, Queue4.

Note:

Management frames are BPDUs processed by the systems

IDC, when processing L2 protocols (e.g., xSTP).
Limit Exceed Action
Discard Frame.
The rate for rate limiting is measured for all Layer 1 bytes,
meaning: Preamble (8bytes) + Frame's DA to CRC + IFG (12
Bytes)

13.1.1.3 Queue Management, Scheduling, and Shaping

IP-10G/Es standard QoS has four priority queues. The queue controller
distributes frames to the queues according to the classifier. The fourth queue
is the highest priority queue, and the first queue is the lowest priority queue.
The scheduler determines how frames are output from the queues. IP-10G/Es
standard QoS supports the following scheduling schemes:
Strict Priority for all queues.

Strict Priority for the fourth queue, and Weighted Round Robin (WRR) for
the remaining queues.
Strict Priority for the fourth and third queues, and WRR for second and
first queues.
WRR for all queues.

In a WRR scheduling scheme, a weight is assigned to each queue, so that

frames egress from the queues according to their assigned weight, in order to
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 185 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

avoid starvation of lower priority queues. In addition, frames egress in a

mixed manner, in order to avoid bursts of frames from the same queue.
Each queues weight can be configured. A queue's weight is used by the
scheduler when the specific queue is part of a WRR scheduling scheme.
Queue-Weight can be configured in the range of 1-32. The default queue
weights are 8,4,2,1.
The shaper determines the scheduler rate (egress rate limit). The shaper can
be enabled and disabled by the user. By default, the shaper is disabled.
The shaper rate is set with the following granularity:
For 64Kbps <= Rate <= 960Kbps, in steps of 64Kbps.
For 1000Kbps <= Rate <= 100,000Kbps in steps of 1000Kbps.
For 100,000Kbps < Rate <= 1,000,000Kbps in steps of 10,000Kbps.

13.1.2 Enhanced QoS Overview

Enhanced QoS provides an enhanced and expanded feature set. The tools
provided by enhanced QoS apply to egress traffic on the radio port, which is
where bottlenecks generally occur.
Enhanced QoS capabilities include:
Enhanced classification criteria

CIR/CBS and EIR/EBS support

255 MEF-compliant policers with trTCM support.

Policers per port, service (VLAN+CoS), and CoS

Eight priority queues with configurable buffer length

An enhanced scheduler based on Strict Priority, Weighted Fair Queue

(WFQ), or a hybrid approach that combines Strict Priority and WFQ
Shaper per priority queue
WRED support, along with Tail-Drop, for congestion management

A PTP Optimized Transport dedicated channel for time synchronization

protocols
Enhanced PM and statistics

These and other IP-10G/E enhanced QoS features enable operators to provide
differentiated services with strict SLA while maximizing network resource
utilization. Enhanced QoS requires a license, and can be enabled and disabled
by the user.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 186 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

The following figure illustrates the basic building blocks and traffic flow of
enhanced QoS.

The initial step in the enhanced QoS traffic flow is the classifier, which
provides granular service classification based on a number of user-defined
criteria.
The classifier marks the Service ID, CoS, and color of the frames. If a frames
VLAN ID matches a Service ID that is mapped to a policer, the frame is sent to
the policer. Untagged frames or frames whose VLAN ID does not match a
defined Service ID are sent directly to a queue, based on the frames CoS and
color.
Enhanced QoS provides up to 255 user-defined TrTCM policers. The policers
implement a bandwidth profile, based on CIR/EIR, CBS/EBS, and several other
criteria.
The next step after the TrTCM policers is queue management. Queue
management determines which packets enter which of the eight available
queues. Queue management also includes congestion management, which can
be implemented by Tail-Drop or WRED.
Frames are sent out of the queues according to scheduling and shaping, IP10G/Es enhanced QoS module provides a unique hierarchical scheduling
model that includes four priorities, with WFQ within each priority and shaping
per queue. This model enables operators to define flexible and highly granular
QoS schemes for any mix of services.
Finally, the enhanced QoS module re-marks the P-bits and CFI/DEI bits of the
most outer VLAN according to the CoS and color decision in the classifier. This
step is also known as the modifier.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 187 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

13.1.2.1 Queue Management

Queue management is the process by which packets are assigned to priority
queues. Queue management also includes congestion management. IP-10G
provides the tail-drop method of congestion management, and enhanced QoS
also offers Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED).
Enhanced QoS supports eight queues with configurable buffer size. The user
can specify the buffer size of each queue independently. The total amount of
memory dedicated to these queue buffers is 4Mb, and the size of each queue
can be set in granularity of 0.5Mb. The default buffer size is 0.5Mb for each
queue.
The following considerations should be taken into account in determining the
proper buffer size:

Latency considerations If low latency is required (users would rather

drop frames in the queue than increase latency) small buffer sizes are
preferable.

Note:

The actual, effective buffer size of the queue can be less than
0.5Mb based on the configuration of the WRED tail drop
curve.
Throughput immunity to fast bursts When traffic is characterized by
fast bursts, it is recommended to increase the buffer sizes of the priority
queues to prevent packet loss. Of course, this comes at the cost of a
possible increase in latency.

User can configure burst size as a tradeoff between latency and immunity to
bursts, according the application requirements.
One of the key features of IP-10Gs enhanced QoS is the use of WRED to
manage congestion scenarios. WRED provides several advantages over the
standard tail-drop congestion management method.
WRED enables differentiation between higher and lower priority traffic based
on CoS. Moreover, WRED can increase capacity utilization by eliminating the
phenomenon of global synchronization. Global synchronization occurs when
TCP flows sharing bottleneck conditions receive loss indications at around the
same time. This can result in periods during which link bandwidth utilization
drops significantly as a consequence of a simultaneous falling to a slow start
of all the TCP flows.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 188 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

13.1.2.2 Scheduling and Shaping

Scheduling and shaping determine how traffic is sent on to the radio from the
queues. Scheduling determines the priority among the queues, and shaping
determines the traffic profile for each queue.
IP-10Gs enhanced QoS module provides a unique hierarchical scheduling
model that includes four priorities, with Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) within
each priority, and shaping per port and per queue. This model enables
operators to define flexible and highly granular QoS schemes for any mix of
services.
Shaping
The egress shaper is used to shape the traffic profile sent to the radio. In
enhanced QoS mode, there is an egress shaper for each priority queue. The
user can configure the following parameters:
Global shaper admin Enables/disables all of the eight shapers.

Shaper admin Enables/disables each shaper for each priority queue.

CIR Committed Information Rate (as specified by MEF 10.2).

CBS Committed Buffer Size (as specified by MEF 10.2).

Line compensation Represents the number of bytes to compensate in
the shaper credits counting for the Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) and the
preamble + SFD fields between the two consecutive Ethernet frames. The
default value is 20 bytes, which is the number of bytes used for IFG +
preamble + SFD according to the Ethernet standard.

Note:

The user can configure the shaper to count in L2 by setting

line compensation to zero. The user can also punish short
frame senders for the overhead they cause in the network
by increasing the line compensation to a value above 20
bytes.

Scheduling
IP-10Gs enhanced QoS mechanism provides Strict Priority and Weighted Fair
Queue (WFQ) for scheduling. Users can configure a combination of both
methods to achieve the optimal results for their unique network
requirements.
Each priority queue has a configurable strict priority from 1 to 4
(4=High;1=Low). WFQ weights are used to partition bandwidth between
queues of the same priority.
For each queue, the user configures the following parameters:
Priority (1 to 4) The priority value is strictly applied. This means the
queue with higher priority will egress before a queue with lower priority,
regardless of WFQ weights.

WFQ weight (1 to 15) Defines the ratio between the bandwidth given to
queues of the same priority. For example if queue 6 and queue 7 are
assigned WFQ weights of 4 and 8, respectively (using the notations of the
above figure), then under congestion conditions queue 7 will be allowed to
transmit twice as much bandwidth as queue 6.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 189 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Note:

User Guide

In order to be able to egress frames, each queue must also

have enough credits in its shaper.

13.1.2.3 Configurable P-Bit and CFI/DEI Re-Marking

When enabled, the re-marker modifies each packets 802.1p P-Bit and CFI/DEI
bit fields. 802.1p is modified according to the classifier decision.
The CFI/DEI (color) field is modified according to the classifier and policer
decision. The color is first determined by a classifier and may be later
overwritten by a policer. Green color is represented by a CFI/DEI value of 0,
and Yellow color is represented by a CFI/DEI value of 1.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 190 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

13.2

User Guide

Configuring Standard QoS

This section includes:

Opening the QoS & Rate Limiting Page

Configuring the Classification Settings
Configuring the Egress Scheduler
Configuring Ingress Rate Limiting
Remapping P-Bits
Configuring VLAN-ID to Queue
Assigning IP P-Bits to Queue
Assigning Queues According to P-Bits
Assigning Queue Weights

Configuring Policers
Defining the Static MAC Table
Copying QoS Settings from One Port to Another

Strict for fourth queue, and Hierarchical Round Robin (HRR) for third,
second, and first queues.
Strict for fourth and third queues, and HRR for second and first queues.
HRR for all queues.

In the HRR scheduling scheme, a weight is assigned to each queue, so that

frames egress from the queues according to their assigned weight, to avoid
"starvation" of lower priority queues. In addition, frames will egress in a
"mixed" manner, to avoid "bursts" of frames from the same queue.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 194 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Each queue weight can be configured, and the weight will be used by the
scheduler when the specific queue is part of the HRR scheduling scheme.
The queue weight is a value between 1 and 32, and is configured via the queue
weights table. The default queue weights are 8,4,2,1.
To define how frames are output from the queues:
1 Expand the port and go to the Egress Rate Limiting section of the QoS &
Rate Limiting page.

2 In the Egress shaper field, select On or Off to enable or disable the egress
shaper. The default is OFF.
3 In the Shaper rate field, enter the Kb per second for the egress rate limit.
The value should be in steps of 64K for values less than 1 Mbps; 1M steps
for values between 1 Mbps and 100 Mbps; and 10M steps for values
between 100 Mbps and 1000 Mbps:
For 64 Kbps <= Rate <= 960 Kbps, in steps of 64 Kbps.
For 1000 Kbps <= Rate <= 100,000 Kbps, in steps of 1000 Kbps.
For 100,000 Kbps < Rate <= 1,000,000 Kbps, in steps of 10,000 Kbps.

13.2.4 Configuring Ingress Rate Limiting

The Ingress rate limiting section of the QoS & rate limiting window determines
the port ingress rate limit.
To specify the port ingress rate limit:
1 Expand the port and go to the Ingress Rate Limiting section of the QoS &
Rate Limiting page.

2 In the Attach policer field, specify which policer to attach to the port. You
can configure up to five policers for each port.
Each policer has the following parameters:
CIR - Committed Information Rate. Rate limiting resolution is:
For 64 Kbps <= CIR <= 960 Kbps, in steps of 64 Kbps
For 1000 Kbps <= CIR <= 100,000 Kbps, in steps of 1000 Kbps
For 100,000 Kbps < CIR <= 1,000,000 Kbps, in steps of 10,000 Kbps
CBS - Committed Burst Size. CBS is CIR-dependent, and should be
configured in bytes:
For 64 Kbps <= CIR <= 960 Kbps, 0 < CBS <= 273,404 bytes.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 198 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

13.2.8 Assigning Queues According to P-Bits

The VLAN P-Bits to Queue page enables you to assign a queue to a frame
according to the frames p-bits (CoS), assuming the frame is tagged.
To assign a queue to a frame according to the frames p-bits:
1 Click VLAN P-bits to queue in the Advanced section at the bottom of the
QoS & Rate Limiting page The QoS-VLAN Pbits to Queue window opens.

2 In the QoS VLAN Pbits to Queue section, assign a queue to each p-bit.
3 Click Apply.

13.2.9 Assigning Queue Weights

The Queue Weights page allows you to assign weights to each queue.
Queue weight is used by scheduler when the specific queue is part of HRR
scheduling scheme.
To configure the QoS queue weights:
1 Click Queue weights in the Advanced section at the bottom of the QoS &
Rate Limiting page The QoS-Queue Weights window opens.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 199 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

2 In the Scheduler Queue Weight section, select one of the four QoS queues
in the drop-down list on the left and specify the weight for the selected
queue in the drop-down list to the right.
Queue weights can be configured in the range of 1-32.
The higher the weight, the higher the priority for that queue.
3 Click Apply to save your configuration settings.
In the QoS-Queue Weights table, click Refresh to display the current queue
weights.

13.2.10 Configuring Policers

The QoS-Policer List page enables you to add policy rules to a policer. You can
configure up to five policy rules per policer.
When a policer definition is completed, it can be associated with any port, by
attaching its name to the port. This will enforce all policy rules of the policer
on the port. You can use the detach command to remove the policer (and all its
policy rules) from the port.
To configure a policer:
1 Click Policer List in the Advanced section at the bottom of the QoS & Rate
Limiting page The QoS-Policer List window opens. The Policer List
includes the following columns:
Policer Name Identifies the policer.
Attached Ports Indicates to which ports the policer is attached.

2 In the Operation field above the QoS-Policer List section, select Add or
Delete to specify the operation type.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 200 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

3 In the Policer Name field, enter a name for the policer. Note that the name
cannot include spaces. However, you can use underscores instead.
4 Click Apply. The new policer appears in the QoS-Policer List section.
5 Select a policer from the list and click its + icon to expand the policer
details.
6 In the Operation field, select Add or Delete to specify the operation type.
7 In the Class name field, enter a class name for the policer.
8 In the Traffic type field, select the type of traffic to which the policer can
be applied.
9 In the CIR field, enter the CIR steps, in kbps.
10 In the CBS field, enter the CBS, in bytes.
11 Click Apply.

13.2.11 Defining the Static MAC Table

The Static MAC table is used to load static MAC addresses to the forwarding
table of the switch.
To define the static MAC table:
1 Click Static MAC in the Advanced section at the bottom of the QoS & Rate
Limiting page The QoS-Static MAC window opens.

2 In the Operation field, select Add or Delete to specify the operation type.
3 In the VLAN ID field, enter the ID of the frame.
Each frame is attached with a VLAN ID.
Frames are learned and filed in the static MAC table under their VLAN
ID.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 201 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

4 In the Static MAC field, enter in the 48-bit static MAC address, in octet
format (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx).
Note:

The static MACs are never flushed.

5 In the Forward To field, select the destination port to which the frame
should be forwarded.
6 In the Priority field, select a priority level.
7 Click Apply.
In the QoS Static MAC table:

VLAN ID Indicates the ID of the frame.

Static MAC Indicates the 48-bit MAC address.

Forward Indicates which port the frame will be forwarded to.

Priority Indicates the priority level according to the QoS configurations.

13.2.12 Copying QoS Settings from One Port to Another

Since it is common to set QoS and rate limiting settings identically in several
ports, the Copy Ports Configuration option can be used to copy the
configurations from one port to another. This saves considerable time and
prevents configuration errors.
To copy a ports QoS configuration to another port:
1 In the Copy Ports Configuration section of the QoS & Rate Limiting page,
select the source port from the Source port drop down list.

2 Select the port to which you want to copy the source ports settings from
the Destination port drop down list.
3 Specify the copy operation to be performed:
Copy Priorities Configuration Copies all traffic priorities using the
ingress classifier.
Copy Rate Limiting Configuration Copies the policer configuration
only.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 202 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

13.3

User Guide

Configuring Enhanced QoS

This feature requires:

Enhanced QoS License

Enhanced QoS settings apply to the egress traffic on the Radio port (where the
bottleneck is located). All other ports function as usual. Standard QoS settings
continue to apply even when enhanced QoS is activated.

13.3.1 Preparing the System for Enhanced QoS

This section describes how to prepare the system to enable the Enhanced
traffic manager to minimize the impact on traffic.
In preparation for using the Enhanced traffic manager, you must disable the
QoS egress shaper. You should also classify the in-band management traffic to
ensure that the management signal is not affected.
13.3.1.1 Classifying In-Band Management Traffic
To configure the classification of the in-band management signal:
1 Select Configuration > General > Management. The Management page
opens. Management ports are configured in the Management Ports section,
towards the bottom of the Management page.
2 In the bottom of the Management page, click Refresh. The current
parameters are displayed.

3 Select In-band or Out of band from the Type drop down list to configure
the management mode.
4 In the In-band Management VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN. ID that will
be used to manage the unit, when the In-band management type is used.
5 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 203 of 577

13.3.3 Enabling PTP Optimized Transport

This feature cannot be used with:

Wayside Channel

The Precision Time Protocol (PTP) optimized transport feature is a special

channel with low Packet Delay Variation (PDV), which is essential for timing
synchronization protocols such as IEEE 1588. PTP optimized transport
channel is a Constant Bit Rate Channel that is dedicated to the Precision Time
protocol with a constant latency that is invariant to ACM profile changes and
to any congestion conditions that may occur on the payload traffic path.
Upon enabling this feature, a special low PDV channel is created. This channel
has 2Mb bandwidth and carries all the frames mapped to the 8th queue. Once
enabling the feature, the user must make sure to classify all PTP frames to the
8th queue according to the criterion described above (e.g.,. by UDP destination
ports 319 and 320 for IEEE 1588 protocol). In this mode, all frames from the
8th queue will bypass the shaper and scheduler and will be sent directly to the
dedicated low PDV channel.
To enable PTP Optimized transport:
1 Ensure that the Wayside channel is disabled:
i

Select Configuration > Interfaces > Wayside Channel. The Wayside

Channel page opens.

ii In the Wayside admin field, select Disable.

iii Click Apply to disable the Wayside channel.
2 Select Configuration > Ethernet switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
Configuration & Parameters. The Configuration & Parameters page
opens.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 206 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

3 Go to the Configuration section.

4 In the Precision Time Protocol optimized transport admin field, select

Enable.
5 Click Apply.
6 Classify all PTP frames to the eighth priority queue.IN PTP optimized
transport mode, frames from the eighth queue will bypass the shaper and
scheduler and will be sent directly to the dedicated low PDV channel.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 207 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

13.3.4 Configuring Queue Size

Enhanced QoS supports eight queues with configurable buffer sizes. The user
can specify the buffer size of each queue independently. The total amount of
memory dedicated to these queue buffers is 4Mb, and the size of each queue
can be set in granularity of 0.5Mb. The default buffer size is 0.5Mb for each
queue.
The following considerations should be taken into account in determining the
proper buffer size:
Latency considerations If low latency is required (users would rather
drop frames in the queue than increase latency) small buffer sizes are
preferable.
Note:

The actual, effective buffer size of the queue can be less than
0.5Mb based on the configuration of the WRED tail drop
curve.

Throughput immunity to fast bursts When traffic is characterized by

fast bursts, it is recommended to increase the buffer sizes of the priority
queues to prevent packet loss. Of course, this comes at the cost of a
possible increase in latency.

You can configure burst size as a tradeoff between latency and immunity to
bursts, according the application requirements.
Note:

Changing queue size can impact traffic output.

To configure queue size:

1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
Configuration & Parameters. The Configuration & Parameters page
opens.

2 In the Queue Size section of the Configuration & Parameters page, select
the buffer size in the Queue Size field for each queue.
3 Click Apply.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 208 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

13.3.5 Configuring Enhanced QoS Classification

The classifier is a basic element of each Enhanced Traffic Manager mechanism.
Each frame is given a Class of Service (CoS) and color (based on MEF 10.2
recommendations). Green frames refer to traffic that complies with the
configured CIR. Yellow frames exceed the CIR, but are still less than the
configured CBS.
Users can define several criteria that classify Ethernet frames. All the
classification criteria are divided into three hierarchies from the most specific
to the general.
13.3.5.1 Configuring Services
You can configure services per VLAN. To configure services:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
Classification. The Classification page opens.
2 Go to the Services Configuration section, towards the bottom of the
Classification page.

3 Click Services Configuration Table. The Services Configuration Table

opens.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 209 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

4 In the Row number field, enter the number of the row you want to
configure and press <Enter>. The window jumps to the row you entered.
5 In the Service ID column, an ID for the service (1-255).
6 Click Apply.
13.3.5.2 Configuring the egress CoS and Color Modifier (Marker)
You can configure the IP-10G/E to re-mark the P-bits and CFI/DEI bits of the
most outer VLAN according to the CoS and color decision in the classifier. This
step is also known as the modifier.
To configure the modifier:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
Classification. The Classification page opens.
2 Go to the Marker section, towards the bottom of the Classification page.

3 Select Enable.
4 Click Marker Configuration Table. The Marker Configuration Table
opens. The markers are sorted by CoS and color.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 210 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

5 Click + next to the marker you want to modify. The marker is expanded.

6 Modify the P-bit value and/or the DEI/CFI value fields.

7 Click Apply.
13.3.5.3 Enabling Classification Rules
To enable classification rules for Ethernet frames:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
Classification. The Classification page opens.
2 In the First Hierarchy section, select Enable for the classification criteria.
More than one criterion can be selected.
To enable all first hierarchy criteria, select Enable all.
To disable all first hierarchy criteria, select Disable all.

3 In the Second Hierarchy section, select Enable for the classification

Any or all of these criteria can be used to classify the CoS for the frames.
Classification by Source MAC Address

Up to 16 separate MAC addresses can be configured.

To configure traffic classification rules according to the source MAC Address:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
Classification. The Classification page opens.
2 In the First Hierarchy section, click MAC Addresses Table to open the
MAC addresses configuration window.

3 Go to the Add New Entry section

4 In the Row number field, select the number to be displayed in the #
column for this classification rule.
5 In the MAC address field, enter the source MAC address that is being
classified.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 214 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

6 In the CoS field, select the CoS to be assigned to traffic from this MAC
address (0 7).
7 In the Color field, select the traffic color to be assigned to traffic from this
MAC address. Options are Green (compliant) or Yellow (non-compliant).
8 Click Apply.
To edit the parameters of a MAC address that is already listed in the MAC
Addresses table:
1 Expand the MAC address.

2 Edit the MAC address, CoS, and/or Color fields.

3 Click Apply.
Classification by UDP Ports

Up to eight UDP port entries can be configured.

To configure traffic classification rules according to the UDP ports:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
Classification. The Classification page opens.
2 In the First Hierarchy section, click UDP Ports Table to open the UDP
Ports Table window.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 215 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

3 Go to the Add New Entry section

4 In the Row number field, select the number to be displayed in the #
column for this classification rule.
5 In the Source port field, enter the number of the source UDP port that is
being classified.
6 In the Destination port field, enter the number of the destination UDP
port that is being classified.
7 In the CoS field, select the CoS to be assigned to traffic from this UDP port.
8 In the Color field, specify whether the frames associated with this UDP
port are designated as Green (compliant) or Yellow (non-compliant).
9 Click Apply.
To edit the parameters of a UDP source port that is already listed in the UDP
Ports table:
1 Expand the port.

2 Edit the Source port, Destination Port, CoS, and/or Color fields.
3 Click Apply.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 216 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

UDP port configurations recommendations:

To specify classification by UDP source port only, you should configure

Destination Port to 0.
To specify classification by UDP destination port only, you should
configure Source Port to 0.
When both the Source and Destination port parameters contain non-zero
values, the classification rule only applies to frames that match both the
Source and Destination ports.

Classification by Known Multicast MAC Address

You can classify the CoS and color of traffic that is being sent to one of the
predefined multicast MAC addresses.
The Known multicast MAC addresses table contains a list of 66 destination
MAC addresses which are reserved for network protocols use.
To configure traffic classification rules according to the known multicast MAC
addresses:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
Classification. The Classification page opens.
2 In the First Hierarchy section, click Known Multicast MAC Addresses
Table to open the Known Multicast MAC Addresses Table window.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 217 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

3 Click the + icon next to a listed MAC address to view its details.

4 In the CoS field, select the CoS to be assigned to traffic from this MAC
address.
5 In the Color field, specify whether the frames associated with this MAC
address are designated as Green (compliant) or Yellow (non-compliant)
6 In the Validity field, select Valid or Not valid to specify whether the
classification rules are applied to frames that are sent to this destination
MAC address.
7 Click Apply.
13.3.5.6 Configuring Second Hierarchy Classification Rules
The second hierarchy enables you to determine CoS according to Service ID or
in-band management VLAN ID. The latter is used to give high priority to the
in-band management frames in order to prevent loss of the management
signal on the remote sites.
To configure the second hierarchy classification rules:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
Classification. The Classification page opens.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 218 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

2 Go to the Second Hierarchy section.

3 In the 1st criterion, by in-band management VLAN ID field, select

Enable to Enable in-band management by VLAN ID.
4 In the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID for the in-band management
signal.
Note:

The VLAN ID is configured in the Management Ports section

of the Management window. Refer to Configuring In-Band
Management on page 89.

5 In the Color field, select Green or Yellow to specify the classification color
for the in-band management signal.
Green - The in-band management signal complies with the CIR.
Yellow - The in-band management signal complies with the EIR.
6 In the CoS field, enter a number between 0-7 as the CoS value for the inband management signal.
7 In the 2nd criterion, by Service Id field, click Service to CoS and Color
Classification Table. The Service to CoS and Color Classification Table
opens.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 219 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

8 Click + next to the service to which you want to assign a CoS and color to
expand the service.

9 In the Service Name field, enter a name for the service.

10 In the CoS field, enter the CoS you want to assign to the service.
11 From the Color drop down list, select the color you want to assign to the
service.
12 From the Validity drop down list, select Valid.
13 Click Apply to save the settings.
14 When you have finished configuring services, click Close to close the
Service to CoS and Color Classification Table.
15 Click Apply to save the second hierarchy settings.
13.3.5.7 Configuring Third Hierarchy Classification Rules
The third hierarchy contains the classification rules that apply to the most
general traffic parameters. The third hierarchy contains three classification
criteria:
VLAN P-Bits to CoS
DSCP/TOS Bits to CoS

MPLS exp Bits to CoS

VLAN P-bits to CoS

The first classification rule in the third hierarchy manages the outgoing traffic
according to the VLAN P-bits value that already exists on the frame.
You can configure the CoS and frame color of the traffic according to the P-bits
and CFI value of each frame.
There are two CFI options for each P-bit and a total of 16 classification rules
according to the VLAN P-bits.
To view VLAN P-bits traffic classification rules:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
Classification. The Classification page opens.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 220 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

2 In the Third hierarchy section, click VLAN P-Bits to CoS and Color
Classification Table to open the VLAN P-bits to CoS and Color
Classification table.

In the VLAN P-bits to CoS and Color Classification table:

# - Indicates the number of the classification rule.
802.1 UP - Indicates the P-bit value for this classification rule. The range of
options is 0 to 7.
CFI/DEI - Indicates the CFI/DEI value for this classification rule. The
options are 0 or 1.
Class of Service - Indicates the configured CoS for this classification rule.
Color - Indicates the configured color for this classification rule.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 221 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

To configure VLAN P-bits traffic classification rules:

1 Click the + icon for a selected rule to view its details.

2 In the CoS field, enter the Class of Service you want to assign to the rule.
3 In the Color field, select Green or Yellow to specify whether frames with
the P-Bit and CFI/DEI value assigned to this rule are designated as Green
(compliant) or Yellow (non-compliant).
4 Click Apply.
DSCP/TOS Bits to CoS

Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP) or Type of Service (TOS) is a 6 bit

length field inside the IP datagram header carrying priority information.
Classification by DSCP bits can be used for untagged frames, as well as 802.1Q
tagged or provider VLAN tagged frames. The classifier also supports
classification by Traffic Class (TC) of the IPv6.
Whichever IP protocol version is used, the classifier extracts the adjacent field
automatically.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 222 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

To configure DSCP/TOC P-bits traffic classification rules:

1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
Classification. The Classification page opens.
2 In the Third Hierarchy section, click DSCP/TOS Bits to CoS and Color
Classification table to open the DSCP/TOS Bits to CoS and Color
Classification table.

3 Click the + icon for a selected rule to view its details.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 223 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

4 In the CoS field, enter the Class of Service you want to assign to the rule.
5 In the Color field, select Green or Yellow to specify whether frames with
the DSCP/TOS value assigned to this rule are designated as Green
(compliant) or Yellow (non-compliant).
6 Click Apply.
MPLS exp Bits to CoS

MPLS experimental bits are used to provide QoS capabilities by utilizing the
bits set in the MPLS labels.
MPLS Label Format

Classification by MPLS experimental bits is supported in both untagged and

802.1Q/provider tagged frames.
To configure MPLS experimental bits traffic classification rules:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
Classification. The Classification page opens.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 224 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

2 In the Third Hierarchy section, click MPLS exp bits to CoS and Color
Classification Table to open the MPLS exp bits to CoS and Color
Classification table.

3 Click the + icon for a selected rule to view its details.

4 In the CoS field, enter the Class of Service you want to assign to the rule.
5 In the Color field, select Green or Yellow to specify whether frames with
the MPLS value assigned to this rule are designated as Green (compliant)
or Yellow (non-compliant).
6 Click Apply.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 225 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

13.3.6 Configuring Egress Policers

You can define up to 256 egress policers and map services to policers.
To define egress policers:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
Egress Policing. The Egress Policing page opens.

2 Select Enable.
3 Click Policer Configuration Table. The Policer Configuration Table opens.

4 Click + next to the policer you want to define to display the policer
configuration settings.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 226 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

5
6
7
8
9
10

User Guide

In the Policer Name field, enter a name for the policer.

In the CIR field, enter the CIR value. The default value is 0.
In the CBS field, enter the CBS value. The default value is 12288 bytes.
In the EIR field, enter the EIR value. The default value is 0.
In the EBS field, enter the EBS value. The default value is 12288.
In the Color mode field, select Color aware or Color blind:
In Color aware mode, all packets that ingress with a CFI/DEI field set to
1 (yellow) are treated as EIR packets, even if credits remain in the CIR
bucket.
In Color blind mode, all ingress packets are treated as green regardless
of their CFI/DEI value. A color-blind policer discards any former color
decisions.

11 In the Coupling admin field, select Enable or Disable.

When enabled, frames that ingress as yellow may be converted to
green when there are no available yellow credits in the EIR bucket.
Note:

Coupling admin is only relevant in color aware mode.

12 In the Line compensation field, enter the IFG + Preamble. The default
value is 20 bytes. The policer adds this value to the size of each arriving
frame size (e.g., frame size of 64 bytes will be handled as a frame size of
64+20=84 bytes). When Line compensation is 20, the policer operates as
Layer 1. When Line compensation is 0, the policer operates as Layer 2.
13 In the Admin field, select Enable to enable the policer.
14 Click Apply to save the policers configuration.
15 When you have finished configuring policers, click Close to close the
Policer Configuration Table.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 227 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

16 In the Egress Policing page, click Service to Policer Mapping Table. The
Service to Policer Mapping Table opens.

17 In the Service ID field, enter the Service ID of the service you want to map.
18 In the Policer ID field, enter the Policer ID of the policer to which you
want to map the service. An ID of 0 is void, which means that no policer is
attached to the service.
Note:

A service can only be mapped to one policer, unless you

select the Policer per CoS option described in the next step.
A policer can be mapped to multiple services.

19 Optionally, to use the Policer per CoS option (refer to Policer per Cos Option
on page 229).
i Select a Policer ID of 8 or a multiple of 8.
ii In the Value field, select On.
iii Click Apply.
20 Click Apply.
21 When you have finished mapping services to policers, click Close to close
the Service to Policer Mapping Table.
22 In the Egress Policing page, click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 228 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

13.3.6.1 Policer per Cos Option

The Policer per Cos option allocates eight consecutive policers to the same
service. Each policer is assigned a different CoS value, and can be configured to a
different bandwidth profile. For example, if Service 3 is mapped to Policer 8 and
the Policer per CoS option is enabled:
Policer8 > Service3; Cos=0
Policer9 > Service3 ; Cos=1
Policer10 > Service3 ; Cos=2
Policer11 > Service3 ; Cos=3
Policer12 > Service3 ; Cos=4
Policer13 > Service3 ; Cos=5
Policer14 > Service3 ; Cos=6
Policer15 > Service3 ; Cos=7
Using the Policer per CoS option will consume eight policers from the total
pool of 255 policers.
Note:

The Policer per CoS option can be enabled only for a Policer
with a Policer ID of 8 or a multiple of 8, e.g., Policer8,
Policer16,Policer24, , Policer248 . When using the Policer
per CoS option, none of the 8 policers that are allocated to
the service can be used by other services.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 229 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

13.3.7 Configuring WRED

Weighted Random Early Detect (WRED) mechanism can increase capacity
utilization of TCP traffic by eliminating the phenomenon of global
synchronization. Global synchronization occurs when TCP flows that share
bottleneck conditions receive loss indications at the same time. This can result
in periods during which link bandwidth utilization drops significantly as a
consequence of simultaneous falling to slow start of all the TCP flows.
To enable WRED:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
WRED. The WRED page opens.

3 In the Priority field, enter a number between 1-4 as the egress priority for
this queue. The queue with a higher priority egresses before a lower one
regardless of WFQ weights.
4 In the WFQ weight field, enter a number between 1 and 15 to set the WFQ
weight. This weight determines the ratio for allowed bandwidth to queues
with the same priority. For example, if queue 5 has a WFQ weight of 4, and
queue 7 has a WFQ weight of 8, then under congestion conditions, queue 7
will be allowed to transmit twice as much bandwidth as queue 5.
5 In the Shaper admin field, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable
the Egress shaper and scheduler for this priority queue.
6 In the CIR field, enter the number of Kbps to be allocated for CIR for this
queue.
7 In the CBS field, enter the number of bytes to be allocated for CBS for this
queue.
8 In the Line compensation field, enter the number of bytes that is
compensated in the shaper credits counting for the Inter-Frame Gap (IFG)
and the preamble + SFD fields between the two consecutive Ethernet
frames. The default value is 20 bytes which is the number of bytes used for
IFG + preamble + SFD according to the Ethernet standard.
9 Click Apply.
Note:

You may want the Egress shaper to count in L2 by setting

line compensation to 0. You can also punish short frame
senders for the overhead they cause in the network by
increasing the line compensation above 20 bytes.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 233 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

14.

User Guide

Setting Up Protected Configurations

This chapter includes:

Protection Overview
Configuring 1+1 HSB
Configuring a 2+0
Configuring 2+2 HSB
Specifying Active and Standby Mode
Configuring Switchover Criteria
Viewing Mate Parameters
Configuring Multi-Unit LAG

Related topics:

Troubleshooting Protection

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 234 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

14.1

User Guide

Protection Overview
Equipment protection is possible in both standalone and nodal configurations.
The following protected configurations are available:
1+1 HSB
2+0 Multi-Radio
2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and Line Protection
2+2 HSB and Multi-Radio
The following table summarizes the degree of protection provided by the
various IP-10G/E configuration options.
Comparison of IP-10G/E Protection Options

Configuration

# of IDUs # of RFUs Radio

Radio Capacity Unit
per
per
Capacity Failure
Terminal Terminal Normal

Native TDM Protection1 XPIC

Support

ACM
Support

BBS
(SD/FD)
Support

1+1 HSB

Protected TDM trails

No
are duplicated in the
active and standby IDUs.

Optional2

Optional

2+0 Multi-Radio

RFU Failure 13
IDU (Slave) Failure 14

TDM capacity is doubled

but not protected.5

Optional

Optional8

IDU (Slave or Master)

Failure - 17

Protected TDM trails

Optional
are duplicated in the
active and standby IDUs.

Full protection

Optional

IDU (Master) Failure - 0

2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU 2
and Line Protection

2+2 HSB with Multi-Radio 4

RFU Failure 16

Optional

TDM protection is not relevant to the IP-10E.

ACM is not supported when BBS (SD/FD) is used.
3
With graceful degradation.
4
With graceful degradation.
5
Protection can optionally be provided using the SNCP/ABR mechanism. This
is done by defining a primary TDM trail over one radio carrier and a secondary trail
over the other radio carrier. The secondary trail will back up the primary trail in the
event of any failure (assuming the main IDU performing the node TDM XC is
functional).
6
With graceful degradation.
7
With graceful degradation.
8
ACM support is only provided for Ethernet traffic, not for TDM trails.
2

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 235 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

14.2

User Guide

Configuring 1+1 HSB

This section includes:

1+1 HSB Overview

Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New Standalone System
Replacing the Standby Unit in a 1+1 HSB Standalone System
Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New Nodal System
Replacing the Standby Unit in a 1+1 HSB Nodal System

This feature cannot be used with:

Multi-Radio
2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and line protection
XPIC

Related topics:

Specifying Active and Standby Mode

Configuring Switchover Criteria
Configuring IP Addresses
ACM with 1+1 HSB Protection

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 236 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

14.2.1 1+1 HSB Overview

A 1+1 configuration scheme can be used to provide full protection in the event
of IDU or RFU failure. The two IDUs operate in active and standby mode. If
there is a failure in the active IDU or RFU, the standby IDU and RFU pair
switches to active mode. TDM trails are duplicated in the active and standby
IDUs, so that both Ethernet and TDM traffic is protected.
In a 1+1 configuration, the protection options are as follows:

Standalone The IDUs must be connected by a dedicated Ethernet

protection cable. Each IDU has a unique IP address.
Nodal The IDUs are connected by the backplane of the nodal enclosure.
There is one IP address for each of the main units.

1+1 HSB can be used with BBS Space or Frequency Diversity.

The following figure illustrates a 1+1 HSB configuration in a standalone setup,
with an Ethernet protection cable connecting the two IDUs via their Protection
ports.
1+1 HSB Protection Connecting the IDUs

A Protection Panel or protection split cable is designed to implement E1/DS1

splitters. Split cables must be used for Ethernet signals. Cables for other units
should be connected to the protection panel and cables. The traffic,
management, and wayside interfaces for both the active and the standby IDUs
should also be connected to the protection panel. It is also possible to use
Ethernet splitters to the FE and SFP (Optical GbE) ports.
The electrical GbE (10/100/1000) interface can be split by means of the
protection panel or protection split cables, subject to the following limitations:
The interface should be set to Auto negotiation = OFF, Rate=100, and
Duplex=Full.
When the standby unit is powered Off and back On, Ethernet traffic
running through electrical GbE ports in the active unit may be affected.

For additional information:

Configuring Ethernet Ports

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 237 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

14.2.2 Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New Standalone System

For a 1+1 configuration, in a standalone system the IDUs must be connected
by a dedicated Ethernet protection cable.
Perform the following preliminary steps:
Check the serial/part numbers section in the Configuration > General >
Unit Parameters page to verify that all the IDUs are using the same
hardware versions.
Check the software versions in the Versions table in the Configuration >
General > Versions > IDU page to verify that all the IDUs are using the
same software versions.
Check the license compatibility in the License features section in the
Configuration > General > Licensing page to verify that all the IDUs are
using the same license.
Check the IP Addresses Local IP configuration section in the Configuration
> General > Management page to verify that each IDU has a unique IP
Address and that all addresses are within the same subnet.
Check the Type field in the Management Ports section in the Configuration
> General > Management page to verify that each IDU has the same
Management mode (In-Band or Out-of-Band).
For In-Band management, ensure that all IDUs have the same In-Band
VID.
To configure 1+1 HSB protection in a standalone system:
1 Disconnect all cables (radio, traffic, wayside, and protection), except for
the Management cable, from the units.
2 Turn on the Active unit.
3 Connect a management cable to the management interface of the Active
IDU, or configure the IDU via terminal:
i

Install the license (if necessary). Refer to Loading a New License Key on
page 77.
ii Upgrade the software (if necessary). Refer to Upgrading the IDU
Software Version on page 62.
iii Configure the radio parameters. Refer to Configuring the Radio
Parameters on page 152.
iv Configure the Ethernet Application Type to set the Switching mode.
Possible values are Smart Pipe, Managed Switch, and Metro Switch.
Refer to Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode on page 97.
4 Configure the required Management Type (Out-of-Band or In-Band). If you
use In-Band management, configure a management VLAN ID. Refer to
Configuring Unit Management on page 84.
5 For the Active IDU, set Protection Admin to: 1+1 HSB. At this point,
management might be lost for approximately 50 seconds.
6 For the Active IDU, set Protection Lockout to: On.
7 Turn on the Standby IDU.
8 Connect a management cable to the management interface of the Standby
IDU.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 238 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

9 Perform the following configuration steps on the Standby IDU:

Install the license (if necessary). Refer to Loading a New License Key on
page 77.
ii Upgrade the software (if necessary). Refer to Upgrading the IDU
Software Version on page 62.
iii Configure the Ethernet Application Type to the same Switching mode
as the Active IDU. Possible values are Smart Pipe, Managed Switch,
and Metro Switch. Refer to Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode
on page 97.
iv If you are using Metro Switch, set its Ether Type to the same value as
the Active units Ether Type. Possible values are: 0x88a8, 0x8100,
0x9100 and 0x9200.
v Configure the Standby IDU to the same Management Type as the Active
IDU (Out-of-Band or In-Band). If you use In-Band management,
configure a management VLAN ID. Refer to Configuring Unit
Management on page 84.
10 For the Standby IDU, set Protection Admin to: 1+1 HSB. At this point,
both units should start communicating, and transmitting their local MAC
and IP addresses to each other.
11 To verify communication between the two IDUs, check both IDUs to ensure
that there is no Mate Communication Failure alarm. If this alarm is active
on either IDU, installation of 1+1 HSB Protection has failed.
12 The management cable can be disconnected from the Standby IDU. Use a Y
splitter cable or the Protection Panel to connect both units management
interfaces.
13 Check if there is a Configuration Mismatch alarm on either IDU. This alarm
indicates that the IDUs do not have an identical configuration. If a
Configuration Mismatch alarm is raised:
i

Enter a Copy to Mate command on the Active IDU. This copies the
configuration of the Active IDU to the Standby IDU.
ii Perform a Cold Reset on the Standby IDU. When the Standby IDU
comes back online, its configuration should be identical to that of the
Active IDU, and the Configuration Mismatch alarm should be cleared on
both IDUs.
14 Connect all traffic, radio, and wayside cables to both units (via the
protection panel, or via splitters).
15 Configure the Ethernet and E1/DS1 interfaces to Enable.
16 Perform a Copy to Mate operation to ensure that both IDUs remain
synchronized:
i

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 239 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

18 Verify that the IDU connected to the RFU fed by the lower attenuation
channel of the RF coupler is in Active mode. If this IDU is in Standby mode,
enter a Manual Switch command.
Note:

The same procedure should be performed on the remote

end while installing the radio.

14.2.3 Replacing the Standby Unit in a 1+1 HSB Standalone System

1 On the Active IDU, set Protection Lockout to: On.
2 Disconnect all cables, including management, Ethernet, and radio cables,
from the Standby unit.
3 Remove the unit.
4 Insert the new Standby IDU in place of the old Standby IDU.
5 Connect only the management cable and/or the serial COM to the Standby
unit.
Note:

It is important to connect a separate management cable to

the Standby IDU, rather than managing it via the Y splitter.
Radio and other line interfaces should not be connected at
this stage.

6 Set the IP address and Subnet address of the new Standby IDU. You can do
this via the CLI or the Web EMS.
7 Configure the new Standby IDU as follows:
i

Install the license (if necessary). Refer to Loading a New License Key on
page 77.
ii Upgrade to the software of the new Standby unit to match the software
version of the Active unit. Refer to Upgrading the IDU Software Version
on page 62.
iii Configure the Ethernet Application Type to the same Switching mode
as the Active IDU. Possible values are Smart Pipe, Managed Switch,
and Metro Switch. Refer to Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode
on page 97.
iv If you are using Metro Switch, set its Ether Type to the same value as
the Active units Ether Type. Possible values are: 0x88a8, 0x8100,
0x9100, and 0x9200.
8 Configure the Standby IDU to the same Management Type as the Active
IDU (Out-of-Band or In-Band). If you use In-Band management, configure a
management VLAN ID. Refer to Configuring Unit Management on page 84.
9 For the Standby IDU, set Protection Admin to: 1+1 HSB. At this point,
both IDUs should start communicating, and transmitting their local MAC
address and IP address to each other.
10 To verify communication between the two IDUs, check both IDUs to ensure
that there is no Mate Communication Failure alarm. If this alarm is active
on either IDU, installation of 1+1 HSB Protection has failed. Disconnect the
management cable from the new Standby unit.
11 Use a Y Ethernet splitter cable or the Protection Panel to connect both
units management interfaces.
12 Verify that the new Standby IDU is set to Standby mode.
13 Connect all traffic, RFU, and WSC cables to the new Standby IDU.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 240 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

14 Check if there is a Configuration Mismatch alarm on either IDU. This alarm

indicates that the IDUs do not have an identical configuration. To remedy
this:
i

Enter a Copy to Mate command on the Active IDU. This copies the
configuration of the Active IDU to the Standby IDU.
ii Perform a Cold Reset on the Standby IDU. When the Standby IDU
comes back online, its configuration should be identical to that of the
Active IDU, and the Configuration Mismatch alarm should be cleared on
both IDUs.
15 Verify that there are no alarms on either IDU.
16 For the Active IDU, set Protection Lockout to: Off.

14.2.4 Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New Nodal System

For a 1+1 configuration, in a nodal system, the IDUs are connected by the
backplane of the nodal enclosure.
Perform the following preliminary steps:
Check the serial/part numbers section on the Configuration > General >
Unit parameters page to verify that all the IDUs are using the same
hardware versions.
Check the software versions in the Versions table on the Configuration >
General > Versions > IDU page to verify that all the IDUs are using the
same software versions.
Check the license compatibility in the License features section on the
Configuration > General > Licensing page to verify that all the IDUs are
using the same license.
Check the IP Addresses Local IP configuration section on the Configuration
> General > Management page to verify that each IDU has a unique IP
Address and that all addresses are within the same subnet.
Check the Type field in the Management Ports section on the
Configuration > General > Management page to verify that each IDU has
the same Management mode (In band or OOB).
For In-Band management, ensure that all IDUs have the same In-Band
VID.
To configure the protection:
1 Disconnect all cables (radio, traffic, wayside, and protection), except for
the Management cable, from the units.
2 Turn on the Active IDU.
3 Connect a management cable to the management interface of the Active
IDU, or configure the IDU via a terminal.
4 Perform the following configuration steps on the Active IDU:
i

Page 241 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

iv Configure the Ethernet Application Type to set the Switching mode.

Possible values are Smart Pipe, Managed Switch, and Metro Switch.
Refer to Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode on page 97.
v Configure the required Management Type (Out-of-Band or In-Band). If
In-Band management is used, configure a management VLAN ID. Refer
to Configuring Unit Management on page 84.
5 For the Active IDU, set Protection Admin to: 1+1 HSB. At this point,
management might be lost for approximately 50 seconds.
6 For the Active IDU, set Protection Lockout to: On.
Note:

Do not insert the Standby unit into its slot or turn its power
on at this point.

7 Connect a management cable to the management interface of the Standby

IDU.
8 Perform the following configuration steps on the Standby IDU:
i

For the Standby IDU, set Protection Admin to: 1+1 HSB.
Turn off the power of the Standby IDU.
Insert the Standby IDU into its slot in the nodal enclosure.
Turn the power of the Standby IDU on. At this point, both IDUs should start
communicating, and transmitting their local MAC address and IP address
to each other.
13 To verify communication between the two IDUs, check both IDUs to ensure
that there is no Mate Communication Failure alarm. If this alarm is active
on either IDU, installation of 1+1 HSB Protection has failed.
14 The management cable can be disconnected from the Standby IDU. Use a Y
splitter cable or the Protection Panel to connect both units management
interfaces.
15 Check if there is a Configuration Mismatch alarm on either IDU. This alarm
indicates that the IDUs do not have an identical configuration. To remedy
this:
i

Enter a Copy to Mate command on the Active IDU. This copies the
configuration of the Active IDU to the Standby IDU.
ii Perform a Cold Reset on the Standby IDU. When the Standby IDU
comes back online, its configuration should be identical to that of the
Active IDU, and the Configuration Mismatch alarm should be cleared on
both IDUs.
16 Connect all traffic, radio, and wayside cables to both units via the
Protection Panel, or via splitters.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 242 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

17 Set the Ethernet and E1/DS1 interfaces to Enable.

18 Perform an additional Copy-to-Mate operation to ensure that both IDUs
remain synchronized:
i

Enter a Copy to Mate command on the Active IDU. This copies the
configuration of the Active IDU to the Standby IDU.
ii Perform a Cold Reset on the Standby IDU. When the Standby IDU
comes back online, its configuration should be identical to that of the
Active IDU, and the Configuration Mismatch alarm should be cleared on
both IDUs.
19 For the Active IDU, set Protection Lockout to: Off.
20 Verify that there are no alarms on either IDU.
21 Verify that the IDU connected to the RFU fed by the lower attenuation
channel of the RF coupler is in Active mode. If this IDU is in Standby mode,
enter a Manual switch command.
Note:

The same procedure should be performed on the remote

end, while installing the radio.

14.2.5 Replacing the Standby Unit in a 1+1 HSB Nodal System

1 On the Active IDU, set Protection Lockout to: On.
2 Power down the Standby unit (the unit that needs to be replaced).
Note:

Make sure not to power-down or otherwise re-configure the

Active unit to ensure that live traffic is not interrupted.

3 Disconnect all cables from stand-by unit, including management, Ethernet

and radio cables.
4 Remove the Standby IDU.
5 Turn on the power on the new Standby IDU, but do not insert it into the
nodal enclosure at this point.
6 Connect only the Management cable and/or serial COM (craft terminal) to
the new Standby IDU.
Note:

It is important to connect a separate management cable to

the Standby IDU, rather than managing it via the Protection
Panel or a Y splitter. Radio and other line interfaces should
not be connected at this stage. Set the IP address and Subnet
address of the new Standby IDU using the CLI or the Web
EMS.

7 Perform the following configuration steps on the Standby IDU:

Install the license (if necessary). Refer to Loading a New License Key on
page 77.
ii Upgrade the software version of the Standby IDU to the same version
used in the Active IDU. Refer to Upgrading the IDU Software Version on
page 62.
iii Configure the Ethernet Application Type to the same Switching mode
as the Active IDU. Possible values are Smart Pipe, Managed Switch,
and Metro Switch. Refer to Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode
on page 97.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 243 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

iv Configure the Standby IDU to the same Management Type as the Active
IDU (Out-of-Band or In-Band). If In-Band management is used,
configure a management VLAN ID. Refer to Configuring Unit
Management on page 84.
v For the Standby IDU, set Protection Admin to: 1+1 HSB.
8 Turn off the power of the new Standby IDU.
9 Insert the Standby IDU into its slot in the nodal enclosure.
10 Turn the power of the Standby IDU on. At this point, both IDUs should start
communicating, transmitting their local MAC address and IP address to
each other.
11 To verify communication between the two IDUs, check both IDUs to ensure
that there is no Mate Communication Failure alarm. If this alarm is active
on either IDU, installation of 1+1 HSB Protection has failed.
12 The management cable can be disconnected from the Standby unit. Use a Y
splitter cable or the Protection Panel to connect both units management
interfaces.
13 Verify that new Standby IDU is set to Standby mode.
14 Connect all traffic, radio, and WSC cables to the new Standby IDU.
15 Check if there is a Configuration Mismatch alarm on either IDU. This alarm
indicates that the IDUs do not have an identical configuration. To remedy
this:
i

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 244 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

14.3

User Guide

Configuring a 2+0 System

This section includes:

2+0 Overview
Configuring 2+0 Protection

Incompatible features

1+1 HSB
2+2 HSB
Space and frequency diversity

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 245 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

14.3.1 2+0 Overview

You can set up an IP-10G or IP-10E system in a 2+0 configuration. You can use
the XPIC, Multi-Radio, or both in a 2+0 configuration.
In a 2+0 configuration, each RFU is connected to an IDU via the IDUs RFU
interface.
While a standard 2+0 Multi-Radio configuration protects against radio
malfunction or failure, a 2+0 Multi-Radio configuration with line protection
adds protection for the line interfaces, guaranteeing that there will be no
single points of failure.
Multi-Radio with line protection is only available for adjacent pairs of IDUs in
a nodal enclosure (slots 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6).
Selecting 2+0 HSB automatically configures Multi-Radio for the selected pair
of units. The active unit is the IDU that currently holds the line interfaces. This
unit will be the Multi-Radio master unit.
2+0 HSB radio blocking criteria consists of:

Minimum ACM point and enable/disable

Radio Excessive BER enable/disable

Radio Signal degrade enable/disable

Block/unblock traffic from radio link

2+0 HSB automatic state propagation criteria consists of:

Radio LOF
Excessive BER

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 246 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

14.3.2 Configuring 2+0 Protection

1 Select Configuration > Protection >Protection Parameters. The
Protection Parameters page is displayed.

2. In the Protection configuration section:

i In the Protection admin field, select 2+0 HSB.
ii If no mate is associated with the unit, the Protection mode field will
be read-only, and the mode will be set to Active.
3. Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 247 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

14.4

User Guide

Configuring 2+2 HSB

This section includes

2+2 Overview
Deploying a 2+2 Configuration
Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection
XPIC and 2+2 Protection
Replacing Units in a 2+2 Configuration

This feature requires:

Nodal configuration

This feature cannot be used with:

2+0 Multi-Radio with line protection

Space and Frequency Diversity

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 248 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

14.4.1 2+2 Overview

2+2 HSB protection provides full redundancy between two pairs of IDUs. Each
pair is a 2+0 link, which can be configured for XPIC or in different frequencies.
If there is a failure in one of these pairs, the other pair takes over.
A 2+2 protection scheme must be implemented by means of a nodal
configuration. Each pair is inserted into its own main nodal enclosure, with a
protection cable to connect the main IDUs (in slot 1) in each pair. Protection is
performed between the pairs. At any given time, one pair is active and the
other is on standby. The Active IDUs transmit to the line and radio, and the
standby outputs of the IDUs are set to mute.
A 2+2 configuration scheme is only possible between units in a main nodal
enclosure (slots 1 and 2). Extension nodal enclosures (slots 3 6) are not
supported in a 2+2 configuration.
In a 2+2 configuration, the lower IDU in each pair is a master unit, and does
the following:
Sends and receives traffic to and from the user through line interfaces.
Receives protection information from the slave unit in the pair.

Sends and receives protection information to and from a second master

unit. At any one time, one master unit is the decision unit, and the other is
the report unit.

In a 2+2 configuration, the upper IDU in each pair is a slave unit, and does the
following:
Sends and receives traffic through line interfaces.
Sends protection information to the master unit in the pair.

Slave units always behave as report units. In other words, they are told by
the master unit whether to be in active or standby mode.

2+2 operation is similar to 1+1, as follows:

Locking, forcing protection is done from master units only
Copy-to-Mate operations are available separately in master units and slave
units.
The same criteria (interfaces LOS, LOC, LOF) are monitored and compared
between active and standby units, with the comparison carried out by
master units.
All enabled interfaces of all four IDUs are monitored.
A missing slave unit is interpreted as LOS in its interfaces. A missing
master causes a No Mate condition.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 249 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

14.4.2 Deploying a 2+2 Configuration

In order to deploy a 2+2 configuration, insert the two IDU pairs into separate
main nodal enclosures, and connect a protection (RJ-45) cable between the
lower IDUs (slot #1) using the protection connector on the front panel. Fast
Ethernet, TDM, and optical SFPs must be split between both lower units and
between both upper units.
There are three configuration options: protection disabled, 1+1 protection,
and 2+2 protection. The configuration is separate in each of the four IDUs, and
you must configure 2+2 in all four IDUs.
In a 2+2 configuration, a protection cable must be connected between the two
nodes via the Protection interface (RJ45).

All four IDUs in a 2+2 configuration must be the same hardware type (part
number) and must be configured to 2+2 protection mode. In addition, both
master IDUs need to comply with the following requirements (as in a 1+1
configuration):
Same Ethernet switch application (Smart Pipe, Managed Switch, or Metro
Switch).

Same management type (In-Band or Out-of-Band).

Same In-Band VLAN. This VLAN may not be used for traffic.
Different IP addresses within the same subnet.

2+2 external protection can work with or without XPIC, and with or without
Multi-Radio. In particular, in this case, all four IDUs must be configured with
the same script. Note that changing the script and radio frequencies in the
lower IDU will be copied automatically to the upper IDU.
Note:

If you are switching from 1+1 to 2+2 configuration, you

must first set Protection admin to Disable.

For additional information:

Configuring Multi-Radio
Configuring XPIC

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 250 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

14.4.3 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection

1 Select Configuration > Protection > Protection Parameters. The
Protection Parameters page opens.

2. In the Protection configuration section:

i In the Protection admin field, select 2+2 HSB.
ii If no mate is associated with the unit, the Protection mode field will
be read-only, and the mode will be set to Active.
3. Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 251 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

14.4.4 XPIC and 2+2 Protection

XPIC Recovery Mechanism

The XPIC recovery mechanism is disabled in a 2+2 HSB configuration. The

reason for this is that in case of a failure in a link, the system must switch to
the standby pair instead of attempting to recover the link, as in 2+0 XPIC.
Additionally, in order to assure that the conditions for XPIC exist (in
particular, having the same radio script and frequencies), the following
mechanisms are active in a 2+2 XPIC configuration:
The following parameters can be changed only in the master units. The
changes are implemented in the corresponding slave units automatically:
Radio script
Radio TX frequency
Radio RX frequency
If the change failed to be implemented in the slave unit for any reason, the
change in the master unit is rolled back, and an error message is displayed.

For addition information:

Configuring XPIC
Specifying Active and Standby Mode
Configuring Switchover Criteria

Configuring IP Addresses

specific types of alarms.
i

Radio excessive BER Select Enable to initiate a switchover when a

radio excessive BER alarm is raised. This option is only displayed when
the MRMC script is regular or ACM is running in Fixed mode.
ii External alarm #1 Select Enable to initiate a switchover when
external alarm #1 is raised.
Note:

Since multi-radio protects against radio channel failure by

blocking the defective radio, in 2+0 HSB, radio failure or
excessive BER will not cause a protection switchover.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 255 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

14.7

User Guide

Viewing Mate Parameters

The Protection parameters page displays the mate units IP and MAC
addresses, and provides a link to open the mate unit management system.
To specify the mate unit:
1 Select Configuration > Protection > Protection Parameters.

In the Mate Parameters section:

Mate IP address - Indicates the IP address of the mate unit.

Mate MAC address - Indicates the MAC address of the mate unit.

To open the mate units management system:

1 Click Open mate.
To copy the main units configuration settings to the mate unit:
1 Select Configuration > Protection > Protection Parameters.
2 Click Copy to Mate.
In the Protection Commands section:
Copy to mate status - Indicates the status of the Copy to Mate command.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 256 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

14.8

User Guide

Configuring Multi-Unit LAG

Multi Unit LAG provides Ethernet line protection for the Gigabit Ethernet
(GbE) electrical and optical interfaces.
An external switch is connected to the HSB protected IP-10 link by means of
two static Link Aggregation (LAG) ports. The external switch can be another
IP-10 IDU or any third party equipment that supports static LAG protocol.
Multi-Unit LAG is supported with any of the following protection features:
1+1 HSB
1+1 Space or Frequency Diversity
2+2 HSB
2+0 Multi Radio with Line Protection
The following are some important Multi-Unit LAG configuration notes:

Multi-Unit LAG is only supported in Smart Pipe mode.

Multi-Unit LAG is supported in both standalone and nodal configurations.
Multi-Unit LAG supports both electrical and optical interfaces.

In Multi-Unit LAG, an external switch is connected to the protected IP-10 link

by means of two static Link Aggregation (LAG) ports. The external switch can
be another IP-10G or IP-10E IDU or any third party equipment that supports
static LAG protocol.
Ethernet port 1

Ethernet port 2
(mirroring)

active

External
switch

standby

LAG

Ethernet port 1

Ethernet port 2
(mirroring)

The first LAG port of the external switch is connected to Ethernet port 1 of the
active IP-10G/E unit and the second LAG port is connected to Ethernet port 1
of the standby IP-10G/E unit.
In the 2+0 uplink direction (toward the radio), the external switch splits the
packets between the two LAG interfaces, which are connected to the primary
and the secondary IP-10G/E units. Ethernet packets received from the LAG
interface in the active IP-10G/E unit are sent to the radio.
To configure Multi-Unit LAG:
1 Enable protection. Each of the IP-10G/E protection features can work with
Multi-Unit LAG.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 257 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

2 Enable static LAG on the External switch.

3 Connect the External switch LAG interfaces to port 1 of the active and
standby IP-10 units respectively.
4 Connect Ethernet port 2 of the active IP-10G/E unit to the Ethernet port 2
of the standby IP-10 unit.
5 Select Configuration > Protection> Multi-Unit LAG to open the MultiUnit LAG page.
6 In the Multi-Unit LAG admin section select Enable and click Apply to
Enable Multi-Unit LAG in the active IP-10 unit. Upon enabling, each IDU
will perform the following configurations automatically in both active and
standby units:
Enable port 2.
Set a LAG on port 1 and port 2.
Enable mirroring.

7 Upon disabling Multi-Unit LAG, the configuration implemented in Step 6

will be disabled automatically.
In 2+2 HSB configuration, Multi-Unit LAG can be activated between slot 1 of
the active nodal enclosure and slot 1 of the standby nodal enclosure and/or
between slot 2 of the active nodal enclosure and slot 2 of the standby nodal
enclosure, respectively.
Note:

To improve protection switchover delays, it is

recommended to disable auto-negotiation and automatic
state propagation on all of the interfaces.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 258 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

15.

User Guide

Configuring Diversity
This chapter includes

Diversity Overview
Configuring 1+1 Space Diversity
Configuring 1+1 Frequency Diversity (BBS)
Configuring IF Combining Diversity

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 259 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

15.1

User Guide

Diversity Overview
Space Diversity and Frequency Diversity are common methods to negate the
effects of fading caused by multipath phenomena.
Space Diversity is implemented by placing two separate antennas at a distance
from one another that makes it statistically likely that if one antenna suffers
from fading caused by signal reflection, the other antenna will continue to
receive a viable signal.
Frequency Diversity is implemented by configuring two RFUs to separate
frequencies. The IDU selects and transmits the better signal.
IP-10G and IP-10E offer Frequency Diversity and two methods of Space
Diversity:

Baseband Switching (BBS) Frequency and Space Diversity Each IDU

receives a separate signal from a separate antenna. Each IDU compares
each of the received signals, and enables the bitstream coming from the
receiver with the best signal. Switchover is errorless (hitless switching).
IF Combining (IFC) Space Diversity Signals from two separate
antennas are combined in phase with each other to maximize the signal to
noise ratio. IF Combining is performed in the RFU.

Note:

Frequency and Space Diversity configurations offer the

option of Ethernet line protection using Multi-Unit LAG.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 260 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

15.2

User Guide

Configuring 1+1 Space Diversity (BBS)

This feature requires:

Two antennas
Two RFUs
1+1 HSB configuration
Nodal configuration

This feature cannot be used with the following:

ACM
Multi-Radio
2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and Line Protection

BBS Space Diversity requires a 1+1 configuration in which there are two IDUs
and two RFUs protecting each other at both ends of the link. In the event of
IDU failure, Space Diversity is lost until recovery, but the system remains
protected through the ordinary switchover mechanism.
For BBS Space Diversity, the antennas must be separated by approximately 10
to 20 meters. In addition, 1+1 Protection must be enabled.
To configure 1+1 Space Diversity:
1 Select Configuration > Protection > Radio Diversity. The Radio Diversity
page opens.

2 In the Radio Diversity section, in the Radio diversity type field, select
Space diversity.
3 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 261 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

15.3

User Guide

Configuring 1+1 Frequency Diversity (BBS)

This feature requires:

Two antennas
Two RFUs
1+1 HSB configuration
Nodal configuration

This feature cannot be used with the following:

ACM
Multi-Radio
2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and Line Protection

BBS Frequency Diversity requires a 1+1 configuration in which there are two
IDUs and two RFUs protecting each other at both ends of the link. In the event
of IDU failure, Frequency Diversity is lost until recovery, but the system
remains protected through the ordinary switchover mechanism.
In frequency diversity, ATPC and Green mode can be enabled on each RFU
independently. You can enable and disable ATPC and Green mode, and can set
thresholds on each IDU independently. Since radio channel fading may have a
different impact on each frequency, it is recommended to allocate different
fade margins for each frequency.
For BBS Frequency Diversity, 1+1 Protection must be enabled.
To configure 1+1 Frequency Diversity:
1 Select Configuration > Protection >Radio Diversity. The Radio Diversity
page opens.

2 In the Radio Diversity section in the Radio diversity type field, select
Frequency diversity.
3 Click Apply.
Configurable options after enabling frequency diversity:
Frequency diversity enabled/disabled (to be operational, 1+1 HSB must be
enabled as well)
Revertive mode enable/disable

Primary radio for revertive switches

Revertive timer

Switching commands
Force to radio
Manual switch
Clear switch counter command

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 262 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

15.4

User Guide

Configuring IF Combining Diversity

This feature requires:

Dual-receiver RFU (FibeAir 1500HP)

The RFU receives and processes both signals, and combines them into a single,
optimized signal. The IFC mechanism gains up to 2.5 dB in system gain.
Note:

1500 HP (11 GHz) 40 MHz bandwidth does not support IF

Combining. For this frequency, space diversity is only
available via BBS.

1+0 (IFC - IF combining) is a feature for configurations that use a single RFUHP with two antennas, two Rx ports and a single IDU. The selected signal line
output is based upon the Rx signal at the RFU. 1500 HP (11 GHz) 40 MHz
bandwidth does not support IF Combining.
When enabled, IF Combining parameters are located at the bottom of the
Radio Parameters window.
To configure IF Combining diversity:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio parameters.
2 In the Configuration parameters section, select Enable or Disable from
the Radio IF interface drop down list.
Note:

Changing the Radio IF interface requires a system reset.

The Radio IF operational status field displays the current status of the radio
interface.
3 In the RFU mode field in the IF Combining Parameters section, select
Combined.

4 In the RFU mode field select Main, Diversity, or Combined.

Main - Only the main antenna signal is selected.
Diversity - Only the diversity antenna signal is selected.
Combined - The best signal from both antennas is selected.
Note:

To use Combined mode, you must perform delay calibration.

5 Select which antenna is the source for the external connector.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 263 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

6 In the RSL connector source field, select either Main or Diversity.

Main - The main antenna is selected.
Diversity - The diversity antenna is selected.
7 For Manual delay calibration, in the Delay calibration field, enter the
number of nanoseconds to delay between the main and diversity signals.
Note:

Manual delay is used only for Combined mode.

8 For Automatic delay calibration, click Calibrate. The system automatically

calibrates the required delay between the signals from the main and
diversity antennas. The Automatic delay calibration field displays the
system status of the Automatic Delay Calibration feature.
Success Indicates that the system has successfully calibrated the
signal delay
Failure Indicates that the system cannot automatically calibrate the
signal delay.
No action Indicates that the system has not performed an automatic
delay calibration.
Note:

Automatic delay calibration can only be performed when

the system is error-free and there are no negative weather
conditions.

The following are read-only fields:

Rx level diversity Indicates the Rx level of the diversity antenna.
Rx level combined Indicates the Rx level of the combined signals.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 264 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

16.

User Guide

Configuring Multi-Radio
This chapter includes

Configuring 2+0 Multi-Radio

Configuring 2+0 Multi-Radio with Line Protection

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 265 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

16.1

User Guide

Configuring 2+0 Multi-Radio

This feature requires:

Nodal configuration

This feature cannot be used with:

1+1 HSB
BBS Space Diversity
BBS Frequency Diversity

Multi-Radio enables two separate radio links to be shared by a single Ethernet

port. Multi-Radio can be used in 2+0 and 2+2 configurations. In a 2+0 MultiRadio configuration, the IDUs perform in master and slave mode in which each
Multi-Radio channel can carry up to 500 Mbps, resulting in a total 1 Gbps
capacity.
Because the Multi Radio interface uses the nodal backplane, a nodal
configuration is required for Multi Radio. Like XPIC, IDUs in Multi-Radio mode
can be placed inside a main node or extension node in any of the following
slots: 1 and 2 (main node), 3 and 4 (extension node), and 5 and 6 (second
extension node). Slot 1 is the bottom slot in the main node.
Ethernet traffic should be connected only to the lower IDU in a Multi-Radio
couple (slots 1, 3, or 5). TDM traffic can be connected to either slot.
Multi-Radio feature is applicable for Ethernet data only. For TDM, each link
remains separate, and users can decide to configure trails to either radio (or
both, by using SNCP or ABR).
Multi Radio can operate with both XPIC and ACM, and with any switching
mode such as Smart Pipe, Managed Switch, and Metro Switch.
Multi Radio requires that every IDU in the system be configured with Multi
Radio Enabled. Each unit must also use the same script and the same
hardware version.
Multi-Radio configuration options are only displayed after Multi-Radio is
enabled.
To enable or disable Multi-Radio:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Parameters.

2 In the Multi radio section, in the Multi Radio admin field, select Enable,
or Disable.
3 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 266 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

16.1.1 Multi Radio Traffic Blocking

Since traffic is distributed between both carriers at layer 1 level, a failure in
one of the radio links may cause all Ethernet frames to be affected. Therefore,
Multi-Radio take steps to ensure graceful degradation in the case of a failure.
You can configure a link to be blocked, so that the transmitter does not
distribute data to this link and the receiver ignores it when combining. By
default, blocking is disabled.
To enable traffic blocking:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Parameters.

2 To enable the traffic blocking for either slot#1 or slot#2, in the Multi-Radio
section, select On for the corresponding slot field. All traffic is then sent to
the radio interface in the other slot.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 267 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

16.1.2 Setting Multi-Radio Thresholds

You can configure Multi-Radio to shut down links when they drop below
configured thresholds.
To configure Multi-Radio thresholds:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio parameters.

2 To enable or disable shutting down the link if it drops below the signal
degrade threshold, in the Multi radio section in the Signal degrade admin
field, select Enable or Disable.
3 To enable or disable shutting down the link if it drops below the Excessive
BER threshold, in the Excessive ber admin field, select Enable or Disable
4 Click Apply to save your settings.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 268 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

16.2

User Guide

Configuring 2+0 Multi-Radio with Line Protection

This feature requires:

Nodal configuration

This feature cannot be used with:

1+1 HSB
BBS Space Diversity
BBS Frequency Diversity

Another Multi-Radio option is 2+0 with Line Protection. 2+0 Multi-Radio with
line protection supplies additional protection for the line interfaces,
guaranteeing no single point of failure. In case of failure of any line interface, a
protection switch is initiated.
Note:

2+0 Multi-Radio with Line Protection cannot be used with

other protection configurations (1+1 HSB and 2+2 HSB).

In the case of Multi-Radio 2+0 with line protection every IDU in the system
must be configured with 2+0 with line protection enabled. As with ordinary
Multi-Radio, each unit must use the same script and the same hardware
version.
To configure 2+ 0 Multi-Radio with Line Protection:
1 Select Configuration > Protection >Protection Parameters. The
Protection Parameters page is displayed.

2 In the Protection admin field, select 2+0 with line protection.

3 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 269 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

17.

User Guide

Configuring XPIC
This chapter includes

Conditions for XPIC

Configuring the Antenna and RFU for XPIC
Displaying XPI Values

This feature requires:

2+0 or 2+2 HSB configuration

Nodal configuration

XPIC and 2+2 Protection

XPIC Recovery Mechanism

Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) is a feature that enables two

radio carriers to use the same frequency with a polarity separation between
them. Since they will never be completely orthogonal, some signal cancelation
is required.
In addition, XPIC includes an automatic recovery mechanism that ensures that
if one carrier fails, or a false signal is received, the mate carrier will not be
affected. This mechanism also assures that when the failure is cleared, both
carriers will be operational.
XPIC can be used in a 2+0 or 2+2 configuration. XPIC can be, but does not have
to be, used in conjunction with Multi-Radio.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 270 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

17.1

User Guide

Conditions for XPIC

XPIC is achieved using two IDUs inserted in a main nodal enclosure. One IDU is
used for the horizontal polarization and the other is used for the vertical
polarization.
XPIC IDUs can be placed inside a main node or extension node in any of the
following slots: 1 and 2 (main node), 3 and 4 (extension node), and 5 and 6
(second extension node). Slot 1 is the bottom slot in the main node. The data
of each polarization is marked by a different value, so the modem cannot lock
on the signal of the mate polarization.
When installing an XPIC system, each IDU and each RFU must be the same
hardware type. In addition, each IDU on both sides of the link must be set to
the same frequency. An appropriate alarm is raised if these requirements are
not met.
In order to activate XPIC, an XPIC script should be selected during initial
configuration. The same script must be used in all the IDUs on both sides of
the link.
After changing a script, the IDU must be reset.

17.2

Configuring the Antenna and RFU for XPIC

1 Install the dual polarization antenna and point it in the direction of the
other site.
2 Following alignment, verify that the link achieves its required RSL.
3 The antenna feeders may also need to be aligned (slight rotations) in order
to achieve the highest XPI (in absolute value) during installation, and no
less than 25dB. Refer to Displaying XPI Values on page 272.
4 Install the two RFUs on a dual polarization antenna using the appropriate
mounting kit, and mark the RFUs as V. and H. respectively.

17.2.1 IDU-RFU Cable Installation

1 Install two cables between the RFUs and the IDU. Note that the cable
length difference should not exceed 10 meters.
2 Mark the cables with V. and H. respectively and connect them respectively
to the IDU and RFU.
3 It is recommended to connect IP-10G/E units in the lower slots of a pair
(slots 1, 3, and 5) to the RFUs with vertical polarization, and the IP-10G/E
units in the upper slots of a pair (slots 2,4, and 6) to the RFUs with
horizontal polarization.

17.2.2 Antenna Alignment

1 Power up the lower IDU (V) on both ends of the link and configure it to the
desired frequency channel, and using the XPIC script with the maximum
power.
2 Align the antennas, one at a time, until the expected RSL is achieved. Make
sure the RSL achieved is no more than +/-2 dB from the expected level.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 271 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

17.2.3 Polarization Alignment

Polarization alignment is required to verify that the antenna feeds are
adjusted, ensuring that the antenna XPD (Cross Polarization Discrimination) is
achieved.
Polarization adjustment should only be performed on one antenna.
1 Disconnect the V cable from the V RFU and connect it to the H RFU.
2 Check the RSL achieved in the H RFU and compare it to the RSL achieved
by the V RFU.
3 Verify that the XPI (Cross Polarization Interference) is at least 25dB
where:

XPI RSL POL RSL XPOL

RSL POL Link RSL with the same polarization used at both sites.
RSL XPOL Link RSL with orthogonal polarizations used at both sites.
4 If the XPI is less than 25dB, adjust the feed polarization by opening the
polarization screw and gently rotating the feed to minimize the RSLXPOL.
Note:

17.3

Polarization alignment is not always possible since the

RSLXPOL might fall below the sensitivity threshold of the
RFU.

Displaying XPI Values

The current XPI value can be displayed in the Web EMS and the CLI (the value
is valid only when the modem is locked on a signal).

Using CLI, enter the command xpi.

Using Web-Based Management:

To view the current XPI value, select Configuration > Radio > Radio
Parameters from the menu bar on the left side of the main
management page.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 272 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Note:

User Guide

The XPI level field only appears if the IDU is using an XPIC
script.
To view XPI performance for intervals of 15 minutes or daily, select PM
& Counters > Radio > XPI from the menu bar on the left side of the
main management page. The XPI PM Report is displayed.
XPI PM Report

Note:

In clear sky conditions, a normal XPI level is between 25

and 30dB.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 273 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

18.

User Guide

Configuring TDM Trails

This chapter includes:

TDM Trails Overview

Viewing the Trails List
Adding New Trails
Activating and Reserving Trails
Deleting Trails
Configuring SNCP and ABR Trail Protection
Configuring AIS Detection and Signaling

Note:

This section is not relevant for the IP-10E.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 274 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

18.1

User Guide

TDM Trails Overview

IP-10G provides the capability for the user to map any pair of interfaces in
order to created TDM trails. Interfaces may be the following:
E1/DS1 line ports: Ports 1-16 are available in the lower SCSI connector;
ports 17-32 are available in the upper one (if a T-card is installed in the IP10G).
VC-11/12 in STM-1 line port: Available as a T-card.
Radio VCs: Each radio in the system has designated channels each of
which can carry a duplex TDM signal. These channels are called VCs and in
addition to the TDM signal they carry extra data used for monitoring.
Note:

Radio VCs are proprietary and do not conform to SDH VCs.

They are terminated at line interfaces.

After a trail is created:

TDM traffic (E1/DS1) is exchanged between the two interfaces.
Line interfaces are enabled (if no trails are assigned to them, they are
disabled).
The trail is monitored in order to raise indications and measure PMs.
The switching fabric is located in the main unit. Therefore, a failure in this unit
will cause all TDM traffic to fail unless the main unit is protected.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 275 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

18.2

User Guide

Viewing the Trails List

To view the trails list:
1 Select Configuration > Trails > TDM Trails.

In the TDM Trails List table:

ID Indicates the trail ID.

Description Indicates the trail description.

Interface #1 and Interface #2 Indicate the trail end points.

Alarms status Indicates the severity of the trails most severe alarm.
ACM priority - Indicates the priority for which trails will be dropped first
from radio links when bandwidth is reduced.
Operational status - Indicates whether the selected trail is Operational or
Reserved.

Protected Indicates if the trail is protected.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 276 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

18.3

18.4

User Guide

Activating and Reserving Trails

To set the operational status of selected trails:
1 Select Configuration > Trails > TDM Trails.

2 In the Activate and Reserve Trails section select Operational or Reserved

from the Status drop down list.
3 Click Set Selected.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 280 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

18.5

User Guide

Deleting Trails
To delete selected trails:
1 Select Configuration > Trails > TDM Trails.

2 In the TDM Trails List table:

i Select the trails that you want to delete.
ii Mark the checkbox corresponding to each trail that you wish to include
in the delete operation.
iii Click Delete Selected below the trail list.
To delete all trails:
1 Select Configuration > Trails > TDM Trails.
2 Click Delete All below the trail list.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 281 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

18.6

User Guide

Configuring SNCP and ABR Trail Protection

Path-protected trails are a special case of TDM trails, in which three interfaces
are configured in order to protect traffic from any failure along its end-to-end
path.
SNCP trails differ from unprotected trails in the roles of their interfaces:
Interface 1: The end-point interface. Outgoing traffic is split between
interfaces 2 and 3.
Interface 2: The primary interface; it will be initially active.
Interface 3: The secondary interface; it will be initially standby.
Traffic will switch from the currently active interface to the standby interface
in the following cases:

Signal failure

Note:

When line interfaces (STM-1) are used along a TDM trail

path, AIS detection must be enabled for SNCP to work
properly.

User command to force traffic to the standby interface

Note:

Forcing traffic will cause the selected interface to become

active (even if its signal fails) until the user cancels this
setting (revertive mode is not supported at this stage).

To configure switch timeout for revertive protected trails

1 Select Configuration > Trails > TDM Trails.

2 In the Switch timeout for revertive protected trails section, In the Trails
revertive switch timeout field, specify the number of seconds.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 282 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

18.7

User Guide

Configuring AIS Detection and Signaling

If enabled, a signal failure is generated at the corresponding trail, which will
prevent the far end from receiving a signal (including trail ID indications). The
trail status displays a Signal Failure message. In addition, an indication is sent
to the relevant interface.
This is not a system alarm, since the problem originates elsewhere in the
network.
To enable /disable AIS line detection:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > AIS.

2 In the AIS line detection admin section, select Enable or Disable.

3 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 283 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

19.

User Guide

Configuring Synchronization
This chapter includes:

Synchronization Overview
Configuring the Synchronization Source
Configuring the Outgoing Signal Clock
Configuring PRC Regenerator Mode and Direction

Note:

IP-10E does not support E1/DS1, STM-1/OC-3, and

pseudowire, so all references to these types of lines in this
chapter are only relevant to IP-10G.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 284 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

19.1

User Guide

Synchronization Overview
Frequency signals can be taken by the system from a number of different
interfaces (one reference at a time). The reference frequency may also be
conveyed to external equipment through different interfaces.
The available interfaces for frequency distribution depend on the hardware
assembly, as summarized in the following table:

Hardware type

Available interfaces as frequency

input (reference sync source)

Available interfaces as frequency

output

IP-10G R2

TDM trails

E1/DS1 interfaces

STM-1/OC-3 signal

STM-1/OC-3 VC-11/12s

Radio channels

Gigabit Ethernet interfaces

PW clock port

Incoming PW signal

Reference clock for PW signals

TDM trails

E1/DS1 interfaces

STM-1/OC-3 signal

STM-1/OC-3 VC-11/12s

Radio channels

Gigabit Ethernet interfaces

PW clock port

Reference clock for PW signals

Incoming PW signal

Radio channels

Gigabit Ethernet interfaces

IP-10G R3

IP-10E R3

When using a radio channel to distribute a frequency, 2Mbps of bandwidth is

used for this purpose. However the following facts mitigate the loss of
bandwidth:

When using TDM trails as a synchronization source (co-located mode), no

additional bandwidth is taken (the 2Mbps is already used by the trail).

When distributing through a network, a single channel per radio link is

necessary to synchronize all the nodes in the network, regardless of their
number.

It is possible to configure up to eight synchronization sources in the system. At

any given moment, only one of these sources is active; the clock is taken from
the active source onto all other appropriately configured interfaces.
Note:

At this point there is support for loops and for quality

indicators (SSM) in the radio interfaces only.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 285 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

19.2

User Guide

Configuring the Synchronization Source

To configure a synchronization source:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Synchronization > Sync Source. The
Synchronization page opens.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 286 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

2 Select an interface from the displayed IDU to specify the synchronization

source. A drop-down list appears to the left of the IDU representation, and
the relevant fields beneath the IDU representation are automatically
populated.
3 In the drop down list to the left of the IDU representation, select the exact
synchronization source. For example, if you select a pseudowire interface,
you can select from PW reference clock or any of the E1 pseudowire
ports, as shown in the following figure.

4 Select a priority level for the selected synchronization source from the
Sync source priority drop down list.
Note:

No two interfaces may have the same priority.

5 In the Quality field, apply a quality level to the selected source. This
enables the system to select the source with the highest quality as the
current synchronization source. Options are Automatic, G.811, SSU A,
SSU B, or g813/8262.
6 Click Apply.
7 Optionally, to configure a synchronization source revertive timer, go to the
Sync Parameters section and in the Sync source revertive timer field,
specify the number of seconds before timing out a synchronization source.
8 Click Apply.
At any given moment, only one of these sources is active; the clock is taken
from the active source onto all other appropriately configured interfaces.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 287 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

The following restrictions exist for frequency distribution configuration:

Synchronization source interfaces must not be assigned to a TDM trail,

unless the tdm trail interface is used. In this case, a pre-existing trail
must be configured.
An interface can either be used as a synchronization source or can take its
signal from the system reference, but not both, except for SDH interfaces
which allow local loop timing.
If no interface is configured as a synchronization source, no interfaces may
take its outgoing clock from the reference.
If at least one interface is currently taking its outgoing clock from the
reference, the synchronization source cannot be removed.

The clock taken from a line interface (E1/DS1, SDH, VC-11/12, PW E1,
Ethernet) cannot be conveyed to another line interface in the same IDU.

The clock taken from a radio channel cannot be conveyed to another radio
channel in the same radio.
In each IDU, only one line interface at the main board and only one at the
T-card can take its outgoing clock from the reference clock at any given
time. All other interfaces in the same board must make use of the local
clock.

19.2.1 Viewing Current Synchronization Sources

To view configured synchronization sources:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Synchronization > Sync Source. The
Synchronization page opens.

In the Current Sync Sources table:

# - Indicates the number of the synchronization sources. There can be up

to eight synchronization sources.
Valid Indicates whether the configuration is valid.

Slot Number Indicates the slot number of the synchronization source.

Interface Type Indicates the interface type.

Interface Index Indicates the priority of the synchronization source.

Quality Indicates the synchronization source quality.

Status Indicates the status of the synchronization source.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 288 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

In the Sync Parameters section:

Transmitted SSM value Indicates the SSM value derived from the clock
source.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 289 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

19.3

User Guide

Configuring the Outgoing Signal Clock

The Clock Source window configures the ports that output the clock source.
For each type of interface, you can specify whether the clock source is based
on a received sync source or the local internal IDU source.

19.3.1 Configuring Clock Sources

To configure the clock source:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Synchronization > Clock Source.
The Clock Source page opens.

2 Click an interface in the displayed IDU to configure its clock source.

3 From the Clock source drop down list, specify the clock source for the
selected interface. Options in the Clock source drop down list vary
according to the selected interface:
For radio interfaces, select the radio channel.
For line interfaces, select the port number.
For Ethernet interfaces, select Local for internal, or Sync if the clock
source is received from the sync source.
For STM-1 interfaces, select Internal to use the local clock source, Loop
to sync between the selected interface and the output destination, Sync
to use the sync source as the outgoing clock source value, and STM-1/
OC/3 VC to use one of the VC channels as the clock source value.
For pseudowire interfaces, select one of the E1 ports in the PW T-Card.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 290 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

19.3.2 Viewing Clock Sources

To view configured clock sources:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Synchronization > Clock Source.
The Clock Source page opens.

In the Current configuration table:

Interface Indicates the type of interface.

Configuration Indicates whether the interface is configured for

synchronization input or output.
Clock source Indicates the source of its outgoing signal clock.
None Indicates that a clock source has not been configured for this
interface.
Local clock Causes the interface to generate its signal from a local
oscillator, unrelated to the system reference frequency.
Synchronization reference Causes the interface to generate its
signal from the system reference clock, which is taken from the
synchronization source.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 291 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

19.4

User Guide

Configuring PRC Regenerator Mode and Direction

Regenerator mode is a special mode for reproducing PRC quality reference
clock in SP application. This mode will be available only in SP applications and
will be activated upon user configuration (as in IP10). The reference clock
reproduction will be performed in 2 directions: from the interface to the radio
and from the radio to the interface (as described in the figure below). Both
operations are performed at the same time.
In IP-10 R3 systems operating in Smart Pipe mode, an additional
synchronization mode is available called PRC pipe regenerator mode. In this
mode, frequency is transported between the GbE interfaces through the radio
link.
PRC pipe regenerator mode makes use of the fact that the system is acting as a
simple link (so no distribution mechanism is necessary) in order to achieve
the following:
Improved frequency distribution performance:
PRC quality
No use of bandwidth for frequency distribution
Simplified configuration

19.4.1 Basic Operation

In PRC pipe regenerator mode, frequency is taken from the incoming GbE
Ethernet signal, and used as a reference for the radio frame. On the receiver
side, the radio frame frequency is used as the reference signal for the outgoing
Ethernet PHY.
Frequency distribution behaves in a different way for optical and electrical
GbE interfaces, because of the way these interfaces are implemented:
For optical interface, separate and independent frequencies are
transported in each direction.

For electrical interfaces, each PHY must act either as clock master or as
clock slave in its own link. For this reason, frequency can only be
distributed in one direction, determined by the user.

PRC regenerator mode does not completely override the regular

synchronization distribution, but since it makes use of the Ethernet interfaces,
the following limitations apply:
In PRC regenerator mode, Ethernet interfaces cannot be configured as a
synchronization source for distribution.
In PRC regenerator mode, Ethernet interfaces cannot be configured to take
the system reference clock for their outgoing signal.
Frequency distribution through the radio is independent for each
mechanism and is carried out at a different layer.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 292 of 577

User Guide

Configuring RSTP
This section includes:

Network Resiliency Overview

Setting the xSTP Protocol
Configuring Ring-Optimized RSTP
Configuring Ethernet Ports to Support RSTP
Configuring RSTP Priority

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 295 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

20.1

User Guide

Network Resiliency Overview

IP-10G and IP-10E support the following spanning tree Ethernet resiliency
protocols:
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) (802.1w)
Carrier Ethernet Wireless Ring-optimized RSTP (proprietary)
Standard RSTP configurations are identical to those for Ring-Optimized RSTP.
The two protocols differ in the following respects:
Topologies supported
Standard RSTP is meant to work with any mesh topology
Ring-Optimized RSTP is meant for ring topologies only
Interoperability
Standard RSTP is fully interoperable
Ring-Optimized RSTP is proprietary

Performance
Standard RSTP converges in up to a few seconds
Ring-Optimized RSTP converges in under 200ms in most cases

20.1.1 Standard RSTP

Standard RSTP is supported in both Managed Switch mode (regular VLANs)
and Metro Switch mode (Provider Bridge). Provider Bridge RSTP is
automatically activated when RSTP is enabled in a Metro Switch bridge.
In addition, Cisco PVST proprietary address is supported.
The following tables describe the behavior of provider bridge RSTP PDUs.
Provider Bridge RSTP PDUs in CN Ports
Spanning Tree type

Destination Address Ingress Action

Bridge Group Address

01-80-C2-00-00-00

Add S-Vlan tag and multicast it to

all PN ports

Provider Bridge Group Address

01-80-C2-00-00-08

Discard

CISCO PVST

01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD

Add S-Vlan tag and multicast it to

all PN ports

Provider Bridge RSTP PDUs in PN Ports

Spanning Tree type

Destination Address Ingress Action

Bridge Group Address

01-80-C2-00-00-00

Add S-Vlan tag and multicast it to

all the ports

Provider Bridge Group Address

01-80-C2-00-00-08

Perform Ring-Optimized RSTP

CISCO PVST

01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD

Add S-Vlan tag and multicast it to

all the ports

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 296 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

20.1.2 Carrier Ethernet Wireless Ring-Optimized RSTP

IP-10G/Es proprietary RSTP implementation is optimized for Carrier
Ethernet wireless rings. Ring-optimized RSTP enhances the RSTP algorithm
for ring topologies, accelerating the failure propagation relative to ordinary
RSTP.
Ring-Optimized RSTP uses the standard RSTP BPDUs: 01-80-C2-00-00-00.
With IP-10G/Es ring-optimized RSTP, failure propagation is much faster than
with regular RSTP. Instead of link-by link serial propagation, the failure is
propagated in parallel to all bridges. In this way, the bridges that have ports in
alternate states immediately place them in the forwarding state.
The ring is revertible. When the ring is set up, it is converged according to
RSTP definitions. When a failure appears (e.g., LOF is raised), the ring is
converged. When the failure is removed (e.g., LOF is cleared), the ring reverts
back to its original state, still maintaining service disruption limitations.
RSTP PDUs coming from Edge ports are discarded (and not processed or
broadcasted).

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 297 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

20.2

User Guide

Setting the xSTP Protocol

This feature requires:

Network Resiliency license

Related topics:

Configuring Automatic State Propagation

Loading a New License Key

To set the xSTP protocol:

1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch> STP Protocol. The STP Protocol
page opens.

2 Select RSTP or Ring RSTP.

3 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 298 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

20.3

User Guide

Configuring Ring-Optimized RSTP

This feature requires:

Network Resiliency license

Managed Switch or Metro Switch mode

Related topics:

Configuring Automatic State Propagation

Loading a New License Key

This section includes:

Ring RSTP Limitations

Ring RSTP Supported Topologies

Ring RSTP Performance
Ring RSTP Management
Ring RSTP Configuration
Ring RSTP Installation

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 299 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

20.3.1 Ring RSTP Limitations

Users should be aware of the following Ring RSTP limitations:
Ring RSTP is a proprietary implementation of Ceragon Networks, and is
not interoperable with other Ring RSTP implementations from third party
vendors.
Ring RSTP provides improved performance for ring topologies. For any
other topology, the algorithm will converge but performance may take
several seconds.
Ring RSTP can be used in Managed Switch mode and Metro Switch mode.
It is not available in Smart Pipe mode.
Ring RSTP can be used with 1+1 HSB protection, but in some cases (change
of root node) the convergence time may be above 1 second.

20.3.2 Ring RSTP Supported Topologies

This section describes the IP-10G and IP-10E node configurations that can be
used as part of a ring topology using Ring-Optimized RSTP. For configuration
instructions for these two topologies, see Ring RSTP Configuration on
page 304.
Node Type A
The node is connected to the ring with one radio interface (e.g., East) and one
line interface (e.g., West). The node contains only one IP-10 IDU.
The Radio interface is directed towards one direction (e.g., East), and one of
the Gigabit interfaces (electrical or optical) is directed towards the second
direction (e.g., West).
The other line interfaces are in Edge mode, which means that they are user
interfaces, and do not belong the ring itself.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 300 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Node Type B
Using two IP-10G or IP-10E IDUs, this node is connected to radios in both
directions of the ring (East and West). Each IDU supports the radio in one
direction.
In this topology, Ring RSTP is enabled in one IDU. The other IDU operates in
Smart Pipe mode.
The IDUs are connected to each other using one of their Gigabit interfaces
(either optical or electrical). Other line interfaces are in Edge mode.

20.3.3 Ring RSTP Performance

The following failures will initiate convergence:
Radio LOF
Link ID mismatch

Radio Excessive BER (optional)

ACM profile is below a pre-determined threshold (optional)

Line LOC
Node cold reset (Pipe and/or Switch).

Node power down (Pipe and/or Switch).

xSTP port Disable/Shutdown

Notes:

Ring port (non-edge port) shutdown will initiate

convergence, but since this is a user configuration, it is not
considered a failure, and is not propagated. When the user
issues a port shutdown, fast convergence should not be
expected.
The ring is converged in order to cope with physical layer
failures. Any other failure that might disrupt data, such as
interface configuration that excludes necessary VLANs will
not be taken care of by Ring RSTP.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 301 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

The ring shall NOT converge optimally upon path cost

configuration, since such a configuration might force the
ring to converge into a different steady state (CQ19998).
The ring acquires its steady state in a non optimal time,
similar to standard RSTP.
Convergence performance is as follows:

Up to 4 nodes < 150mSec

Up to 8 nodes < 200mSec

Exceptions:
10% of convergence scenarios might take 600mSec.

Excessive BER convergence might end within 600mSec (CQ19230).

HW (cold reset) resets, convergence might end within 400-600 mSec
(CQ20697).
Radio TX mute/ un-mute convergence takes, in 5-10% of cases, 500 1000
mSec (CQ19926).

20.3.4 Ring RSTP Management

You can use either in-band or out-of-band management in a node using RSTP.
The advantages of in-band management are that management is protected by
RSTP along with other data traffic, and an additional interface in each node is
left free for traffic.
20.3.4.1 In-Band Management
In-band management is part of the data traffic. RSTP therefore protects
management traffic along with the other network traffic when the ring is reconverged as a result of a ring failure.
When in-band management is used, IDUs set to Managed Switch are
configured to In-Band, while IDUs set to Smart Pipe mode are configured to
Out-of-Band. Out-of-Band. IDUs using Smart Pipe mode are connected to their
mates, which are using Managed Switch mode, via an external Ethernet cable
for management. This is because an IDU in Smart Pipe mode shuts down its
Gigabit traffic port in the event of failure, which would prevent management
traffic from reaching the IDU.
Note:

If the IDU in Managed Switch mode loses power, its mate in

Smart Pipe mode will lose management access. As a result,
the entire node will lose management access. However, if
the IDU in Smart Pipe mode loses power, its mate in
Managed Switch mode will retain management access.

In band management provides additional free interfaces for traffic in each

node.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 302 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

The following figure illustrates a ring with four nodes using in-band
management:
Resilient In-Band ring
management

Eth1

Eth2

Eth3

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

Managed Switch: In-Band

Eth1

Management

Eth2

Eth3

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Single Pipe: Out-of-Band

Traffic Connectivity

Radio
Radio

Eth1

Eth2

Eth3

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

Eth1

Eth2

Eth3

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Eth3

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

Managed Switch: In-Band

Single Pipe: Out-of-Band

Eth1

Eth2

Eth1

Eth2

Eth3

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Single Pipe: Out-of-Band

Managed Switch: In-Band

Radio
Radio

Network
Management
Eth1

Eth2

Eth3

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

Managed Switch: In-Band

Eth1

Eth2

Eth3

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Single Pipe: Out-of-Band

20.3.4.2 Out-of-Band Management

Out-of-band management uses the Wayside Channel (WSC) for management
access to the IDUs in the network. An external switch using some form of STP
should be used in order to obtain resilient management access and resolve
management loops.
When out-of-band management is used, all IDUs must be configured to:
Out-of-Band
WSC Enabled

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 303 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

The following figure illustrates a ring with four nodes using out-of-band
management:
Resilient Out-of-Band
ring management

Eth1

Eth2

Eth3

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

Managed Switch

Eth1

Management

Eth2

Eth3

Single Pipe

Traffic Connectivity

Radio
Radio

Eth1

Eth2

Eth3

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

Eth3

WSC
Eth4

Mng
Eth5

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

Eth1

Single Pipe
Eth1

Eth2

Eth3

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

Managed Switch
Eth1

Eth3

Single Pipe

Managed Switch

Radio

xSTP External
Switch, resolving
management loops.

Radio
Eth1

Network
Management

Eth2

Eth3

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

WSC
Eth4

Eth5

Mng
Eth6

Mng
Eth7

Eth8

Managed Switch
Eth1

Eth2

Eth3

Single Pipe

20.3.5 Ring RSTP Configuration

This section explains how to configure Ring-Optimized RSTP in each of the
two node configuration types described in Ring RSTP Supported Topologies on
page 300.
20.3.5.1 Node Type A Configuration
The following are the basic configuration settings for the IDUs in a Type A
node:
Switch application: Managed Switch
Automatic State Propagation: Enable. The user can choose which faults
to propagate. It is recommended to enable all the options to gain
convergence upon any failure.
Note:

Fast convergence cannot be guaranteed if Automatic State

Propagation is not enabled (CQ19363).
Ring management:
For out-of-band management, at least three management ports in the
management gateway node, and two management ports in the other
nodes. WSC should be set to Enable.
For in-band management, at least two management ports in the
management gateway node, and one port in any other node. WSC
should be set to Disabled.
Ethernet-Fast-Ring-RSTP: Enable
Bridge level Ring-RSTP parameters should be configured (Bridge
Priority)

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 304 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Port Level Ring-RSTP parameters:

Only two interfaces that connect the node to the ring should be
configured as non-edge interfaces.
Non edge ports should have their Port Priority and Path Cost
configured.
Traffic ports should be configured to be Edge ports.
The Management and WSC ports should be configured to be Edge
ports.

20.3.5.2 Node Type B Configuration

The IDUs using Managed Switch mode should be configured using the same
settings described for a Node Type A configuration. Refer to Node Type A
Configuration on page 304.
The IDUs using Smart Pipe mode should be configured as follows:
Switch application: Smart Pipe

Automatic State Propagation: Enable. You can choose which faults to

propagate. It is recommended to enable all the options to gain reconvergence upon any failure.

Note:

Fast convergence cannot be guaranteed if Automatic State

Propagation is not enabled (CQ19363).

Note:

It is recommended to design the ring to be constructed of

symmetrical radio links. This means that the radio links must
use the same switch application on both ends, e.g., Smart
Pipe with a Smart Pipe link, or Managed Switch with a
Managed Switch link. This is because Managed Switch does
not react to an LOC fault that might be propagated by a Smart
Pipe when they are in the same link. This can affect ring reconvergence performance.

Ring management: Out-of-Band. At least two ports must be configured as

management ports, with WSC enabled.

20.3.6 Ring RSTP Installation

This section describes two installation scenarios:
Scenario 1: Configuring Ring-Optimized RSTP from scratch.
Scenario 2: Replacing an IDU in a ring that uses Ring-Optimized RSTP.
20.3.6.1 Installation Scenario1: Node with no STP
1 Disconnect all Ethernet cables from the relevant IDU (except local
management if needed).
2 Insert the new IDU into its slot, and turn it ON.
3 Install licenses for L2 Switch and Network Resiliency in the IDU..
4 Configure the IDU, as explained in Ring RSTP Configuration on page 304.
5 Connect one arm of the ring to the node (the radio for example, without a
line).
6 Make sure the node understands its role in the network.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 305 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

7 Connect the second arm of the ring. At this point, the ring should be reconverged, and the alternate port should appear again.
8 Make sure the ring is converged properly, and all nodes are accessible.
20.3.6.2 Scenario2: Replacing an IDU in an RSTP Ring
1
2
3
4
5
6

Identify the port in the network that is now shut down due to ring failure.
Identify whether the IDU that should be replaced is or is not a root.
Turn OFF the IDU with the port that is shut down.
Disconnect all Ethernet cables from the IDU that is to be replaced.
Remove the IDU.
Insert the new IDU into its slot, and turn it ON. Do not connect Ethernet
cables to new units (except local management if needed).
7 Install licenses for L2 Switch and Network Resiliency in the new unit.
8 Configure the new IDU according to the configuration of the previous IDU.
It is recommended to download a backup configuration.
If the IDU was not root, it is recommended to configure its Bridge
Priority to a higher value than the current root, to ensure that the new
IDU will not be root.
If the IDU was root, it is recommended to configure its Bridge Priority
to a lower value than the new root, to ensure that it will become root.
If the IDU was operating in Smart Pipe mode, its configuration is not
relevant for RSTP.
9 Connect one arm of the ring to the node (radio for example, without a
line).
10 Make sure the node understands its role in the network.
11 Connect the second arm of the ring. At this point the ring should be reconverged, and the alternate port should appear again.
12 Make sure the ring is converged properly, and all nodes are accessible.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 306 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

20.4

User Guide

Configuring Ethernet Ports to Support RSTP

Viewing MAID List Status and Details

Adding MAIDs
Deleting MAIDs

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 310 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

21.1.1 Viewing MAID List Status and Details

The MAID list table section displays details about each MAID.
To view a MAIDs details:
1 Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List page opens.

In the MAID list section:

# - Indicates the domain number (internal number of the displayed
function).
Status - Indicates the status of the current domain:
No MEPs Indicates that no MEPs are configured yet for the selected
MAID. This state is used for empty domains, before defining MEPs, or
for a domain that contains only MIPs.
Monitoring - CFM (CCM) Indicates that proactive monitoring is
running, no error found.
Failure Indicates a connectivity error in at least one MEP.
Domain name - Displays the maintenance domain name.
Level - Indicates the maintenance domain level.

Association name - Displays the maintenance domain association name.

VLAN ID - Displays the identification # of the VLAN
Send CCM - Displays the CCM status:
Disable - no continuity (CCM) frames are sent from the local MEP to
remote MEPs.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 311 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Enable - continuity (CCM) frames are sent from the local MEP to
remote MEPs.
CCM interval - Indicates the (periodic) time interval during which CCM
messages are sent.
Valid values include 1Sec, 10Sec, 1Min, and 10Min.

Click the + in each MAID entry for more options.

21.1.2 Adding MAIDs

To add a new MAID:
1 Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List page opens.
2 Click Add to open the Add MAID configuration window.

3 In the Domain Name field, enter the name of the maintenance domain.
4 In the Level field, select the maintenance domain level.
5 In the Association name field, enter the maintenance domain association
name.
6 In the VLAN ID field, enter a number between 1-4090 as the MAID VLAN
ID.
7 Click Apply.

21.1.3 Deleting MAIDs

To delete MAIDs:
1
2
3
4

Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List page opens.
Select each MAID you want to remove.
Click Delete selected at the bottom of the page.
Click OK to confirm the deletion.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 312 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

21.2

User Guide

Managing Local MEPs

This section includes:

Viewing Local MEPs

Adding Local MEPs
Deleting local MEPs

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 313 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

21.2.1 Viewing Local MEPs

The Local MEP section displays details for all the local MEPs that are
configured for the selected MAID.
To view local MEPs:
1 Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List opens.
2 Select a MAID from the list.

In the Local MEP section:

Local MEP ID Indicates the ID of the MAID local MEP.

Ethernet port Displays the selected port number on which the local MEP
is located.
MAC address Displays Ethernet protection MAC address.
Priority Displays the P-bit priority that the CCM message carries.
LDI - Local Defect Indication. If the value is Yes, click the + in the right
corner of the table to view the reasons for this bug.
Connected Indicates the connection status of the local MEP.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 314 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

21.2.2 Adding Local MEPs

You can define additional local MEPs for the selected MAID.
To add a local MEP:
1 Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List opens.
2 Select a MAID from the list.
3 In the Local MEP section, click Add underneath the list of local MEPs to
open the Add MEP window.

4
5
6
7

In the Ethernet port field, enter the port number of the local MEP.
In the Local MEP ID field, enter a number between 1-8191 for the MEP ID.
In the Level field, select the MAID domain level.
In the VLAN ID field, enter a number between 1-4090 for the MAID VLAN
ID.
8 In the Direction field, select either Up or Down as the MEP direction.
9 In the Priority field, select the P-bit priority for the CCM message.
10 Click Apply.

21.2.3 Deleting local MEPs

To delete a MEP from a port:
1 Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List opens.
2 In the Local MEP section, select each MEP you want to remove.
3 Click Delete selected underneath the list of local MEPs.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 315 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

21.3

User Guide

Managing Remote MEPs

This section includes:

Viewing Remote MEPs

Adding Remote MEPs
Deleting Remote MEPs
Pinging Remote MEPs
Remote MEP Linktrace
Enabling Automatic Linktrace for a MAID

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 316 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

21.3.1 Viewing Remote MEPs

The Remote MEP section displays details for all the remote MEPs that are
configured for the selected MAID.
To view remote MEPs:
1 Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List opens.
2 Select a MAID from the list.

In the Remote MEP section:

MEP ID Displays the remote MEP ID.

Actual MAC address Indicates the MAC address of the remote MEP,
which the local MEP recognizes.
Configured MAC address Indicates the configured MAC address. This is
USED when you decide to specify a selected MAC address for the remote
MEP.
Status Indicates the remote MEP connection status.
Cross Check Indicates whether current remote MEP was cross checked
(pre-configured) or learned from incoming CCMs.
RDI Indicates the Remote Defect Indication status.
Ping Allows you to ping (run a loopback) from the local MEP to a specific
remote MEP ID.
Automatic Linktrace Indicates whether Automatic Linktrace is enabled
for this MEP.
The checkbox column is used to delete the selection or issue a linktrace
(ETH-LT) command from the local MEP to the current remote MEP.

21.3.2 Adding Remote MEPs

To add a remote MEP:
1 Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List opens.
2 Select a MAID from the list.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 317 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

3 In the Remote MEP section, click Add underneath the Remote MEP list to
open the Add Remote MEP configuration window.

The upper part of the window displays a short summary of the MAID where
the remote MEP is being added.
MAID <ID #> - Indicates the ID of the selected MAID.

Domain name - Displays the maintenance domain name.

VLAN ID - Displays the identification # of the VLAN

In the bottom part of the Add Remote MEP window, define the new MEP.
1 In the Remote MEP ID field, enter a number between 1-8191 as the remote
MEP ID.
2 Optionally, in the Configured MAC address field, specify a selected MAC
address for the remote MEP.
3 Click Apply.

21.3.3 Deleting Remote MEPs

To delete a remote MEP:
1
2
3
4
5

Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List opens.
Select a MAID from the list.
In the Remote MEP section, select each MEP you want to remove.
Click Delete selected underneath the list of port MEPs.
Click OK.

21.3.4 Pinging Remote MEPs

You can ping remote MEPs. To perform a remote ping:
1 Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List opens.
2 Select a MAID from the list.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 318 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

3 In the Remote MEP section, click the Ping icon for any MEP in the list to
open the Remote ping window.

The upper part of the window provides a short summary of the MAID.
Domain name - Displays the maintenance domain name.
Level - Indicates the maintenance domain level.
VLAN ID - Displays the identification # of the VLAN
The Ping to section provides a short summary of the remote MEP being
pinged.
Remote MEP ID Displays the remote MEP ID.
Remote MAC address Indicates the MAC address of the remote MEP,
which the local MEP recognizes.
The ping success rate percentage is displayed at the bottom of the window.
The success rate is the percentage of LBM packet transmission over the
received LBR packets.

21.3.5 Remote MEP Linktrace

You can perform a linktrace for any of the MAIDs remote MEPs. To perform a
remote linktrace:
1 Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List opens.
2 Select a MAID from the list.
3 In the Remote MEP section, select the MEP you want to trace.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 319 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

4 Click Linktrace selected underneath the Remote MEP list.

Note:

You can only trace one MEP at a time.

The Linktrace result section provides a short summary of the MAID and the
Remote MEP being traced.
From - Indicates the ID and MAC address of the source of the trace.
To - Indicates the ID and MAC address of the destination of the trace.
Domain name - Displays the maintenance domain name.

Level - Indicates the maintenance domain level.

Association name - Displays the maintenance domain association name.

VLAN ID - Displays the identification # of the VLAN

Priority Indicates the P-bit priority that the CCM message carries.

Linktrace results are displayed at the bottom of the page.

The table is refreshed automatically every fixed period of time (configurable,
set to 15 min by default), displaying the last updated date and time.
Reply TTL - Displays the hop number.

Mac address - Displays the hop (MEP/MIP) MAC address.

Relay action - Displays the hop LTM relay action.

Click Ping to perform a ping on the returned linktrace hops or results.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 320 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

21.3.6 Enabling Automatic Linktrace for a MAID

To configure automatic linktrace for a MAID:
1
2
3
4

Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List opens.
Select a MAID from the list.
Go to the Automatic linktrace parameters section.
In the Automatic linktrace interval field, enter a number between 60 and
3600 as the number of seconds for the linktrace interval.
5 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 321 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

21.4

User Guide

Working with MEPs

This section includes:

Configuring CCM
Viewing MAID Ethernet Ports
Viewing Port MEPs
Adding MEPs to a Port
Deleting MEPs from a Port

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 322 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

21.4.1 Configuring CCM

Continuity check messages (CCM) are heartbeat messages sent by the MAIDs
MEPs to confirm connectivity with the other MAID entities. When enabled, the
settings will be applied to all MEPs and MIPs in the selected MAID.
To configure CCM:
1 Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List opens.
2 Select a MAID from the list.
3 Go to the CCM configuration section.

4 In the Send CCM field:

Select Enable to allow continuity messages to be sent over the MAID.
Select Disable if you do not want continuity messages (CCM) sent over
the selected MAID.
5 In the CCM Interval field, select the CCM interval. The interval can be 1
second, 10 seconds, 1 minute, or 10 minutes.
6 Click Apply.

21.4.2 Viewing MAID Ethernet Ports

The Ethernet ports section displays details for all the selected MAID Ethernet
ports. To view Ethernet port details:
1 Select Service OAM > MEP and MIP List. The MEP and MIP List page
opens.

In the Ethernet ports section:

Ethernet port Displays the Ethernet port number.

MAC address Displays the Ethernet port MAC address.

Connector type Displays the Ethernet port connector type.

Function Displays the Ethernet port function.

MEP or MIP defined Indicates with a check indicates that you defined an
MEP or MIP on this port.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 323 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

21.4.3 Viewing Port MEPs

The Port MEPs section of the MEP and MIP list displays details for all the
selected MAID Ethernet port MEPs.
To view port MEPs:
1 Select Service OAM > MEP and MIP List. The MEP and MIP List page
opens.
2 Select an Ethernet port.

In the Port MEPs section:

The Port MIPs section of the MEP and MIP list displays details for all the
selected MAID Ethernet port MIPs.
To view port MIPs:
1 Select Service OAM > MEP and MIP List. The MEP and MIP List page
opens.
2 Select an Ethernet port.
In the Port MIPs section:
Domain name - Displays the maintenance domain name.

Level - Indicates the maintenance domain level.

21.5.2 Adding MIPs to a Port

To add a MIP to a port:
1 Select Service OAM > MEP and MIP List. The MEP and MIP List page
opens.
2 Select an Ethernet port.
3 In the Port MIPs section, click Add underneath the list of port MIPs to open
the Add MIP to port window.

4 In the Ethernet port field, enter the [Name | Number] of the Ethernet port
to which you want to add a MIP.
5 In the Level field, select the MIP level.
6 Click Apply.

21.5.3 Deleting MIPs from a Port

You can delete MIPs from a port. To delete a MIP from a port:
1 Select Service OAM > MEP and MIP List. The MEP and MIP List page
opens.
2 Select an Ethernet port.
3 In the Port MIPs section, select each MIP you want to remove.
4 Click Delete selected underneath the list of port MIPs.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 327 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

21.6

User Guide

Performing Manual Ping and Linktrace Operations

This section includes:

Pinging Remote MEPs and MIPs

Performing a Manual Linktrace

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 328 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

21.6.1 Pinging Remote MEPs and MIPs

You can manually ping remote MEPs and MIPs.
To configure a manual ping:
1 Select Service OAM > Advanced > Manual Ping. The Manual Ping page
opens.

2
3
4
5

In the MAC address field, enter the target MEP/MIP MAC address.
In the Level field, select the MAID level.
In the VLAN ID field, enter a number between 1-4090 for the VLAN ID.
In the Priority field, select the P-bit priority bit for the outgoing ETH-LTM
packets.
6 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 329 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

21.6.2 Performing a Manual Linktrace

To perform a manual linktrace:
1 Select Service OAM > Advanced > Manual Linktrace. The Manual
Linktrace page opens.

2
3
4
5

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 330 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

22.

User Guide

Viewing System Activity and Performance

This chapter includes:

Displaying and Clearing PMs

Displaying and Resetting RMON Counters
Displaying Ethernet Statistics
Displaying TDM PMs
Displaying Radio PMs
Viewing Radio Status
Viewing Ethernet Interface Status
Viewing RSTP Status

Viewing Enhanced Traffic Management Statistics

Related topics:

LED Indicators
Viewing Current Alarms
Viewing the Event Log
Monitoring the IDU-RFU Interface

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 331 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

22.1

User Guide

Displaying and Clearing PMs

The Performance Monitoring commands window enables you to clear all
performance monitoring measurements in the unit, except for RMON.
To clear performance monitoring data:
1 Select PM & Counters > PM Commands. The PM Commands page opens.

2 Click Clear.
Many of the Performance Monitoring (PM) windows contain an option to
display the PM data as a graph.
All the reports described in this section can be displayed for the previous 24
hours in 15 minute intervals, or for the past month in daily intervals.
To display reports in 15 minute intervals, select 15 Minutes.
To display reports in daily intervals, select Daily.

To display a PM graph:
1 Click the graph icon at the top of the PM window, located to the left in the
figure above. The PMs appear in a graph format.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Broadcast frames received Indicates the number of

Pause frames received Indicates the number of flow-control pause
frames received.
Undersize frames received Indicates frames shorter than 64 bytes

Fragmented frames received Indicates the number of

Oversize frames received Indicates frames longer than 1632 bytes

Jabber frames received Indicates the total number of frames received

with a length of more than 1632 bytes, but with an invalid FCS
Fragments frames received Indicates the total number of f frames
received with a length of less than 64 bytes, and an invalid FCS
FCS frames received Indicates the total number of f frames received
with CRC error, not counted in "Fragments", "Jabber" or "Rx error"
counters
Rx error frames received Indicates the total number of f frames
received with Phy-error
In discard frames Counts good frames that cannot be forwarded due to
lack of buffer memory
In filtered frames Counts good frames that were filtered due to egress
switch VLAN policy rules
Frames 64 octets Indicates the total number of frames transmitted with
a length of exactly 64 octets.
Frames 65-127 octets Indicates total number of frames transmitted
with a length of 65-127 octets.
Frames 128-255 octets Indicates the total number of frames
transmitted with a length of 128-255 octets.
Frames 256-511 octets Indicates the total number of frames
transmitted with a length of 256-511 octets.
Frames 512-1023 octets Indicates the total number of frames
transmitted with a length of 512-1023 octets.
Frames >=1024 octets Indicates the total number of frames transmitted
with a length of 1024 octets or higher.
Good octets sent Indicates the sum of the lengths of all Ethernet frames
sent from this MAC.
Unicast frames sent Indicates the number of unicast frames transmitted
to the radio port.
Broadcast frames sent Indicates the number of broadcast frames
transmitted to the radio port.
Multicast frames sent Indicates the number of multicast frames
transmitted to the radio port.
Pause frames sent Indicates the number of pause frames sent.
Out FCS error frames Indicates the number of frames transmitted with
an invalid FCS.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 335 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Out filtered frames sent Counts the number of good frames that were
filtered due to egress policy rules.
Deferred frames sent Indicates the total number of successfully
transmitted frames that experienced no collisions but are delayed because
the medium was busy during the first attempt. This counter is applicable in
half-duplex only.
Collision events Indicates the number of collision events seen by the
MAC not including those counted in 'Single', 'Multiple', 'Excessive', or
'Late'. This counter is applicable in half-duplex only.
Single collision frames Indicates the total number of successfully
transmitted frames that experienced exactly one collision. This counter is
applicable in half-duplex only.
Multiple collision frames Indicates the total number of frames that
have been successfully transmitted and have also experienced more than
one collision. This counter is applicable in half-duplex only.
Late collision detect Indicates the number of times a collision is
detected later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a frame. This
counter is applicable in half-duplex only.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 336 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

22.3

User Guide

Displaying Ethernet Statistics

This section includes:

Displaying Frame Error Rate Statistics

Displaying Throughput Statistics
Displaying Capacity Statistics
Displaying Utilization Statistics

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 337 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

22.3.1 Displaying Frame Error Rate Statistics

The Frame Error Rate report displays statistics about the Ethernet frame error
rate (%) measured on the radio Ethernet port.
To view Frame error rate performance:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > Ethernet > Frame Error Rate. The
Frame Error Rate PM report opens.

In the Frame Error Rate PM report:

Frame Error Rate (%) - Indicates the percentage of received error frames
relative to all frames received by the radio Ethernet port.

Integrity - Indicates whether the values received at that time and date are
reliable. An x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to
a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 338 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

22.3.2 Displaying Throughput Statistics

The Throughput PM report displays radio Ethernet throughput statistics
(excluding TDM traffic), measured on the radio port.
To view Throughput PM:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > Ethernet > Throughput. The
Throughput PM report opens.

In the Throughput PM report:

Peak Throughput (bps) - Indicates the maximum throughput measured

during the last interval.

Average Throughput (bps) - Indicates the average throughput measured

during the last interval.

Throughput Exceed (Seconds) - Indicates the number of seconds the

throughput exceeded the threshold (configured in the field below the
table) during the last interval.
Integrity - Indicates whether the values received at that time and date are
reliable. An x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to
a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 339 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

22.3.3 Displaying Capacity Statistics

The Capacity PM report displays statistics of the Ethernet capacity, including
Ethernet data and overhead bytes, measured on the radio port.
To view Capacity PM:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > Ethernet > Capacity. The Capacity PM
report opens.

In the Capacity PM report:

Peak Capacity (bps) - Indicates the maximum capacity measured during

the last interval.
Average Capacity (bps) - Indicates the average capacity measured during
the last interval.
Capacity Exceed (seconds) - Indicates the number of seconds the
throughput exceeded the threshold during the last interval.
Integrity - Indicates whether the values received at that time and date are
reliable. An x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to
a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 340 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

22.3.4 Displaying Utilization Statistics

The Utilization PM report displays statistics of Ethernet utilization (%)
measured on the radio port.
Ethernet utilization is a measurement of actual Ethernet throughput, relative
to the potential Ethernet throughput of the radio, excluding TDM channels.
Ethernet utilization during the last interval is displayed as one of five bins:
0-20% | 20-40% | 40-60% | 60-80% | 80-100%
To view Ethernet utilization statistics:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > Ethernet > Utilization. The Utilization
PM report opens.

In the Utilization PM report:

Range of Peak Utilization (%) - Indicates the maximum utilization
measured during the last interval.

Range of Average Utilization (%) - Indicates the average utilization

measured during the last interval.

Utilization Exceed (Seconds) - Indicates the number of seconds the value

exceeded the threshold during the last interval.
Integrity - Indicates whether the values received at that time and date are
reliable. An x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to
a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 341 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

22.4

User Guide

Displaying TDM PMs

This section includes:

Displaying E1/DS1 Line PMs

Displaying TDM Channel PMs
Displaying TDM Trail PMs
Displaying STM-1/OC-3 Line PMs
Displaying Pseudowire PMs

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 342 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

22.4.1 Displaying E1/DS1 Line PMs

You can display E1 or DS1 line PMs. The E1 and DS1 PM pages contain a
separate PM window for each E1 or DS1 link in use.
To view E1 or DS1 PMs:
1 Select PM & Counters > E1> Port# or PM & Counters > DS1 > Port#. The
E1 or DS1 line PM report opens.

In the E1 or DS1 PM report:

ES Indicates the number of seconds during which errors occurred.

SES Indicates the number of seconds during which severe errors
occurred.
UAS Indicates the Unavailable Seconds value of the current interval. The
value can be between 0 and 900 seconds (15 minutes).
BBE Indicates the number of background block errors.
Integrity - Indicates whether the values received at that time and date are
reliable. An x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to
a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 343 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

22.4.2 Displaying TDM Channel PMs

The TDM Channel report displays the unavailable seconds (UAS) of the
expected E1/T1 trails on the radio.
When ACM decreases, the capacity of the radio is reduced. Trails with
insufficient bandwidth in the radio link capacity may be dropped.
When a trail is dropped, its UAS counter will start counting the seconds for
which the trail was not serviced.
To view TDM radio PM:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > TDM channels > Channel#. The Channel
PM report opens.

txrx_frames_64: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of good or bad frames
transmitted and received that are 64 bytes in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS bytes).
txrx_frames_127: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of good or bad frames
transmitted and received that are 65 to 127 bytes in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS bytes).
txrx_frames_255: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of good or bad frames
transmitted and received that are 128 to 255 bytes in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS bytes).
txrx_frames_511: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of good or bad frames
transmitted and received that are 256 to 511 bytes in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS bytes).

txrx_frames_1023: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of good or bad frames

transmitted and received that are 512 to 1023 bytes in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS bytes).
txrx_frames_1518: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of good or bad frames
transmitted and received that are 1024 to 1518 bytes in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS bytes).

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 347 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

txrx_frames_1522: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of good or bad frames

transmitted and received that are 1519 to 1522 bytes in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS bytes).
rx_bytes: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of byte count of frames received
with 0 to 1518 bytes, including those in bad packets, excluding framing
bits but including FCS bytes.
rx_packets: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of received packets
(including bad packets, all Unicast, Broadcast, and Multicast packets).
rx_err_fcs: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames received that have a
integral 64 to 1518 byte length and contain a Frame Check Sequence error.
rx_multicast: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of multicast good
frames of length 64 to 1518 (non VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN) bytes excluding
Broadcast frames.

Note:

This statistic does not take into account frames with

range/length errors.
rx_broadcast: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of broadcast
good frames of length 64 to 1518 (non VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN) bytes
excluding Broadcast frames.

Note:

This statistic does not take into account frames with

range/length errors.
rx_mac_control: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of MAC Control frames
received (PAUSE & Unsupported).
rx_mac_pause: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of valid PAUSE MAC
Control frames received.
rx_mac_unknown: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of MAC Control Frames
received that contain an opcode other than a PAUSE.
rx_err_alignment: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of received frames
from 64 to 1518 (non VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN) bytes in length that contain
an invalid FCS and are not an integral number of bytes.
rx_err_length: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames received in
which the 802.3 length field did not match the number of data bytes
actually received (46 - 1500 bytes). The counter is not incremented if the
length field is not a valid 802.3 length, such as an EtherType value.
rx_err_code: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of instances
where a valid carrier was present and at least one invalid data symbol was
detected.
rx_err_false_carrier: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of false
carriers detected during idle, as defined by a 1 on RX_ER and an '0xE' on
RXD. The event is reported along with the statistics generated on the next
received frame.

Note:

Only one false carrier condition can be detected and logged

between frames.
rx_undersize: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames received that are
less than 64 bytes in length, contain a valid FCS, and were otherwise well
formed.

Note:

This statistic does not look at range/length errors.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 348 of 577

In the Pseudowire Service report:

FC Failure counts. A failure is an LOPS event.

FER Frame error ratio.
Missing Packets Number of missing packets.
Misorder Dropped Number of packets detected out of order that could
not be re-ordered or could not fit in the jitter buffer.
Malformed Packets Number of packets detected with unexpected size,
or bad headers stack.
Integrity - Indicates whether the values received at that time and date are
reliable. An x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to
a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 352 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

22.5

User Guide

Displaying Radio PMs

This section includes:

Displaying Signal Level PMs

Displaying Aggregate Radio PMs
Displaying Radio MRMC PMs
Displaying Radio MSE PMs
Displaying Radio XPI PMs

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 353 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

22.5.1 Displaying Signal Level PMs

The Signal Level PM report shows signal level performance.
You can set display to show PMs for the previous 24 hours in 15 min intervals,
or for the past month in daily intervals.
To view signal level performance:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > Signal Level. The Signal Level PM report
opens.

In the PM report section:

Min RSL Indicates the minimum received level measured during the
interval.
Max RSL Indicates the maximum received level measured during the
interval.

RSL Exceed #1 - Displays the number of seconds the RSL threshold

#1value was exceeded during the current interval.
RSL Exceed #2 - Displays the number of seconds the RSL threshold #2
value was exceeded during the current interval.
Min TSL Indicates the minimum transmitted level measured during the
interval.
Max TSL Indicates the maximum transmitted level measured during the
interval.
TSL Exceed - Displays the number of seconds the TSL threshold value was
exceeded during the current interval.
Integrity - Indicates whether the values received at that time and date are
reliable. An x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to
a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 354 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

22.5.2 Displaying Aggregate Radio PMs

The Aggregate PM report page displays tributary values measured for the
previous 24 hours in 15 min intervals, or for the past month in daily intervals.
To view aggregate radio performance:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > Aggregate. The Aggregate PM report
opens.

In the Aggregate PM report:

ES Indicates the number of seconds during which errors occurred.

SES Indicates the number of seconds during which severe errors

occurred.

UAS Indicates the Unavailable Seconds value of the current interval. The
value can be between 0 and 900 seconds (15 minutes).
BBE Indicates the number of background block errors.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 355 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

22.5.3 Displaying Radio MRMC PMs

The MRMC PM report displays Multi-Rate Multi-Constellation performance for
the previous 24 hours in 15 min intervals, or for the past month in daily
intervals.
To view MRMC PM:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > MRMC. The MRMC PM report opens.

In the MRMC PM report:

Min Profile - Indicates the minimum radio profile during the last interval.

Max Profile - Indicates the maximum radio profile during the last interval.
Min BitRate (Mbps) - Indicates the minimum total radio throughput
(Mbps), delivered during the last interval.
Max BitRate (Mbps) - Indicates the maximum total radio throughput
(Mbps), delivered during the last interval.
Min number of allocated TDM VCs - Indicates the minimum number of
TDM voice channels (E1/T1) delivered over the radio during the last
interval.
Max number of allocated TDM VCs - Indicates the maximum number of
TDM channels (E1/T1) delivered over the radio during the last interval.
Integrity - Indicates whether the values received at that time and date are
reliable. An x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to
a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 356 of 577

User Guide

Viewing Radio Status

This section includes:

Viewing RFU Status

Viewing MRMC Status
Viewing Current Tx Status
Viewing Current Rx Status
Viewing Remote Radio Parameters
Viewing XPIC Status

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 359 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

22.6.1 Viewing RFU Status

To view the RFU status parameters:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Parameters. The Radio
Parameters page opens.

In the Status Parameters section:

RFU type Indicates the type of RFU used in the system.

Tx/Rx frequency separation Displays Tx/Rx separation values.

Tx/Rx level Displays current Tx/Rx level values.

MSE Displays Mean Square Error value, which quantifies the

performance of the receiver.
XPI level Displays the current cross polarization interference value.

Note:
This field only appears if XPIC is enabled.
Defective blocks Indicates the number of blocks in which errors were
detected. The larger the amount, the poorer the radio link quality.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 360 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

22.6.2 Viewing MRMC Status

To view MRMC status:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > MRMC. The MRMC page opens.

In the MRMC configuration section:

MRMC script Displays the current selected radio script.
Occupied bandwidth (MHz) Displays the actual bandwidth occupied by
the radio signal.
This should not be confused with Channel Spacing, which indicates the
allocated bandwidth for the RF channel.
If an asymmetrical script is enabled, this field will be replaced with
separate Rx and Tx occupied bandwidth status.
Operational mode Displays the ACM mode: ACM Adaptive, ACM Fixed,
or Regular (non ACM radio script).
Min adaptive ACM profile Indicates the minimum configured profile
that will never be exceeded when ACM is active.
Max adaptive ACM profile Indicates the maximum configured profile
that will never be exceeded when ACM is active.
Adaptive Tx power admin Indicates whether power admin is enabled.
When enabled, the radio power is adjusted to the current profile that is
being used.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 361 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

22.6.3 Viewing Current Tx Status

The Current TX section displays ACM transmission settings
To view current Tx settings:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > MRMC. The MRMC page opens.

In the Current TX section:

Profile Indicates the current ACM profile used for transmission.
QAM Indicates the current modulation used for transmission.
Bitrate Indicates the current transmitted bit rate, in Mbps.

Number of TDM channels Indicates the number of TDM channels.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 362 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

22.6.4 Viewing Current Rx Status

The Current Rx section displays ACM received settings
To view current RX settings:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > MRMC. The MRMC page opens.

In the Current Rx section:

Profile Indicates the current ACM profile used by the receiver.

QAM Indicates the current modulation used by the receiver.

Bitrate Indicates the current receiving bit rate, in Mbps.

Number of TDM channels Indicates the number of TDM channels.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 363 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

22.6.5 Viewing Remote Radio Parameters

To view the current remote Rx level:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Remote Radio. The Remote Radio page
opens.

In the Remote radio parameters section:

Remote communication Indicates the current communication status of

the remote unit.
Remote Rx level Indicates the current Rx level of the remote unit.

22.6.6 Viewing XPIC Status

XPIC enables two radio carriers to use the same frequency with a polarity
separation between them by adaptively subtracting from each carrier the
interfering cross carrier at the proper phase and level, with the ability to
detect both streams even under the worst levels of cross polar discrimination
interference such as 10 dB.
To view XPIC status:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Parameters. The Radio
Parameters page opens.

In the XPIC parameters section:

XPI enabled Indicates whether XPIC is enabled.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 364 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

22.7

User Guide

Viewing Ethernet Interface Status

The Ethernet ports table displays the configuration settings for each port.
To view Ethernet port status:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Ethernet Ports. The Ethernet Ports
page opens.

In the Ethernet ports table:

Operational status Indicates whether the port is Up or Down.
Enabled Indicates whether the port is enabled.
A check mark indicates that this port is enabled.
An X indicates that the port is disabled.
Interface Displays the port number.
Connector type Displays whether this port is using copper (RJ-45) cable
or optical fiber.
Speed & duplex Displays available parameters regarding rate and
duplex:
Auto negotiation Indicates whether auto-negotiation is enabled for
the port.
Rate Indicates the configured rate for the port.
Actual rate Indicates the actual rate for the port.
Actual duplex Indicates whether actual duplex is Half or Full.
Function Displays whether the port is being used for Trunk, Access, or
Management.
For Metro switches Indicates whether the port is being used for C/N,
P/N, or Management.
VLAN ID Displays all allowed VIDs for this port.
Learning A check mark indicates that Port learning is enabled. An X
indicates that Port learning is disabled.
Flow control Displays whether Flow control is On or Off.
Service type Displays whether this port is a network or access point.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 365 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

22.8

User Guide

Viewing RSTP Status

Related topics:

Configuring RSTP

The RSTP and Ring RSTP windows enable you to view status information and
to configure RSTP parameters.
The configurations of RSTP and Ring RSTP parameters are identical.
To view RSTP status:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch> (Ring) RSTP. The RSTP page
opens.

The (Ring) RSTP Status section displays the current RSTP status information:
Bridge ID Displays the ID of the bridge in the current monitored IDU.
Root ID Displays the ID of the root bridge.
Root Path Cost Displays the cost of the path from the current monitored
IDU to the root bridge.
Bridge Role Displays the role of the bridge: Root or Designated.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 366 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

22.9

User Guide

Viewing Enhanced Traffic Management Statistics

This feature requires:

Enhanced QoS license

You can view a PM report for the Enhanced traffic manager of each queue. The
report contains data from the most recent report interval.
Each PM is measured per queue in Max/Avg format. Green traffic refers to
frames that comply with the configured Committed Information Rate (CIR).
Yellow traffic refers to frames that exceed the configured CIR but are below
the configured Excess Information Rate (EIR).
In addition to the Enhanced Traffic Manager (Enhanced QoS) statistics
available in earlier versions, hardware version R3 and software version i6.9
provide additional counters, as shown in the following table:
Per-Queue Counters Availability
Software Version
i6.7

Green bytes passed

Green frames dropped
Yellow bytes passed
Yellow frames dropped

i6.9

Same as i6.7, with the addition of:

L1 support for green and yellow bytes passed (i6.7 supports L2 only)

Green frames passed

Yellow frames passed

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 367 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

To view traffic statistics for a managed Ethernet queue:

1 Select PM & Counters > Enhanced Traffic Manager > Queue#.

In the Bytes section:

Avg. Green Passed Displays the average green traffic in bytes per
seconds (Bps) during the report interval.
Max Green Passed - Displays the peak green traffic for one second during
the report interval.
Avg. Yellow Passed Displays the average yellow traffic in Bps during the
report interval.
Max Yellow Passed - Displays the peak yellow traffic for one second
during the report interval.
Avg. Red Dropped Displays the average red dropped traffic in Bps
during the report interval.

Max Red Dropped - Displays the peak red dropped traffic for one second
during the report interval.

In the Frames section:

Avg. Green Dropped Displays the average number of dropped green
frames during the report interval.
Max Green Dropped Displays the maximum number of dropped green
frames during the report interval.
Avg. Yellow Dropped Displays the average number of dropped yellow
frames during the report interval.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 368 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Max Yellow Dropped Displays the maximum number of dropped yellow

frames during the report interval.
Avg. Green Passed Displays the average number of green frames
dropped during the report interval.
Max Green Passed - Displays the maximum number of green frames
dropped during the report interval.

Avg. Yellow Passed Displays the average number of yellow frames

dropped during the report interval.

Max Yellow Passed - Displays the maximum number of yellow frames

dropped during the report interval.
Avg. Red Dropped Displays the average number of dropped red frames
during the report interval.
Max Red Dropped Displays the maximum number of dropped red
frames during the report interval.

The RMON counters page displays values relating to the bridge performance.
The counters are designed to support:
RFC 2819, RMON MIB
RFC 2665, Ethernet-like MIB
RFC 2233, MIB II
RFC 1493, Bridge MIB
The statistic counters are divided into ingress statistics and egress statistics.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 369 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

23.

User Guide

Fault Management
This chapter includes:

Overview of Fault Management

LED Indicators
Configuring External Alarms
Configuring Traps
Configuring Power Supply Alarms
Viewing Current Alarms
Viewing the Event Log
Monitoring the IDU-RFU Interface

Loopback
Troubleshooting Protection

Activating the All-ODU Enclosure

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 370 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

23.1

User Guide

Overview of Fault Management

FibeAir IDUs are designed to be highly reliable and relatively maintenance
free. In the event of a system failure, the system will provide detailed
indications to assist troubleshooting and fault isolation. This chapter explains
the alarm indications in a FibeAir system, and contains procedures for
troubleshooting and fault isolation.
To ensure simple and efficient system maintenance, the on-site technician will
only replace IDU or RFU modules, and not repair them. Under no circumstance
will the technician be permitted to open the equipment in order to repair a
module or circuit board. Opening equipment will terminate the Ceragon
warranty.
Maintenance procedures the technician can perform include visual inspection,
cleaning, cable/connector repair, link alignment/adjustment, and retorquing
antenna mount bolts.
The following table lists the suggested preventive maintenance procedures,
which include visual inspection of the equipment and verification of
operational parameters.
It is recommended to perform the procedures as often as local environmental
conditions require. It is recommended to notify the end customer prior to
performing any preventive maintenance procedures that could affect service
on the circuit.
What to check

Check for

Comments

IDU alarm LEDs

All green

If not, perform troubleshooting

Coax cable connection

Tight, no corrosion or
moisture

Clean/repair as required

Coax cable

No cracks or kinks

Replace as required

All equipment

Dust or dirt

Clean as required

Receive level (voltage in

IDU/ODU/RFU, or using
management)

Per installation records

Align/adjust as required

Torque on antenna mount bolts Tight mount

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Adjust as required

Page 371 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Corrective maintenance consists of the steps described below. The steps

provide a logical, sequential method for diagnosing and resolving system
problems.
Step 1: Define the Symptom
This step is generally performed by the customer's field technician or
supervisor. Examples of symptoms include IDU alarm is red, complete loss
of service, and excessive errors.
Symptoms may be constant or intermittent. Constant symptoms require
immediate troubleshooting attention. Intermittent symptoms may require
circuit monitoring or robust test procedures prior to troubleshooting.
Step 2: Isolate the Problem
After you have a clear definition of the symptom, the malfunction can be
isolated using diagnostics, loopback testing, fault isolation tables/flow charts,
test equipment, and manual procedures.
This step will identify the specific piece of equipment that is failing.
Although it may be difficult at times to immediately determine which part of a
radio link is causing the fault, the initial suspicion should be focused on one of
the following near-end or far-end issues:
Power supplies
Fading (due to heavy rain, new obstacle in path, antenna misalignment)
External equipment (SDH/SONET, ATM, Fast Ethernet, etc.)
Indoor Unit (IDU)
Radio Frequency Unit (RFU)
RF cable between the RFU and IDU
Exposure of equipment to severe conditions (high temperature, etc.)
System configuration
Step 3: Understand the Problem
Once the fault has been isolated, you will need to understand why the fault
occurred and what is required to correct it. Use the tables provided in the
following sections to understand the problem, and for suggestions of possible
solutions.
Step 4: Solve the Problem
Use the troubleshooting information in this chapter to help solve the problem.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 372 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

23.2

User Guide

LED Indicators
The following LEDs are located beneath the external alarms on the front
panel:
LINK Indicates status of the radio link.
IDU Indicates status of the Ethernet interface.
RFU Indicates status of the RF module.
PROT Indicates the main and standby unit alarm and protection status.
RMT Indicates status of the remote unit.
These LEDs indicate the following:
LINK
Green Radio link is operational
Orange Minor BER alarm on the radio
Red Loss of signal, major BER alarm on the radio
IDU
Green IDU is functioning normally
Orange Fan failure
Red Alarm on IDU (all severities)
RFU
Green RFU is functioning normally
Orange Loss of communication between the IDU and the RFU
Red RFU failure
PROT
Main Unit Green No alarms
Standby Unit Yellow No alarms
Orange Forced switch, protection lock
Red Physical errors (no cable, cable failure)
Off Protection is disabled, or not supported on the device
RMT
Green Remote IDU is functioning normally
Orange Minor alarm on the remote IDU
Red Major alarm on the remote IDU

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 373 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

23.3

User Guide

Configuring External Alarms

IP-10G and IP-10E include a DB9 dry contact external alarms interface. The
external alarms interface supports five input alarms and a single output alarm.
The input alarms are configurable according to:
1
2
3
4
5

Intermediate
Critical
Major
Minor
Warning

The output alarm is configured according to predefined categories.

To configure external alarms:
1 Select Configuration > General > External Alarms. The External Alarms
page opens.

2 In the Alarm Input section:

i Click + to expand the alarm you want to configure.
ii In the Admin field, select Enable or Disable to activate or disable he
alarm input.
iii In the Text field, specify a string to use as the alarm description. When
an alarm input is raised, this text will appear as the alarm description
text.
iv In the Severity field, specify the alarm input severity.
3 In the Alarm Output section:
i

In the Admin field, select Enable or Disable to activate or disable he

alarm output.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 374 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

ii In the Group field, specify the group of alarms that will trigger an
alarm output:
Communication - Alarms related to traffic: radio, Ethernet line,
TDM line
Quality of Service - Alarms related to QoS.
Processing - Alarms related to software: configuration, resets,
corrupted files
Equipment - Alarms related to hardware, fan, RFU mute, power
supply, and inventory.
Environmental - Alarms relating to temperature.
All groups - All of the above groups.
4 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 375 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

23.4

User Guide

Configuring Traps
The Trap manager page is used to configure trap forwarding parameters.
Each line in the Trap Managers table displays the setup for a manager defined
in the system.
To configure a trap manager:
1 Select Configuration > General > Traps Configuration. The Traps
Configuration page opens.
2 Click the + at the beginning of the line to expand a trap manager.

3 From the Traps admin drop down list, select Enable or Disable to enable
or disable the selected trap manager.
4 In the Trap manager field, enter the destination IP address. Traps will be
sent to this IP address.
5 In the Manager name field, enter the trap managers name.
6 In the Trap port field, enter the number of the port through which traps
will be sent.
7 In the SNMP trap Community field, enter the SNMP community name.
8 In the Heartbeat period field, specify the number of minutes between
generating heartbeat traps.
9 Optionally, in the Trap CLLI field, enter free text that will be sent with the
trap.
10 In the Trap status change filter field, select On if you want a trap to be
sent to the manager you defined only when the most-severe alarm of the
unit changes. For example, if the most severe status in the system is
warning, and a new warning alarm is raised, no trap will be sent (if you
selected On for this option). On the other hand, if the new alarm has the
severity major, a trap will be sent to the manager you defined.
11 In the Send traps for alarms with severity field, select which severity
levels of alarms will be forwarded.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 376 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

23.5

User Guide

Configuring Power Supply Alarms

Some IP-10G/E systems are equipped with a dual-power input. In dual-power
IDUs, the system indicates whether received voltage in each connector is
above or below the threshold power (approximately 40.5v). This is shown in
two ways:
The LED (and its Web EMS representation) is only on if the voltage is
above the threshold.
If voltage is below the threshold, a low-input-voltage alarm is raised
You can configure the system not to raise an alarm in case of under-voltage for
either power input. If the alarm is not disabled, a permanent alarm will exist
for a power input that is not in use.
To disable a power supply alarm:
1 Select Configuration > General > Dual Power Supply. The Dual Power
Supply page opens.

2 For a power supply input that is not in use, select Disable.

3 Click Apply.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 377 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

23.6

User Guide

Viewing Current Alarms

To view current alarms:
1 Select Faults > Current Alarms. The Current Alarms page opens.

In the Current Alarms table:

Date & Time - The date and time the alarm was triggered appear in the
column.
Severity - The color of the icon indicates the severity of the alarm.
Module - The module that generated the alarm.
Description - A description of the alarm.
To view details of a specific alarm:
1 In the Current Alarms table, click + in the left column to open the alarm
details.

Probable Cause Displays the most likely cause of the alarm.

Corrective Actions Displays recommended actions to clear the alarm.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 378 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

23.7

User Guide

Viewing the Event Log

The Event log displays a list of historical events and alarm information.
The log shows the last 200 events and alarms that occurred. If the number of
events/alarms exceeds 200, the oldest events/alarms will be removed.
To view the event log:
1 Select Faults > Event Log. The Event Log page opens.

In the Event Log table:

# - Indicates the number of the event/alarm.

Date & Time - Indicates the date and time the event/alarm was triggered.
Severity - Indicates the alarm severity.
Module - Indicates the module that generated the event/alarm.
State - Indicates the event/alarm status [Raised or Cleared].

Description Provides a description of the event/alarm.

To clear the event log, click Clear.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 379 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

23.8

User Guide

Monitoring the IDU-RFU Interface

In the IDU-RFU Interface Monitoring page, you can monitor the IDU-RFU
traffic.
To view communication errors:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance > IDU-RFU Interface Monitoring.
The IDU-RFU Interface Monitoring page opens.

In the IDU-RFU Communication errors section:

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 385 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

23.10 Troubleshooting Protection

This section includes:

Switchover Triggers
Copy-to-Mate
Mismatch Mechanism

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 386 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

23.10.1 Switchover Triggers

Switchover triggers are described in the following table, according to their
priority, with the highest priority triggers on top.
Priority

Fault

Remark

Mate Power OFF

Lockout

Does not persist after cold-reset.

Force Switch

Does not persist after cold-reset.

Local Radio LOF

TDM Line LOS / SFP LOS / GBE LOC

Electrical GBE LOC is configurable. Only

active unit is monitored in this case
This fault is only relevant for IP-10G.

Change Remote request due to "Radio LOF"

Local Radio Excessive BER

Configurable. Irrelevant in ACM adaptive

mode

Change Remote due to Radio Excessive BER

Irrelevant in ACM adaptive mode

Manual Switch

23.10.2 Copy-to-Mate
In order to synchronize the configurations of both local and mate units, a
"copy-to-mate" command must be issued by the user on the Active unit. The
copy-to-mate command is required whenever a "Configuration Mismatch"
alarm is raised.
When issuing a copy-to-mate command on the Active unit, all configuration
data and files are copied from the Active (local) unit to the Standby (mate)
unit, and a cold-reset is automatically performed on the Standby unit.
Once the configuration of the units has been synchronized, all radio
parameters are automatically copied from the Active unit to the Standby unit
upon any user configuration.
If the configuration is set via CLI, a write command must be used in order to
save the new configuration to the disk. Only if the configuration is saved can it
be copied to the mate IDU.
In the CLI, adding the argument showDiff to the copy-to-mate command
displays extra details about the progress of the process.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 387 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

23.10.3 Mismatch Mechanism

This mechanism is responsible for detecting if there is a mismatch between
the configurations of the local and mate units. This mechanism is activated by
the system periodically and independently of other protection mechanisms, at
fixed intervals. It is activated asynchronously in both the Active and the
Standby units. Once the mismatch mechanism detects a configuration
mismatch, it raises a "Mate Configuration Mismatch" alarm. Once the Active
and Standby configurations are identical, the mechanism clears the "Mate
Configuration Mismatch" alarm.
In order to determine which parameters do not match between the units, the
user can use the CLI to query the details of the mismatch using the cfgmismatch-details command.
If the configuration is adjusting using the CLI, the user must enter a "write"
command in order to save the new configuration to the disk. The mismatch
mechanism only checks mismatches that have been saved to configuration
files.
The mismatch mechanism does not display the specific parameters that
caused the mismatch.
Note:

It is important to enter a copy-to-mate command

whenever a "Mate Configuration Mismatch" alarm has been
raised, and to avoid configuring specific parameters in
attempting to clear this alarm.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 388 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

23.11 XPIC Recovery Mechanism

Related topics:

Configuring XPIC
XPIC and 2+2 Protection

The XPIC recovery mechanism is based on signal cancellation and assumes

that both of the transmitted signals are received (with a degree of polarity
separation). If for some reason, such as hardware failure, one of the carriers
stops receiving a signal, the working carrier may be negatively affected by the
received signals, which cannot be canceled in this condition.
The purpose of the XPIC recovery mechanism is to save the working link while
attempting to recover the faulty polarization.
The mechanism works as follows:

The indication that the recovery mechanism has been activated is a loss of
modem preamble lock, which takes place at SNR~10dB.
The first action taken by the recovery mechanism is to cause the remote
transmitter of the faulty carrier to mute, thus eliminating the disturbing
signal and saving the working link.
Following this, the mechanism attempts at intervals to recover the failed
link. In order to do so, it takes the following actions:
The remote transmitter is un-muted for a brief period.
The recovery mechanism probes the link to find out if it has recovered.
If not, it again mutes the remote transmitter.
This action is repeated in exponentially larger intervals. This is meant
to quickly bring up both channels in case of a brief channel fade,
without seriously affecting the working link if the problem has been
caused by a hardware failure.
The number of recovery attempts is user-configurable

Note:

Every such recovery attempt will cause a brief traffic hit in

the working link.

All the time intervals mentioned above (recovery attempt time, initial time
between attempts, multiplication factor for attempt time, number of retries)
can be configured by the user, but it is recommended to use the default values.
The XPIC recovery mechanism is enabled by default, but can be disabled by
the user.

23.11.1 XPIC Events

The XPIC events are meant to make system debugging in the field easier, and
provide the user with a detailed description of the various steps and actions
taken during the XPIC recovery process.
However, in a recovery scenario, so many events could be raised that they will
fill the alarms log; they can be disabled by the user.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 389 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

The following is a list of events that can be raised by the XPIC mechanism:

Condition for XPIC not met: This event will include a bitmap error code
indicating precisely which condition was not met. The list of conditions
and codes is as follows:

Bitmask Code

Meaning

0x1

Local user configuration is not valid with XPIC

0x2

Mate user configuration is not valid with XPIC

0x4

Local IDU does not support XPIC

0x8

Mate IDU does not support XPIC

0x10

XPIC is not enabled in mate

0x20

Local and Mate scripts are different

0x40

Local RFU does not support XPIC

0x80

Mate RFU does not support XPIC

0x100

Local and Mate RFU type are different

0x200

Local and Mate Tx freq are different

0x400

Local and Mate Rx freq are different

Note:

Depending on the precise timing, these conditions may be

listed in a single event (with the bitmask summing up all the
conditions) or in several events, each with a different
condition.

XPIC state machine events: The following events indicate changes in the
XPIC state:
Remote TX Mute (try # n) was Set by XPIC Recovery on Slot # n
Remote TX Un-mute (try # n ) was Set by XPIC Recovery on Slot # n
XPIC Recovery Started on Slot # n
XPIC Recovery Finished Successfully on Slot # n
XPIC Recovery Finished Unsuccessfully on Slot # n. Remote Mute was
Set
XPIC Recovery on Slot # n Stopped Due to an External Event
XPIC Recovery (XRSM) was disabled
XPIC Recovery (XRSM) was enabled

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 390 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

23.12 Activating the All-ODU Enclosure

The All ODU page allows you to activate support for the All ODU enclosure.
When enabled, the enclosure controller can then be powered to monitor fan
failure alarms.
External Alarm Input #1 becomes an output, which together with 3.3V is
used to drive the enclosures electronic board.
External Alarm Input #2 is set with a specific text & severity, and is used to
monitor any enclosure fan failure, and to raise an alarm for it (polarity
change was required to adapt it to the enclosure behavior).
To enable All ODU support:

1 Select Configuration > General > All ODU. The All ODU page opens.
2 In the All ODU section, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable the
All ODU interface.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 391 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

24.

User Guide

Appendix A CLI Reference

This appendix includes:

Using the CLI

CLI Commands and Parameters
Basic System Configuration Using CLI

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 392 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

24.1

User Guide

Using the CLI

This section explains how to work with the Command Line Interface (CLI).
The CLI is used to perform configuration and obtain system statistical and
performance information.
Using the CLI, you can perform configuration operations for single units, as
well as configure several units with a single batch command.
In a stacked configuration, all commands are available both in the main and
extension units unless otherwise stated.

24.1.1 Access rights

CLI access is granted for the following user groups:

Viewer - This user only has read-only access. The user can only view
parameters and their values, not modify them.
Operator - This user has read-write access. The user can read parameters
and their values, and modify them. However, this user cannot add or
remove other users.
Admin - This user has read-write access. The user can read parameters
and their values, modify them, and add/remove other users.
Technician - This user has read-write access to the OS CLI.

User access is controlled by the system Administrator and configured via the
Management command group.

24.1.2 Getting started

To log in to the CLI:
1 Power on your PC.
2 Make sure that your PC is connected to the management port on the front
panel of the IDU.
3 Open the telnet application. Type telnet <IP address of the unit>
and press Enter.
For a first-time login, login using:
User: Admin

Password: Admin

When using the Hyper Terminal, you should set the terminal speed (in your PC
terminal configuration) to 155200 kbps.
In addition, it is recommended to select the VT-100 terminal type and set the
terminal size to 24 rows, 80 columns.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 393 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.1.3 Getting help

Once you are logged in, you can go to a main command group and its
subgroups, type the command you want, and press Tab twice for a list of
possible parameter values.
In addition, you can type a command and then type a question mark (?) for
location-specific information for the command. For example, for the set
command, typing set ? and pressing Enter will display a list of optional
parameters and a help line.
Wherever you are in the command tree, you can obtain a list of available
commands by typing Help or (?).
Available commands vary according to location in the CLI tree and the type of
user.

24.1.4 Basic commands

The following basic commands are available when you first log in, if you
belong to the Operator user group:
Command

Function

List entities

get

Get parameter

set

Set parameter

help

Help

Change directory

exit

Exit CLI

logout

Log out from CLI

cli-ver

CLI version

cls

Clear screen

shell

Enter secondary shell

write

Write the current switch configuration to the configuration file

show-tree

Show entity tree

find

Search for a string in the parameter name and information fields

lsp

List entity parameters and commands

echo

Echoing free text to the console

In addition, you can use the up/down arrow keys, or the q key, when the
word END appears at the end of the screen.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 394 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.1.5 Finding commands

At any point in the CLI tree, a quick way to find a command is to type find
string, and press Enter. For string you can type any word that you think is
relevant for a command.
For example, if you type find user, and press Enter, you would get a list of
commands relating to "user":
1) management/mng-services /users /add-user
<name> <group>

Add user

2) management/mng-services /users /delete-user Delete user

<name>
3) management/mng-services /users /show-users Show users

24.1.6 Command example

This example shows how to find a command within a subgroup, and then
execute the command. The example starts with the lsp (list parameters)
command, and ends with the activation of an interface loopback test.
----------------------------------------------IP10:/> cd diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback/
IP10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback> lsp
*********** configuration ********
timeout

rw Loopback timeout in minutes

* statuses ***

counter

ro Loopback time left

if-loopback

rw IF loopback activation

rfu-rf-loopback rw RFU RF Loopback Enable Command

IP10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback> set timeout 2
IP10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback> set if-loopback
off on
IP10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback> set if-loopback on
Caution: This action affects traffic.
This may cause permanent loss of Ethernet traffic & wayside.
Consider disabling or physically disconnecting the Ethernet
ports of the IDM and Wayside before the loopback activation.
Are you sure? (yes/no):yes
IP10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback>
-----------------------------------------------

Note:

Bridge-related commands need to be followed by a write

command to be saved. Otherwise, the commands will not be
saved following a reset in the system.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 395 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.1.7 Viewing the command tree

At any location within the command group structure, you can type show-tree
and press Enter for a list of all the commands in the group you are currently
in.
The following list appears when you type show-tree.
IP-10-SLOT-1:/>show-tree
management
mng-services
cfg-service
event-service
event-log
alarm-service
alarm-current
alarm-external
log-srv
security-log
pm-service
time-service
ntp
mng-software
users
radius
networking
ip-address
mng-protocols
snmp
platform
inventory
daughter-board
license
idc-board
fpga
mate-idu
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 396 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

all-odu
shelf-manager
multi-radio
radio-diversity
remote-idu
remote-co
remote-cl
radio
xpic
remote-cl
framer
mrmc
tdm-radio-pm[1-84]
modem
rfu
rfu-sw-upload
rfu-co
rfu-cl
rfic
enhanced-hc
interfaces
auxiliary
user-channel
eow
wayside
sync
ethernet
bridge
eth-port[1-8]
pdh
port-group
e1t1-port[1-16]
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 397 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

lag-port
trails
pw-tdm
pwc
tdm-ports
clock-1588
ds0-bundles
tunnels
pw-profiles
pws
eth-port
service-oam
diagnostics
rmon
loopback
line-loopback
radio-loopback

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 398 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

24.2

User Guide

CLI Commands and Parameters

The following tables list the commands you can use in each command group
and sub group.
Note:

When you enter a group or sub group, you can type a

command and then press the Tab key twice (or type a
question mark) for a list of values relevant to that command.

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

IP-10G

echo

Command

Viewer

IP-10G

write

Command

Write the current switch

configuration into
configuration file.

Operator

Access

24.2.1 management
24.2.1.1 mng-services
Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

mng-services

Ping

Command

Ping utility.

Operator

mng-services

telnet

Command

Telnet utility.

Operator

Access

24.2.1.2 cfg-service
Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

cfg-service

set-to-default

Command

Reset to factory default

configuration.

Operator

Read-write

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

event-log

clear

Command

Clear event log.

Operator

Read-write

event-log

event-to-syslog

Parameter

Add event to system log.

Operator

Read-write

24.2.1.3 event-service
event-log

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 399 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

event-log

show

Command

Show the event log.

Viewer

Read-only

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

24.2.1.4 alarm-service
Group
Command
alarm-service

alarms-set-to-default

Command

Set all user defined

configurations to default.

Operator

alarm-service

alarms-user-definedfields

Parameter

Enable or disable user

defined alarm fields.

Operator

alarm-service

edit-alarm

Command

Edit the alarm severity or

description.

Operator

alarm-service

show-alarm

Command

Show alarm information.

Operator

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

alarm-current

most-severe

Parameter

Indicates the most severe Viewer

alarm in the system.

Read-write

alarm-current

show

Command

Show current alarms.

Viewer

Read-write

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

alarm-external

external-input[5]

Parameter

Indicates the current

status of the external
alarm input.

Viewer

Read-only

alarm-external

externalinput.admin[5]

Parameter

Enables or disables
external alarm input.

Operator

Read-write

alarm-external

externalinput.severity[5]

Parameter

Configures the external

input alarm severity.

Operator

Read-write

alarm-external

external-input.text[5]

Parameter

Configures the input

alarm description.

Operator

Read-write

alarm-external

external-output

Parameter

Indicates the current

status of the external
alarm output.

Viewer

Read-only

Read-write

alarm-current

Access

alarm-external

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 400 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

alarm-external

external-output.admin Parameter

Description

Privilege

Access

Enables / disables the

external output alarm.

Operator

Read-write

When Enabled
If no alarms are raised,
the normally open (N.O.)
contact will be opened,
while the normally closed
(N.C.) contact will be
connected to the COM
contact.
When an alarm is raised,
or the system power is
OFF, the N.O. will be
connected to the COM
contact, while the N.C.
contact will remain
opened.
When Test option is
selected, the dry contacts
behave as an alarm is
raised in the system.
alarm-external

external-output.group Parameter

Configures the external

alarm output groups.

Operator

Read-write

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

pm-service

clear-entire-pm

Command

Clear all PMs.

Operator

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

24.2.1.5 pm-service

24.2.1.6 time-service
Group
Command
time-service

dst-end-day

Parameter

The end day of daylight

saving time.

Operator

Read-write

time-service

dst-end-month

Parameter

The end month of daylight Operator

saving time.

Read-write

time-service

dst-offset

Parameter

Daylight saving offset.

Read-write

Operator

For a value different then

0, at the starting date of
daylight saving time the
time will jump forward in
this value.
At the end date of the
daylight saving time, the
time will jump backwards
in this value.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 401 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

time-service

dst-start-day

Parameter

The start day of daylight

saving time.

Operator

Read-write

Returned strings:
The IP address of the
reference NTP server,
according to IPv4/v6
format.
LOCAL if synchronized
on local clock.
N/A if not synchronized.
Valid only when admin is
disabled.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 402 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.2.1.7 mng-software
Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

mng-software

abort-timer

Command

Aborts a timed installation Admin

process.

Access

Note that this command

will not stop an
installation that is already
in progress.
mng-software

change-serverpassword

Command

Change the remote

server password.

Admin

mng-software

cleanup

Command

Remove old or duplicated Operator

(kernel) packages,
repackaged files, and
downgrade files.

mng-software

common-version-idu

Parameter

Identifies which
application package
software version is
installed on the IDU.

Viewer

mng-software

common-version-rfu

Parameter

Identifies which
application package
software version is
installed on the RFU.

Viewer

mng-software

common-version-rfudowngrade

Parameter

Indicates the software

Viewer
version of the downgrade
package on the RFU.

mng-software

common-version-rfuupgrade

Parameter

Indicates the software

version of the upgrade
package on the RFU.

Viewer

mng-software

downgrade

Command

Downgrade application
packages to an older
version (downloaded to
special downgrade
directory).

Admin

mng-software

download

Command

Download updated
Operator
software packages from a
remote server.
Note that software
installation is performed
locally. Software cannot
be installed directly from
a remote server.

mng-software

download-status

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Status of the software

download.

Viewer

Read-only

Page 403 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

mng-software

installation-timer

Parameter

The number of minutes

for timed software
installation operations to
this unit.

Operator

Read-only

mng-software

install-status

Parameter

Status of the software

installation.

Viewer

Read-only

mng-software

kernel-reinstall

Command

Re-install last installed

Linux kernel package.

Admin

Recommended for
corrupt kernel restoration.
mng-software

package-download

Command

Download a new software Admin

package.
Note: specify the
package name without
the version number. For
example, 'abc', not 'abc0.0.1'.

mng-software

package-install

Command

Specify the software

package to install.

Admin

Note: specify the

package name without
the version number. For
example, 'abc', not 'abc0.0.1'.
mng-software

package-uninstall

Command

Uninstall a software
package.

Admin

mng-software

rollback

Command

Rollback to the previous

software version.

Admin

Note that any software

upgrades to the IDU that
were installed after
upgrading to the newer
version will also be rolled
back.
Note also that a rollback
will not revert a
downgrade operation. To
rollback a downgrade,
use the upgrade
command instead!
mng-software

running-version-idu

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

The running IDU software Viewer

version identified at the
last cold restart.

Read-only

Page 404 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

mng-software

server-login

Parameter

User name for logging in

to the remote server.

Operator

Read-write

mng-software

server-url

Parameter

URL of the remote

software update server
where software updates
are located.

Operator

Read-write

mng-software

show-packages

Command

Show available software

packages.

Operator

mng-software

timer-downgrade

Command

Starts the installation

Admin
timer for downgrading to
an older software version
(which has already been
downloaded).

mng-software

timer-rollback

Command

Starts the installation

timer for rolling back to
the previous software
version.

Admin

Note that any software

timer-upgrade

Command

Starts the installation

timer for upgrading to a
downloaded software
version.

Operator

mng-software

time-to-install

Parameter

The number of minutes

left before starting a
scheduled software
installation operation on
this unit.

Viewer

mng-software

upgrade

Command

Upgrade installed or
requested software from
available downloaded
software packages.

Operator

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Read-only

Page 405 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

mng-software

verify-packages

Command

Verify the version of the

installed software
packages.

Operator

Access

Note that some packages

may be installed but not
running (for example, on
an IP10-G without a
daughter-board).
mng-software

version-packagename

Parameter

Common (version holder) Viewer

package name

mng-software

versions-idu

Command

Indicates the application

version of the installed
software package on the
IDU.

Operator

mng-software

versions-rfu

Command

Indicates the application

version of the installed
software package on the
RFU.

Operator

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

add-user

Command

Add a user to the system. Admin

24.2.1.8 users
Group
users

Read-only

Access

Syntax:
add-user <user>
<privilege> <number of
days for password aging>
[account expired YYYYMM-DD]
users

blocking-fail-logintime

Parameter

The number of minutes

Admin
for blocking access to the
system after exceeding
the configured threshold
for consecutive failed
logins.

Read-write

Optional values: 1-1440

users

change-password

Command

Change a user's
password.

Viewer

Syntax:
change-password
<username> <oldpassword> <newpassword>
(separated with spaces)
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 406 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

users

delete-user

Command

Delete a user from the

system.

Admin

Access

Syntax:
delete-user <user>
users

idle-login-time

Parameter

Define the number of

days before deleting an
idle user account.

Admin

Read-write

Admin

Read-write

Optional values: [0-90]

0 disables automatic
deletion of idle accounts.
users

Parameter

Specify the number of

consecutive failed logins
before blocking a user
from attempting to login
again.
Optional values: [0-10]
Zero (0) disables blocking
users after failed login
attempts.

users

password-first-loginchange

Parameter

Specifies whether a user Admin

will be required to change
the password when
logging in for the first
time.

users

show-users

Command

Show existing user

accounts.

Admin

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

security-log

view-security-log

Command

View the security log

entries.

Admin

Type

Description

Privilege

Parameter

Enables or disables the

Operator
Auto Negotiation option,
on all management ports.

24.2.1.9 log-srv
security-log

24.2.1.10
networking
Group
Command
Networking

auto-negotiation

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Access

Access
Read-write

Page 407 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

networking

block-managementtowards-line

Parameter

Enable / disable blocking Operator

in-band management
frames in a Smart Pipe
application from
egressing via the
Ethernet line interface.

Read-write

networking

capacity

Parameter

Configures the
Operator
management ports range
of capacity.

Read-write

networking

duplex

Parameter

Configures half or full port Operator

duplex value on all
management ports.

Read-write

networking

ethernet-rate

Parameter

Configures the Ethernet

rate on all management
ports. (Mbps)

Operator

Read-write

networking

number-of-ports

Parameter

Configures the number of Operator

management ports.

Read-write

networking

type

Parameter

Configures the port

management type.

Operator

Read-write

(in-band or out-of-band)
networking

vlan

24.2.1.11
ip-address
Group
Command

Parameter

In-Band management
VLAN ID [1-4090]

Operator

Read-write

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

ip-address

default-gateway

Parameter

Configures the local

default gateway.

Operator

Read-write

ip-address

hw-address

Parameter

Indicates the MAC

address used for
management (related to
the management IP
address of the system).

Viewer

Read-only

ip-address

Parameter

Configures the local IP

address.

Operator

Read-write

ip-address

subnet-mask

Parameter

Configures the local

subnet mask.

Operator

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 408 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

24.2.1.12

User Guide

floating-ip-address

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

floating-ipaddress

floating-ip

Parameter

Indicates the floating IP

used when the system is
in protection mode.

Operator

Read-write

The floating IP address

must differ from both the
system's management IP
address and the mate
unit's address.
Additionally, both units
must be in the same
subnet.
Using 0.0.0.0 disables the
active unit from using a
floating IP address.
floating-ipaddress

floating-ip-garp-retries Parameter

Specify the floating IP

garp number of retries.

Admin

floating-ipaddress

set-fip-lock-timer

Command

Set the floating IP lock

timer.

Operator

Type

Description

Privilege

24.2.1.13
mng-protocols
Group
Command

Access

mng-protocols

communicationinactivity-timeout

Parameter

Define the
communication inactivity
timeout period for the
management interfaces.

Admin

mng-protocols

status-show

Command

Show management
protocol status.

Operator

mng-protocols

telnet-admin

Parameter

Enables or disables the

Telnet server on the
network element.

Admin

Read-write

mng-protocols

telnet-status

Parameter

Indicates the Telnet

service status.

Viewer

Read-only

mng-protocols

web-admin

Parameter

Enables / disables secure Admin

(HTTP/S) web access
protocol.

Read-write

mng-protocols

web-ca-certificateadmin

Parameter

Enables / disables the

Admin
Web Certificate Authority
(CA) digital certificate.

Read-write

mng-protocols

web-inactivity-timeout Parameter

Configures the number of Operator

minutes of allowed Web
inactivity before
automatically logging out.

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 409 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

mng-protocols

web-protocol

Parameter

Specify secure or
standard web protocol.

Admin

Read-write

HTTP and HTTPS

mng-protocols

web-restart

Command

Restart the web server.

mng-protocols

web-status

Parameter

Indicates the web service Viewer

status.

Read-only

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

snmp

admin

Parameter

Enable / disable SNMP

access.

Admin

Read-write

snmp

change-user-settings Command

Modify the SNMPv3 user

security level, username,
and password settings.

Admin

24.2.1.14
snmp
Group

Admin

SNMPv3 passwords must

be at least eight
characters long.
snmp

mib-version

Parameter

Indicates which private

MIB version is required
for managing the unit.

Viewer

Read-only

snmp

read-community

Parameter

Configures the password

string for the SNMP read
community.

Operator

Read-write

snmp

status

Parameter

Indicates the SNMP

service status.

Viewer

Read-only

snmp

status-show

Command

Indicates the SNMP

service status.

Operator

snmp

trap-admin[4]

Parameter

Enables / disables a
specific manager.

Operator

Read-write

The unit will not send

traps to a disabled trap
manager.
snmp

trap-clli[4]

Parameter

Configures the Common Operator

Language Location
Identifier (CLLI), a
configurable string
specifying the type and
location of the unit, that is
added to forwarded traps.

Read-write

snmp

trap-community[4]

Parameter

Configures the trap

manager community.

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Operator

Page 410 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

snmp

trap-heartbeat[4]

Parameter

Specify the number of

Operator
minutes for the heartbeat
trap interval.

Access
Read-write

Zero (0) disables sending

heartbeat traps to the
specified trap manager.
snmp

trap-manager[4]

Parameter

Configures the IP address Operator

of the target trap
manager.

Read-write

snmp

trap-name[4]

Parameter

Configures the name of

the target trap manager.

Operator

Read-write

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

snmp

v3-security-mode

Parameter

Configures the SNMPv3

security mode.

Viewer

Read-only

SNMPv3 security modes:

No security
Authentication
Authentication privacy
Default:
Authentication
snmp

v3-username

Parameter

SNMPv3 username.

Viewer

Read-only

snmp

version

Parameter

SNMP version.

Admin

Read-write

Options:
V1, V2c, or V3
snmp

write-community

24.2.1.15
platform
Group
Command
platform

fan-unit-type

Parameter

Configures the password Operator

string for the SNMP write
community.

Read-write

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

Parameter

number of physical PDS
ports.

Read-only

platform

max-physical-sdhports

Parameter

Configures the maximum Viewer

number of physical SDH
ports

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 412 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

platform

power-supply-1alarm-admin

Parameter

Enable or disable the

power supply alarm on
one of the power supply
units.

Operator

Read-write

This parameter is relevant

only for IDU with more
than one power supply
units.
platform

power-supply-2alarm-admin

Parameter

power-supply-2-alarmadmin

Operator

platform

ps1-led

Parameter

ps1-led

Viewer

platform

ps2-led

Parameter

ps2-led

Viewer

platform

slot-label

Parameter

Configures the slot label, Operator

a user defined description
for the module in the slot.

Read-write

platform

system-contactperson

Parameter

Enter the name of the

person to be contacted
when a problem with the
system occurs.

Read-write

platform

system-description

Parameter

Configures additional
Viewer
identification details about
the system.

Read-only

platform

system-location

Parameter

Specify the physical

location of the node.

Operator

Read-write

platform

system-location-bay

Parameter

System location bay

Operator

Read-write

platform

system-location-shelf Parameter

System location shelf

Operator

Read-write

platform

system-name

Configures a name for the Operator

node.

Read-write

Parameter

Operator

By convention, this is the

nodes fully qualified
domain name.
platform

system-services

24.2.1.16
Inventory
Group
Command

Parameter

Number of services
provided by the system
according to the rfc3418.

Viewer

Read-only

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

inventory

board-modules

Parameter

Board modules

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

board-sub-type

Parameter

Board sub-type

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

board-type

Parameter

Board type

Viewer

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 413 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

inventory

chain-firmware

Parameter

Chain firmware

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

chain-hardwarefeatures

Parameter

Chain hardware features

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

chain-sub-type

Parameter

Chain sub-type

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

chain-type

Parameter

Chain type

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

comments

Parameter

Text description of the

board

Operator

Read-write

inventory

company-name

Parameter

Company name

Admin

Read-write

inventory

date-code

Parameter

Date of board testing

Viewer
(number of seconds from
1/1/1970)

Read-only

inventory

firmware

Parameter

Firmware

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

hardware

Parameter

Hardware

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

hass-number

Parameter

Number of hass testing

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

hw-feature

Parameter

HW features

Parameter

The type of IDC

Viewer

Read-only

Admin

Read-write

inventory

modem-firmware

Parameter

The firmware of the

modem

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

modem-hardwarefeatures

Parameter

The hardware features of Viewer

the modem

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 414 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

inventory

modem-sub-type

Parameter

The sub-type of the

modem

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

modem-system-rate

Parameter

The frequency of the

clock for the PVG

Viewer

Number of Radio
interfaces

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

num-of-sfp-interfaces Parameter

Number of SFP interfaces Viewer

Read-only

inventory

num-of-tdm-interfaces Parameter

Number of TDM
interfaces

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

num-of-working-hours Parameter

Counter of working hours Viewer

of the board

Read-only

inventory

part-number

Parameter

Part number of the

application in the board

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

pic-version

Parameter

The version of the pic

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

production-inventory- Parameter
version

The production inventory

version

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

product-name

Parameter

Product name

Admin

Read-write

inventory

rx-master-iq-delay

Parameter

RX IQ delay - Rx Master
delay

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

rx-master-iq-delayindex-in-fdf-table

Parameter

RX IQ Delay - Rx Master
index in fdf table

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

rx-slave-iq-delay

Parameter

RX IQ delay - Rx slave
delay

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

rx-slave-iq-delayindex-in-fdf-table

Parameter

RX IQ delay - Rx slave
index in fdf table

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

serial-number

Parameter

The serial number of the

board

Viewer

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 415 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

inventory

signature

Parameter

The signature of the

board

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

spare1

Parameter

Spare 1

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

spare2

Parameter

Spare 2

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

spare3

Parameter

Spare 3

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

total-num-ofinterfaces

Parameter

Total number of
interfaces

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

tx-iq-delay

Parameter

TX IQ delay - TX delay

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

tx-iq-delay-index-infdf-table

Parameter

TX IQ Delay - Tx index in Viewer

fdf table

Read-only

inventory

type-of-tdm-interfaces Parameter

Type of TDM interfaces

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

xc-firmware

The firmware of the XC

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

xc-hardware-features Parameter

The hardware features of Viewer

the XC

Read-only

inventory

xc-sub-type

Parameter

The sub-type of the XC

Viewer

Read-only

inventory

xc-type

Parameter

The type of XC

Viewer

Read-only

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

24.2.1.17
daughter-board
Group
Command

Parameter

daughter-board

board-sub-type

Parameter

Viewer

Read-only

daughter-board

board-type

Parameter

Viewer

Read-only

daughter-board

comments

Parameter

Text description about the Viewer

daughter board

Read-only

daughter-board

date-code

Parameter

Date of daughter board

testing (number of
seconds from 1/1/1970)

Viewer

Read-only

daughter-board

firmware

Parameter

Viewer

Read-only

daughter-board

hardware

Parameter

Viewer

Read-only

daughter-board

hass-number

Parameter

Viewer

Read-only

daughter-board

num-of-interfaces

Parameter

Viewer

Read-only

daughter-board

num-of-working-hours Parameter

Counter of working hours Viewer

of the Daughter board

Read-only

daughter-board

part-number

Part number of the

application in the
daughter board

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Number of hass DB
testing

Viewer

Page 416 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

daughter-board

running-firmwareversion

Parameter

daughter-board

serial-number

Parameter

24.2.1.18
license
Group
Command

Privilege

Access

Viewer

Read-only

The serial number of the

daughter board

Viewer

Read-only

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

Parameter

Indicates whether user of Viewer

use of dynamic ACM
radio scripts is allowed.

Read-only

Indicates whether
asymmetrical scripts are
licensed for use.

Viewer

Read-only

Viewer

Read-only

license

acm-license

license

asymmetrical-scripts- Parameter
license

Description

demo license.

Operator

Read-write

This is a temporary
license that allows access
to maximum capacity and
all features.
license

demo-timer

Parameter

Indicates the number of

Viewer
remaining hours for demo
mode.

Read-only

The demo license is

limited to 60 days.
An event will be raised 10
days before expiration.
license

enhancedcompression-license

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Indicates whether header Viewer

compression is allowed.

Page 417 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

license

license-code

Parameter

Configures the license

code that determines the
units license rights.

Operator

Read-write

license

license-type

Parameter

Configures the units

license type: Default,
Normal, or Demo.

Viewer

Read-only

Indicates whether the

Viewer
network resiliency license
is allowed.

Read-only

The license type

determines the availability
of system features.
license

network-resiliencylicense

Parameter

This license allows

configuration of features
that make use of loop
network topologies such
as ring RSTP and SNCP
(TDM trails protection).
Note that for systems in
which these features
were enabled in previous
versions, the features will
be allowed even if no
resiliency alarm is
purchased.
license

per-usage-license

Parameter

Indicates whether the per- Viewer

usage license is allowed.

Read-only

This license allows

unlimited usage of all
features in the system.
Users are billed according
to actual use. The system
alerts users when a
chargeable feature is
activated.
license

signature

Parameter

license signature

Viewer

Read-only

license

switch-applicationlicense

Parameter

Allows use of Managed

and Metro switch
Ethernet applications.

Viewer

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 418 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

license

syncu-license

Parameter

Indicates whether the

synchronization unit
license is allowed.

Viewer

Read-only

Viewer

Read-only

Viewer

Read-only

This license allows

configuration of external
source as a clock source
for synchronous Ethernet
output, provided that the
IDUs hardware supports
synchronization).
If this license is not
installed, the Ethernet
clock source can only be
a local (internal) clock.
license

tdm-capacity-license

Parameter

Limits the bandwidth of

the radio script that can
be loaded.
Applies only if the TDMonly license is disabled.

license

tdm-capacity-value

Parameter

Indicates the number of

TDM trails per radio
allowed by the current
license.
The TDM capacity value
is relevant only if the TDM
Capacity license is
enabled.

license

tm-license

Parameter

Indicates whether
Enhanced QoS is
allowed.

Viewer

license

validation-number

Parameter

Indicates the license

validation number.

Viewer

24.2.1.19

idc-board

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

idc-board

change-userpassword

Command

Change the user

password for the current
FTP session.

Operator

Access

When using default user

name (anonymous), login
with PC (host) as the
password.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 419 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

idc-board

cli-script

Command

Execute, show or delete a Operator

CLI configuration script.

idc-board

cli-script-file-name

Parameter

archive storage operation.

Read-only

idc-board

create-archive

Command

Creates a configuration
archive file.

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Privilege

Operator

Access

Page 420 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

idc-board

create-csr-file

Command

Create a Certificate
Signing Request (CSR)
file, with optional
identification fields.
Common name
The identify name of the
element in the network
(e.g. IP address).

Admin

Read-write

Operator

Read-write

Viewer

Read-only

Organization
The legal name of the
organization.
Organizational Unit
The division of the
organization handling the
certificate.
City/Locality
The city where the
organization is located.
State/County/Region
The state/region where
the organization is
located.
Country
The two-letter ISO code
for the country where the
organization is location.
Email address
An email address used to
contact your organization.
The common name could
be network IP or the
FQDN of the element. If
the identifier is IP
address, then the creation
tool should support this
option.
idc-board

download-archive

Command

Get an archive file from

the PC (host) onto the
target.
Before activating this
command, make sure to
set host-ip, host-path,
user-name and userpassword.

idc-board

download-cli-scriptstatus

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Indicates the download

status of a CLI script.

Page 421 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

idc-board

download-securitystatus

Parameter

Indicates the download

status of the specified
security file.

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

file-transfer-protocol

Parameter

Specify the FTP protocol: Admin

SFTP or FTP.

Read-write

idc-board

host-ip

Parameter

Specify the IP address of Admin

an upload or download
operation.

Read-write

idc-board

host-path

Parameter

Relative path (under the Admin

ftp directory) on the host
where the archive is to be
stored.

Read-write

Default ftp path:

set // for Windows or set /
for Linux.
idc-board

hw-mode

Parameter

Hardware Mode
(standalone or xc)

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

idc-clli

Parameter

General CLLI field

Operator

Read-write

idc-board

idu-led

Parameter

IDU LED

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

install-archive

Command

Install the requested

archive file on target

Admin

Read-write

idc-board

kernel-modulesversion

Parameter

Identifies current kernelmodules package set

version

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

measurement-system Parameter

Measurement system

Operator

Read-write

idc-board

protection-led

Parameter

Protection LED

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

radio-led

Parameter

Radio LED

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

remote-led

Parameter

Remote LED

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

reset-idc-hw

Command

Reset the IDC - cold

(HW) reset

Operator

idc-board

rfu-led

Parameter

RFU LED

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

security-file-format

Parameter

The certificate format to

use for authentication.

Admin

Read-write

idc-board

security-file-name

Parameter

The security filename (for Admin

upload/download
purpose)

Read-write

idc-board

show-csr-file

Command

Show Certificate Signing

Request (CSR) file.

Admin

idc-board

slot-id

Parameter

Slot ID (within the XC

node)

Viewer

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Read-only

Page 422 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

idc-board

status-textindication[2]

Parameter

Internal status text

indication array

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

system-up-time

Parameter

System up time (in

hundredths of seconds)

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

temperature

Parameter

IDU temperature

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

unit-info-creationstatus

Parameter

Status of the unit-info

creation action

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

unit-info-uploadstatus

Parameter

Status of the archive

storage action

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

upload-archive

session

Admin

Read-write

idc-board

version

Parameter

IDC version

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

voltage-input

Parameter

Voltage input

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

warning-bannerdownload-status

Parameter

Operational status of a
warning banner
download.

Viewer

Read-only

idc-board

warning-banner-filename

Parameter

Specify the warning

banner file name to be
downloaded to the NE.

Admin

Read-write

idc-board

xc-role

Parameter

XC Role (Main or
Extension)

Viewer

Read-only

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

24.2.1.20
fpga
Group
fpga

main-fpga-running-fw- Parameter
version

Main FPGA running FW

Version

Viewer

Read-only

fpga

secondary-fpgarunning-fw-version

Secondary FPGA running Viewer

FW Version

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Page 423 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

24.2.1.21

User Guide

mate-idu

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

mate-idu

cfg-mismatch-details

Command

Show configuration
mismatch details.

Operator

mate-idu

copy-to-mate-cmd

Command

Copies configured
Operator
parameters from the
active to the standby unit.

mate-idu

Configures the mate IP

address.

Viewer

Read-only

Configures the mate MAC Viewer

address.

Read-only

Parameter

For 1+1 protection, it is

the mate IP address of
the protected card.
For 2+2 protection, it is
the mate IP address of
the protected unit.
mate-idu

mate-mac-address

Parameter

For 1+1 protection, it is

the mate MAC address of
the protected card.
For 2+2 protection, it is
the mate MAC address of
the protected unit.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 424 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

mate-idu

multi-unit-lag-admin

Command

Enables the Multi Unit

LAG feature.

Operator

Read-write

Operator

Read-write

It can only be activated in

Smart Pipe configuration,
and only when protection
is active (either 1+1 or
2+2).
mate-idu

protection-admin

Parameter

Activates or deactivates
protection.
For 2Plus2Hsb, this
parameter should be
configured in both the
main and extension slots.

mate-idu

protection-forceswitch

Parameter

Allows forcing a particular Operator

card to switch protection
mode.

Read-write

mate-idu

protection-lockout

Parameter

Locks the mode of each

card in the protection, to
ensure that a protection
switch will not occur.

Read-write

mate-idu

protection-mode

Parameter

Indicates whether the

Viewer
card is in active or
standby protection mode.

mate-idu

switchover-oncopper-loc

Parameter

Switchover on Copper
LOC

Admin

Type

Description

Privilege

Parameter

Enable / disable
Operator
configuring the unit as an
all outdoor unit.

Read-write

24.2.1.22
all-odu
Group
Command
all-odu

24.2.1.23

admin

Operator

Read-only

Access

shelf-manager

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

shelf-manager

alive-slotpopulation[6]

Parameter

Indicates if the specified

slot is occupied or not.

Viewer

Read-only

shelf-manager

archive-operatingunits

Parameter

Number of units still being Viewer

processed by the last
archive operation
command.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 425 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

shelf-manager

archives-operationstatus

Parameter

Shelf-wide configuration
archive operation status.

Viewer

Read-only

configuration archives
from the main unit's
storage device.

Admin

shelf-manager

extension-unitsprotection-admin[6]

Parameter

Activate or deactivate
protection for extension
units in the shelf.

level of the most severe
alarm for the module on
this slot.

Viewer

Read-only

shelf-manager

shelf-versions

Command

Show SW version
Viewer
information for all units in
a shelf.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Viewer

Read-only

Page 426 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

shelf-manager

slot-population[6]

Parameter

Indicates availability of
the specified slot.

Viewer

Read-only

shelf-manager

TDM-interfaces[6]

Parameter

Indicates the number of

available TDM interfaces
in the specified slot.

Viewer

Read-only

shelf-manager

unit-config-backup

Parameter

Create configuration
archives for all units in a
shelf.

Operator

Read-write

24.2.1.24

remote-idu

Group

Command

Type

Operator

Read-write

remote-idu

remote-link-id

Parameter

Remote IDU link ID

Operator

Read-write

remote-idu

remote-management- Parameter
type

Remote Management
type status

Operator

Read-write

remote-idu

remote-management- Parameter
vlan

Remote Management
VLAN ID configuration

Operator

Read-write

remote-idu

remote-most-severealarm

Remote most severe

alarm status

Viewer

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Page 427 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

remote-idu

remote-reset-idc-hw

Command

Reset the remote IDC cold (HW) reset

Operator

remote-idu

remote-rx-level

Parameter

Remote Rx level status

Viewer

Read-only

remote-idu

remote-slot-id

Parameter

Remote slot id

Viewer

Read-only

remote-idu

remote-subnet-mask

Parameter

Remote IDU subnet mask Operator

Read-write

remote-idu

remote-web-protocol

Parameter

Remote IDU web protocol Viewer

type

Read-only

Type

Description

Access

24.2.1.25
remote-cl
Group
Command

Privilege

Access

remote-cl

clear-device-error

Command

clear device error counter Operator

Read-write

remote-cl

device-error

Parameter

Device errors

Viewer

Read-only

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

24.2.1.26
remote-co
Group
Command
remote-co

clear-device-error

Command

clear device error counter Operator

Read-write

remote-co

device-error

Parameter

Device errors

Viewer

Read-only

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

24.2.1.27
radio-diversity
Group
Command
radio-diversity

clear-switch-counter

Command

Clears the switch counter. Operator

Read-write

radio-diversity

force-to-radio

Parameter

Defines which radio to

use for incoming traffic.

Operator

Read-write

Should only be used for

testing purposes.
radio-diversity

operation-mode

Parameter

parameters to indicate
whether the diversity
mechanism is in
operational mode
ON/OFF

Viewer

Read-only

radio-diversity

primary-radio

Parameter

Configures which IDU to

use as the primary radio
channel.

Operator

Read-write

radio-diversity

radio-diversity-type

Parameter

Configures the type of

hitless diversity to be
used.

Operator

Read-write

Relevant only when

protection is enabled.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 428 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

radio-diversity

receive-radio-traffic

Parameter

Indicates which radio is in Viewer

use for incoming traffic.

Read-only

radio-diversity

revertive-mode

Parameter

Determines whether
Operator
hitless switches are
revertive in the event that
the primary radio channel
does not have any errors.

Read-write

radio-diversity

revertive-timer

Parameter

Configures the minimum

amount of seconds
without a failure in the
primary radio, before
performing a revertive
switch.

Read-write

radio-diversity

switch-counter

Parameter

Indicates the number of

Viewer
diversity switches
performed since last time
counter was cleared.

Read-only

radio-diversity

switch-request

Command

Switch primary diversity

radio.

Operator

Read-write

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

Parameter

Enables/disables the
Multi-Radio feature for
this radio.

Operator

Read-write

24.2.1.28
multi-radio
Group
Command
multi-radio

admin

Privilege

Operator

Access

Notice that for the feature

to work it must be
configured in two
adjacent radios (odd and
even slots).
multi-radio

block-radio

Parameter

Allows stopping
distribution of data to
different radios in MultiRadio mode for
debugging purposes.

multi-radio

excessive-ber-admin

Parameter

Configures whether in
Operator
Multi-Radio mode data
stops being distributed to
the radio when there is an
excessive BER condition.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Operator

Page 429 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

multi-radio

shutdown-link-onradio-fault

Parameter

Enables / disables
initiation of automatic
state propagation upon a
failure in each one of the
radios.

Admin

multi-radio

signal-degrade-admin Parameter

Configures whether in
Operator
Multi-Radio mode data
stops being distributed to
the radio when there a
signal degraded
condition.

multi-radio

unit-role

Parameter

Configures the role of the Viewer

current unit(master or
slave).

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

radio

current-availablecapacity

Parameter

Indicates the available

capacity available for
Ethernet bandwidth.

Viewer

Read-only

radio

compression-mode

Command

Configures the type of

compression mode:
legacy or enhanced.

Operator

Read-write

radio

high-priority-ethernet- Parameter
bw

Configures the amount of Operator

bandwidth reserved for
high-priority Ethernet. (in
Kbps)

Read-write

radio

interface-alias

Free text used to describe Operator

the interface.

Read-write

24.2.1.29
radio
Group

Read-write

radio

radio-if-interfaceoperational-status

Parameter

Indicates the radios

operational status.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Viewer

Page 430 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

radio

radio-port-discardedoversize-frames

Parameter

Shows the oversize

Operator
discarded frames counter.
This counter will be reset
upon RMON reset.

Read-only

radio

sync-clock-sourcechannel

Parameter

VC number to be used
when source is VC.

Operator

Read-write

radio

traffic-priority-scheme Parameter

Configures the relative

priority of different traffic
streams.

Operator

Read-write

Configures the multi-radio Operator

mate position:

Read-write

High-tdm-over-highethernet priorities:
(1) TDM high priority (2)
Ethernet high priority (3)
TDM low priority (4)
Ethernet low priority.
High-Ethernet-over-tdm
priorities:
(1) Ethernet high priority
(2) TDM high priority (3)
TDM low priority (4)
Ethernet low priority.
Tdm-over-ethernet
priorities:
(1) TDM high priority (2)
TDM low priority (3)
Ethernet
radio

xpic-mr-mate-position Parameter

Horizontal or Vertical.

24.2.1.30

xpic

Group

Command

xpic

Description

Privilege

Access

debug-current-config- Parameter
status

Current XPIC
configuration status flag.

Viewer

Read-only

xpic

events-enable

Parameter

Enable logging of XPIC

events.

Operator

Read-write

xpic

slave-if-loopback

Parameter

Allows slave to update

master of IF loopback
event.

Viewer

Read-only

xpic

slave-mutetransmitter

Parameter

Allows slave to update

master of RFU mute
event.

Viewer

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Type

Page 431 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

xpic

slave-rfu-commstatus

Parameter

Allows slave to update

master of RFU comm
status event.

Viewer

Read-only

xpic

slave-xpic-enable

Parameter

Allows slave to update

master of XPIC enable
event.

Viewer

Read-only

xpic

slave-xpic-lop

Parameter

Allows master to request

slave XPIC LOP status.

Viewer

Read-only

xpic

slave-xpi-mute

Parameter

retry to re-establish XPIC
communications.

Read-write

xpic

xrsm-cfg-enable

Parameter

Enables the operation of

XRSM when LOP is
detected.

Operator

Read-write

xpic

xrsm-cfg-num-ofretries

Parameter

Number or XRSM
attempts to re-establish
XPIC communications.

Operator

Read-write

xpic

xrsm-cfg-retry-length- Parameter
mul-factor

Multiplication factor of
time between XRSM
retries.

Operator

Read-write

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

framer

link-id

Parameter

Link ID

Operator

Read-write

framer

oper-status

Parameter

Indicates the radios

operational status.

Viewer

Read-only

framer

radio-ber

Parameter

Current radio bit rate error Viewer

(BER).

Read-only

framer

radio-excessive-berthreshold

Parameter

Configures the radio's

Operator
Excessive BER threshold.

Read-write

24.2.1.31
framer
Group

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 432 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

framer

radio-pm-15mininterval[96]

Parameter

Radio 15 minute interval

performance monitor.

Viewer

Read-only

framer

radio-pm-24hourinterval[30]

Parameter

Radio 24 hour interval

performance monitor.

Viewer

Read-only

framer

radio-signal-degrade- Parameter
threshold

Configures the radio's

Operator
Signal Degrade threshold.

Read-write

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

acm-profile-degradethreshold

Parameter

Threshold for MRMC

profile degrade alarm
generation.

Operator

Read-write

24.2.1.32
mrmc
Group
mrmc

If enabled,, when an ACM

interrupt is received, the
software will initiate timer
when current profile is
below user defined
threshold.
If the profile changes but
remains above the
threshold, timer will be
stopped and no alarm will
be generated.
mrmc

adaptive-tx-poweradmin

Parameter

Enables/ disables the Tx

adaptive power option.

Viewer

Read-write

mrmc

adaptive-tx-powerreference-class

Parameter

Indicates the Tx adaptive Viewer

power reference class.

Read-only

mrmc

change-script-cmd

Command

Change the modem

script.

Indicates the current Rx

bit rate.

Viewer

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Operator

Page 433 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

mrmc

current-rx-profile

Parameter

Indicates the modem's

current receiving profile.

Viewer

Read-only

mrmc

current-rx-qam

Parameter

Indicates the current

modulation by the
receiver.

Viewer

Read-only

mrmc

current-rx-vc

Parameter

Indicates the current

number of TDM Rx
channels.

Viewer

Read-only

mrmc

current-script-capacity Parameter

current-script-capacity

Viewer

Read-only

mrmc

current-tx-bitrate

Parameter

Indicates the current Tx

bit rate.

Viewer

Read-only

mrmc

current-tx-profile

Parameter

and trap generation on
ACM profile degrade.

Operator

Read-write

Operator

Read-write

When enabled and if

current radio script
supports Adaptive Code
Modulation (ACM) event
and trap will be generated
upon TX ACM profile
degradation below the
user-defined threshold.
An alarm will be
generated only if the ACM
profile stays below the
threshold for at least 5
subsequent seconds.
The alarm will be cleared
after ACM profile returns
to be above the threshold
again.
mrmc

eth-shutdownthreshold-profile

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Enables / disables
initiation of automatic
state propagation upon a
failure in each one of the
radios.

Page 434 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

mrmc

loaded-scriptdescription

Parameter

Loaded script description Viewer

Read-only

mrmc

loaded-script-version

performance monitor.

Viewer

Read-only

mrmc

mrmc-script

Parameter

Radio scheme (Bit Rate, Viewer

Occupied BW, Modulation
and Grade).

Read-only

Occupied BW Vs Channel
Separation are listed in
pairs: (Occupied BW
Range[MHz], Channel
Separation [MHz]):
(5-7,7)
(8-10,10)
(12-14,13.75-15)
(25-29,27.5-30)
(33-38,40)
(50-55,55-56)
mrmc

occupied-bandwidth

Parameter

Indicates the actual

bandwidth occupied by
the radio signal. (MHz)

Viewer

Read-only

mrmc

operation-mode

Parameter

Indicates the current ACM Viewer

mode.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 435 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

mrmc

rfu-chosen-grade

the modem script
package.

Viewer

mrmc

tx-max-chosen-bitrate Parameter

Indicates the maximum

bit for the Tx profile.

Viewer

mrmc

tx-occupied-bw

Parameter

Indicates the actual

occupied Tx bandwidth.

Viewer

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

24.2.1.33
tdm-radio-pm
Group
Command

Privilege

Access
Read-only

Read-only

tdm-radio-pm

tdm-radio-pm-15min- Parameter
interval[96]

TDM radio UAS PM 15

minutes monitoring.

Viewer

Read-only

tdm-radio-pm

tdm-radio-pm-24hour- Parameter
interval[30]

TDM radio UAS PM 24

hours monitoring.

Viewer

Read-only

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

24.2.1.34
modem
Group
Command
modem

clear-counters

Command

Clear accumulated
counters.

Operator

Read-write

modem

defected-blocks

Parameter

Indicates the number of

defective radio blocks.

Viewer

Read-only

modem

ldpc-decoder-stress

Parameter

LDPC decoder stress

Viewer

Read-only

modem

mse

Parameter

Mean Square Error

(MSE) of the Rx signal.

Viewer

Read-only

modem

mse-threshold

Parameter

The threshold above

which MSE exceeded
seconds will be counted
as errored seconds.

Operator

Read-write

modem

pm-15min-interval[96] Parameter

Modem 15 minute interval Viewer

performance monitor.

Read-only

modem

pm-24hourinterval[30]

Parameter

Modem 24 hour interval

performance monitor.

Viewer

Read-only

modem

slicer-input-scaling

Parameter

Slicer input scaling

information.

Viewer

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 436 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

modem

xpi

Parameter

Indicates the current XPI

level.

Viewer

Read-only

modem

xpi-threshold

Parameter

The threshold below

which Cross Polar
Interface (XPI) exceeded
seconds will be counted
as errored seconds.

Operator

Read-write

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

rfu

atpc-admin

Parameter

Enable / disable
Automatic Transmit
Power Control (ATPC)
mode.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

atpc-override-state

Parameter

Indicates the ATPC

override state.

Viewer

rfu

atpc-override-tx-level Parameter

Configures the default

Operator
ATPC override
transmission signal level.

Read-write

rfu

atpc-ref-rx-level

Parameter

Configures the ATPC

RSL reference level.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

atpc-timeout

Parameter

Configures the ATPC

override timer.

Operator

Read-write

24.2.1.35
rfu
Group

When this timer expires,

the system transmits at
the defined default level.
rfu

atpc-timer-counter

Parameter

Indicates the number of

Viewer
seconds passed since
ATPC mode started.
ATPC override mode is
initiated when this counter
reaches the configured
ATPC timeout.

rfu

atpc-timer-overridecancel

Command

Cancels ATPC override

mode.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

automatic-delaycalibration

Command

Automatic IF combining
delay calibration.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

automatic-delaycalibration-status

Parameter

Automatic delay
calibration status
(inbound frequency
combining parameter).

Viewer

Read-only

rfu

band

Parameter

RFU band status.

Viewer

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 437 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

rfu

cable-tilt

Parameter

RFU cable tilt status.

Viewer

Read-only

rfu

clear-com-deviceerror

Command

Clear RFU
communication device
error.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

communication-status Parameter

Indicates the
communication status of
the RFU with the remote
unit.

Viewer

Read-only

rfu

data-sci-errors

Parameter

Number of data SCI

errors.

Viewer

Read-only

rfu

delay-calibration

Parameter

IF combining delay
calibration.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

en-alarm-gen-on-rsldegrade

Parameter

Enable/Disable alarm
generation on RSL
degradation.

Operator

Read-write

If enabled, an alarm will

be generated when the
current RSL level
degrades below the user
defined threshold for 5
subsequent seconds.
Alarm will be cleared
once the RSL level stays
above the threshold for at
least another 5 seconds.
rfu

fpga-version-number

Parameter

Indicates the version of

the firmware running on
the RFU.

Viewer

Read-only

rfu

green-mode-admin

Parameter

Enables/disables RFU
green mode.

Operator

Read-write

This mode minimizes

power consumption while
ensuring the highest
transmission power
possible to get an RSL
not higher than the
defined Rx reference
level.
rfu

green-mode-ref-rxlevel

Parameter

Configures the green

mode RSL reference
level.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

ifc-support

Parameter

RFU IFC support status.

Viewer

Read-only

rfu

if-loopback-support

Parameter

RFU IF loopback support Viewer

status.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 438 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

rfu

internal-downloadcounter

Parameter

RFU internal download

counter.

Viewer

Read-only

rfu

internal-downloadstatus

Parameter

RFU internal download

status.

Viewer

Read-only

rfu

log-admin

Parameter

Enables or disables the

RFU internal log file.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

log-interval

Parameter

Specifies the number of

seconds for RFU log file
polling interval.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

lo-sense

Parameter

status

rfu

min-rx-freq

Parameter

The minimum Rx
frequency allowed by the
RFU.

Viewer

rfu

min-tx-freq

Parameter

The minimum Tx
frequency allowed by the
RFU.

Viewer

rfu

mse-forward

Parameter

RFU MSE forward

command

Operator

Read-write

rfu

mute-tx

Parameter

Mute the RFUs Tx

output.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

part-number

Parameter

Indicates the RFUs part

number.

Viewer

rfu

pm-15min-interval[96] Parameter

Performance monitoring
data for a specific 15
minute interval.

Viewer

rfu

pm-15min-intervalcombined[96]

Aggregate performance
monitoring data for a
specific 15 minute
interval.

Viewer

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Page 439 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

rfu

pm-15min-intervaldiversity[96]

Parameter

Diversity performance
monitoring data for a
specific 15 minute
interval.

Viewer

rfu

pm-24hourinterval[30]

Parameter

Performance monitoring Viewer

data for a specific 24 hour
interval.

rfu

pm-24hour-intervalcombined[30]

Parameter

Aggregate performance
monitoring data for a
specific 24 hour interval.

Viewer

rfu

pm-24hour-intervaldiversity[30]

Parameter

Diversity performance
monitoring data for a
specific 24 hour interval.

Viewer

rfu

pmax

Parameter

RFU Pmax status

Viewer

rfu

pmin

Parameter

Operator
which Transmitted Signal
Level (TSL) exceeded
seconds will be counted
as errored seconds.

Read-write

rfu

power-supply-status

Parameter

Viewer

rfu

rfu-d-copartner-carrier Parameter

RFU-D copartner carrier

Viewer

rfu

rfu-installation

RFU installation status

Viewer

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Access

Page 440 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

rfu

rfu-mode

Parameter

Configures the RFU

inbound frequency
combining mode.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

rfu-rf-loopback

Parameter

Enables / disables RFU

RF loopback.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

rfu-temp

Parameter

Operator
inbound frequency
combining RSL connector
source.

Read-write

rfu

rsl-degrade-alarmgen-degradationmargin

Parameter

Configures the
degradation margin [in
dB] for RSL degradation
alarm and event
generation.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

rsl-degrade-alarmgen-nominal-level

Parameter

Configures the nominal

level [in dBm] for RSL
degradation alarm and
event generation.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

rx-freq

Parameter

Configures the RFUs Rx

frequency.

Operator

Read-write

rfu

rx-freq-local-remote

Parameter

Configures the remote Rx Operator

frequency.

Read-write

rfu

rx-level

Parameter

Indicates the RFU receive Viewer

level status.

Read-only

rfu

rx-level-combined

Parameter

Indicates the Rx
combined inbound
frequency level.

Viewer

Read-only

rfu

rx-level-diversity

Parameter

Indicates the Rx diversity Viewer

frequency level.

Read-only

rfu

serial-number

Parameter

Indicates the RFU's serial Viewer

number.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 441 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

rfu

software-versionnumber

Parameter

Indicates the RFUs

running software version
number.

Viewer

Read-only

rfu

standard-organization Parameter

RFU standard
organization

Viewer

Read-only

rfu

synthesizer-status

Parameter

RFU synthesizer

24.2.1.36

rfu-sw-upload

Group

Command

rfu-sw-upload

internal-sw-download- Command
action

Initiates the software

download to the RFU.

Operator

Read-write

rfu-sw-upload

internal-downloadcounter

Parameter

RFU internal download

counter.

Viewer

Read-only

rfu-sw-upload

internal-downloadstatus

Parameter

RFU internal download

status.

Viewer

Read-only

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

24.2.1.37

rfu-fw-upload

Group

Command

rfu-fw-upload

internal-fw-download- Command
action

Initiates a firmware
download operation.

Operator

Read-write

rfu-fw-upload

internal-fw-download- Command
cancel

Cancel a firmware
download operation.

Operator

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 442 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

rfu-fw-upload
rfu-fw-upload

Description

Privilege

Access

internal-fw-download- Parameter
counter

Firmware download
counter.

Viewer

Read-only

internal-fw-download- Parameter
status

Indicates the firmware

download status.

Viewer

Read-only

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

rfu-co

clear-device-error

Command

Clear RFU device error

counters.

Operator

Read-only

rfu-co

device-error

Parameter

RFU device error

counters.

Viewer

Read-only

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

rfu-cl

clear-device-error

Command

Clear RFU device error

counters.

Operator

Read-only

rfu-cl

device-error

Parameter

View RFU device errors.

Viewer

Read-only

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

if-loopback

Parameter

Activates IF loopback.

Operator

Read-write

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

Command

Clears enhanced header

compression counters.

Operator

Read-write

24.2.1.38
rfu-co
Group

24.2.1.39
rfu-cl
Group

24.2.1.40
rfic
Group
rfic

24.2.1.41
enhanced-hc
Group
command

Type

enhanced-hc

clear-enhanced-hccounters

enhanced-hc

clear-excluding-rules- Command
table

Clears the excluding rules Operator

table.

Read-write

enhanced-hc

del-excluding-rule-by- Command
entry

Deletes the specified

excluding rule (by table
entry).

Operator

Read-write

enhanced-hc

del-excluding-rule-by- Command
name

Deletes the specified

excluding rule (by table
name).

Operator

Read-write

enhanced-hc

enhanced-hc-admin

Enable / disable
enhanced header
compression.

Operator

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Page 443 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

enhanced-hc

enhanced-hc-inputbytes

Parameter

Indicates the
accumulated number of
bytes that ingress the
block.

Viewer

Read-only

enhanced-hc

enhanced-hc-mode

Parameter

accumulated Rx bytes
after de-compression.

Viewer

Read-only

enhanced-hc

show-enhanced-hccounters

Command

Show enhanced header

compression counters.

Operator

Read-only

enhanced-hc

show-excluding-rules- Command
table

Show the excluding rules Operator

table.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 444 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

24.2.1.42

User Guide

interfaces

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

interfaces

ais-line-detectionadmin

Parameter

Enable or disable
detection of AIS on the
interfaces.

Operator

Read-write

Upon enabling,
monitoring is done for all
relevant interfaces, both
on the main board and
the inserted T-card, if
present.
interfaces

available-radiointerfaces

Parameter

Viewer
available TDM interfaces.

Read-only

interfaces

sync-trail-radiointerfaces

Parameter

Indicates the number of

trail interfaces available
as synchronization
interfaces.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Viewer

Page 445 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

interfaces

sync-trail-sdhinterfaces

Parameter

Indicates the number of

available SDH trail
synchronization
interfaces.

Viewer

Read-only

interfaces

sync-trail-tdminterfaces

Parameter

Indicates the number of

available TDM trail
synchronization
interfaces.

Viewer

Read-only

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

24.2.1.43
user-channel
Group
Command
user-channel

admin

Parameter

Enables / disables the

user channel.

Operator

Read-write

user-channel

type

Parameter

Configures the user

channel type.

Operator

Read-write

The asynchronous modes

allow two channels, one
in each port.
The twin asynchronous
mode uses port 1 for v.11
and port 2 for RS-232.
The synchronous modes
use two ports each.

24.2.1.44
eow
Group
eow

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

admin

Parameter

Enables / disables the

Engineering Order Wire
(EoW) channel.

Viewer

Read-write

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

Parameter

Enables / disables the

Ethernet port as a
Wayside port.

Operator

Read-write

Operator

Read-write

24.2.1.45
wayside
Group
Command
wayside

admin

Disabling this option will

cause the port to behave
as a normal traffic
Ethernet port.
wayside

auto-negotiation

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Activates wayside port

auto negotiation.

Page 446 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

wayside

capacity

Parameter

Configures the wayside

Ethernet port capacity.

Operator

Read-write

wayside

duplex

Parameter

Configures the wayside

port duplex.

Operator

Read-write

wayside

ethernet-rate

Parameter

Configures the wayside

interface port rate.

Operator

Read-write

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

sync

active-sync-source

Parameter

Indicates the interface

currently being used as
the systems active sync
source.

Viewer

Read-only

sync

local-sync-ssm-tx

Parameter

Indicates the value of the Viewer

received SSM.

Read-only

sync

set-clock-source

Command

Determines which
interface to use as the
systems frequency
reference source.

Operator

Read-write

sync

set-sync-mode

Command

Configures the
synchronization mode to
automatic or force.

Operator

Read-write

sync

set-sync-source

Command

Enable the interface as a

synchronization source.

Operator

Read-write

sync

show-sync-clockquality

Command

Assign a quality level to a Operator

synchronization source.

24.2.1.46
sync
Group

This enables the system

to select the source with
the highest quality as the
current synchronization
source.
sync

show-sync-ssm-value Command

Indicates the value of the Operator

received SSM.

Read-write

sync

show-system-clockquality

Command

Indicates the quality of

the current clock source.

Operator

Read-only

sync

sync-electrical-gbedirection

Parameter

Sets the direction in

Operator
which the frequency
signal is transported for
electrical GBE interfaces.

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 447 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

sync

sync-pw-ref-clockexport

Type

Description

Privilege

Determines whether the Operator

system reference clock is
exported toward the
PWE3 T-Card.

Access
Read-write

This reference can be

exported towards front
panel.
Notice that either this or
any single one of the PW
T-card TDM interfaces
can export the reference
clock, but not both at the
same time.
sync

sync-sourceregenerator-admin

Parameter

Enables/disables PRC
regenerator pipe mode.

Operator

Read-write

Enables/disables PRC
regenerator SSM

Operator

Read-write

Sets the number of

seconds to timeout an
interface after it recovers
from a failure.

Operator

Read-write

Enabling sets the IDU to

point-to-point PRC quality
frequency distribution
mode.
sync

sync-sourceregenerator-ssmadmin

sync

sync-sourcerevertive-timer

Parameter

After this timeout the

interface will be
considered stable and
can be used as a
synchronization source.
sync

view-clock-source

Command

View the clock sources of Viewer

all the interfaces in the
slot.

Read-only

sync

view-sync-source

Command

View the synchronization

sources of all the
interfaces in the slot.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Viewer

Page 448 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

24.2.1.47

User Guide

ethernet

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

ethernet

acm-ethernetthreshold

Parameter

Select which profile

Viewer
enables propagation if the
radio ACM profile
degrades below a defined
profile.

Access
Read-only

Relevant only for nonprotected single-pipe

switch mode, and only
when ACM radio script is
running.
ethernet

clock-source

Parameter

Configures the Ethernet Operator

port as the systems
frequency reference clock
source.

Read-write

ethernet

set-gbe-muteoverride

Command

Set GbE mute override.

Read-write

ethernet

show-gbe-muteoverride

Command

Show GbE mute override. Viewer

Read-only

Command

Type

Description

Access

bridge

ageing-time

Parameter

Read-write

bridge

ethernet-application

Parameter

Specifies the mode of the Operator

Ethernet switch
application.

Read-write

bridge

jumbo-mode-admin

Enables / disables jumbo Operator

mode.

Read-write

bridge

lag-load-balance

Configures the LAG

distribution function.

Read-write

24.2.1.48
bridge
Group

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Configures the port

management type.

Read-only

bridge

max-hops

Parameter

of the Marvell switch
provider VLANS (S-tag).

Operator

Read-write

Viewer

Operator

Read-write

bridge

qos-policer-class

Command

Add / remove a policer

class.

Operator

Read-write

bridge

qos-set-ip-pbit-val

Command

Set IP P-bits to queue

allocation.

Operator

Read-write

bridge

qos-set-scheduler-qweight

Command

Set scheduler queue's

weight.

Operator

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Indicates which port

Operator
number will be connected
to the PW card.

Page 450 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

bridge

Description

Privilege

Access

qos-set-vlan-tag-pbit- Command
val

Set VLAN tag P-bits to

queue allocation.

Operator

Read-write

bridge

qos-show-ip-pbit-val

Command

Show IP P-bits to queue

allocation.

Viewer

Read-only

bridge

qos-show-policers

Command

Show QoS policers.

Viewer

Read-only

bridge

qos-show-schedulerq-weight

Command

queue priorities.

Viewer

Read-only

bridge

qos-static-mac-priority Command

Viewer

Read-only

bridge

show-eth-statistics

Command

Show Ethernet statistics.

Viewer

Read-only

bridge

show-forwarding-table Command

values associated with a
single VLAN.

Operator

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Type

Page 451 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

bridge

vlan-range

Command

Add, remove, or modify

values associated with a
range of VLANs.

Operator

Read-write

Privilege

Access

24.2.1.49

port-group

Group

Command

Type

Description

port-group

disable-all-ports

Command

Disable all E1/DS1 ports. Operator

Read-write

port-group

enable-all-ports

Command

Enable all E1/DS1 ports.

Operator

Read-write

port-group

exber-threshold

Parameter

Configures the bit error

rate alarm threshold for
the group of E1s/T1s.

Operator

Read-write

port-group

line-code

Parameter

Configures the PDH line

coding.

Viewer

Read-only

port-group

sd-threshold

Parameter

Configures the Signal

degrade alarm threshold
for the group of E1s/T1s.

Operator

Read-write

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

eth-port

admin

Parameter

Enable / disable the port.

Operator

Read-write

eth-port

auto-negotiation

Parameter

Enables or disables the

Auto Negotiation option on
the Ethernet port.

Operator

Read-write

eth-port

bad-octets-rcv

Parameter

The sum of lengths of all

bad Ethernet frames
received.

Viewer

24.2.1.50

eth-port

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 452 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

eth-port

brdc-pkts-rcv

Parameter

The number of good frames Viewer

received that have
broadcast destination MAC
address.

eth-port

brdc-pkts-sent

Parameter

The number of good frames Viewer

sent that have a broadcast
destination MAC address.

eth-port

capacity-threshold

Parameter

Configures the Ethernet

capacity threshold (in
Mbps).

Operator

eth-port

clear-peer-info

Command

Clear all peer information.

Operator

eth-port

clear-rmon

Command

Clear RMON statistics.

Operator

eth-port

collisions

Parameter

The number of collision

Viewer
events seen by the MAC
not including those counted
in 'Single', 'Multiple',
'Excessive', or 'Late'.

Access

This counter is applicable in

half-duplex only.
eth-port

connector-type

Parameter

The physical interface type. Operator

For port 8 the only valid
value is radio.
For ports 3 to 7 the only
valid value is RJ45.
In IP10 port 1 is RJ45 and
port 2 is optical SFP.
In IP10G/E ports 1 and 2
can be either RJ45 or
optical SFP.

eth-port

deferred

Parameter

The total number of

Viewer
successfully transmitted
frames that experienced no
collisions but are delayed
because the medium was
busy during the first
attempt.
This counter is applicable in
half-duplex only.

eth-port

designated-path-cost Parameter

Indicates the RSTP path

cost.

eth-port

duplex

Configures half or full

Operator
duplex for the Ethernet port.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Viewer

Page 453 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

eth-port

edge-port

Parameter

Enables the port as an

edge port.

Operator

eth-port

ethernet-rate

Parameter

Configures the duplex rate: Operator

10, 100 or 1000 Mbps.

eth-port

evc-name

Parameter

Defines a name for the

Ethernet service running
over this VLAN.

eth-port

excess-collision-drop Parameter

Access

Operator

The number of frames

Viewer
dropped in the transmit
MAC because the frame
experienced 16 consecutive
collisions.
This counter is applicable in
half-duplex only.

eth-port

flow-control

Parameter

Configures flow control for

the port.

eth-port

fragments-pkts

Parameter

Indicates the total number Viewer

of frames received with a
length of less than 64 octets
but with an invalid FCS.

eth-port

functionality-led

Parameter

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

eth-port

if-table-inoctets

Parameter

The total number of octets

received on the interface,
including framing
characters.

Viewer

eth-port

if-table-inucastpkts

Parameter

The number of subnetwork- Viewer

unicast packets delivered to
a higher-layer protocol.

eth-port

if-tableinunknownprotos

Parameter

The number of packets

received via the interface
which were discarded
because of an unknown or
unsupported protocol.

eth-port

if-table-outdiscards

Parameter

The number of outbound

Viewer
packets which were chosen
to be discarded, even
though no errors had been
detected, to prevent them
from being transmitted.

eth-port

if-table-outerrors

Parameter

that higher-level protocols
requested be transmitted to
a subnetwork-unicast
address, including those
that were discarded or not
sent.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Access

Viewer

Page 455 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

eth-port

in-discards

Parameter

A 32 bit counter that counts Viewer

the number of good, nonfiltered frames that normally
would have been
forwarded, but could not be
due to a lack of buffer
space.

eth-port

in-fcs-err

Parameter

Total frames received with

a CRC error not counted in
'Fragments frames
received', 'Jabber frames
received' or 'Rx error
frames received'.

eth-port

in-filtered

Parameter

A 16 bit counter that counts Viewer

the number of good frames
that were filtered due to
ingress policy rules.

Access

Viewer

The rules include frames

that are dropped due to
802.1Q security checks.
eth-port

in-pause

Parameter

The number of good frames Viewer

received that have Pause
destination MAC address.

eth-port

in-rx-err

Parameter

Total frames received with

error signal from PHY.

Viewer

eth-port

interface-alias

Parameter

Free text used to describe

the Ethernet port.

Operator

This description can contain

up to 64 characters.
eth-port

interface-index

Parameter

Interface index

Viewer

eth-port

interface-type

Parameter

Configures the port type.

Viewer

eth-port

internal-connection

Parameter

Indicates whether the peer Viewer

is placed in the same
chassis (internal) or another
chassis (external).

eth-port

in-uni-casts

Parameter

The number of good frames Viewer

received that have Unicast
destination MAC address.

eth-port

jabber-pkts

Parameter

Total frames received with

a length of more than 1632
octets but with an invalid
FCS.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Viewer

Page 456 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

eth-port

lag-port

Parameter

Configures the port group

as a LAG port.

Operator

I6.6ga

eth-port

late-collision-detect

Parameter

The number of times a

collision is detected later
than 512 bit-times into the
transmission of a frame.

Viewer

port capacity limit.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Viewer

Page 457 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

eth-port

management-duplex

Parameter

Indicates the management

port duplex value.

Viewer

eth-port

managementethernet-rate

Parameter

Indicates the management

port Ethernet rate.

Viewer

eth-port

management-only

Parameter

Management only

Viewer

eth-port

management-portadmin

Parameter

Indicates the management

port capacity limit.

Viewer

eth-port

management-vlan

Parameter

Indicates the management

port VLAN ID.

Viewer

eth-port

mc-pkts-rcv

Parameter

Indicates the number of

good frames received that
have Multicast destination
MAC address.

Viewer

Access

This does not include

frames counted in 'Pause
frames received' or frames
counted in 'Broadcast
frames received'.
eth-port

mc-pkts-sent

Parameter

Indicates the number of

Viewer
good frames sent that have
a Multicast destination MAC
address.
This does not include
frames counted in 'Pause
frames sent' or frames
counted in 'Broadcast
frames sent'.

eth-port

mep

Command

Add / remove a MEP.

Operator

eth-port

mip

Command

that have been successfully
transmitted and have also
experienced more than one
collision. .
This counter is applicable in
half-duplex only.

eth-port

oper-status

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Indicates the ports

operational status.

Viewer

Page 458 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

eth-port

out-fcs-err

Parameter

The number of frames

transmitted with an invalid
FCS.

Viewer

eth-port

out-filtered

Parameter

A 16 bit counter that counts Viewer

the number of good frames
that were filtered due to
egress policy rules.

Access

The rules include frames

that passed the ingress
port's policy but are
dropped due to the egress
policy of this port, including
802.1Q security checks.
eth-port

out-pause

Parameter

Indicates the number of

flow control frames sent.

Viewer

eth-port

out-uni-casts

Parameter

The number of frames sent Viewer

that have a Unicast
destination MAC address.

eth-port

oversize-pkts

Parameter

The total number of frames Viewer

received with a length of
more than 1632 octets but
with a valid FCS.

eth-port

path-cost

Parameter

Configures the RSTP path

cost.

eth-port

peer-description

Parameter

Operator

eth-port

peer-port-description

Parameter

User defined description for Operator

the peer port.

eth-port

peer-port-number

Parameter

Configures the port number Operator

of the peer port connected
on the local Ethernet port.

Operator

The port number is

sequential starting with 1.
Zero [0] indicates not
connected.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 459 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

eth-port

peer-slot-id

Parameter

Configures the slot ID of the Operator

peer port connected on the
local Ethernet port.

Access

Zero [0] indicates a

standalone unit.
eth-port

peer-systemcapabilities

Parameter

Configures the peer port

system capabilities.

Operator

eth-port

pkts-1024-max-octets Parameter

Total frames received with Viewer

length of above 1024 octets
inclusive, including those
with errors.

eth-port

pkts-128-255-octets

Parameter

Total frames received with

length of between 128 and
255 octets inclusive,
including those with errors.

Viewer

eth-port

pkts-256-511-octets

Parameter

Viewer

eth-port

pm-24

Parameter

24 hour interval PMs.

Viewer

eth-port

port-connection

Parameter

Configures the physical

interface type.

Operator

For port 8 the only valid

value is radio.
For ports 3 to 7 the only
valid value is RJ45.
In IP10, port 1 is RJ45 and
port 2 is optical SFP.
In IP10-G and IP10-E, ports
1 and 2 can be either RJ45
or optical SFP.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 460 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

eth-port

port-service-type

Parameter

Configures whether the port Operator

is being used as a Service
Access Point (SAP) or as
a Service Network Point
(SNP) in a network-wide
Ethernet service.

Access

Used by the NMS for

Ethernet service
configuration.
eth-port

priority

Parameter

Configures the port priority. Operator

eth-port

protection-only

Parameter

Protection only

Viewer

eth-port

protection-port-admin Parameter

Activates or deactivates
protection for the Ethernet
port.

Viewer

eth-port

qos-classify-default

Parameter

Configures default criteria

for frame classification.

Operator

eth-port

qos-classify-initial

Parameter

Configures initial criteria for Operator

frame classification.

eth-port

qos-classify-mac-daoverride

Parameter

Configures MAC DA based Operator

frame classification, the first
level of classification criteria
for evaluating incoming
frames.
Allows classification of
frames according to their
static MAC destination
addresses, and overwrites
their VLAN P-bits.
Disable
No MAC DA classification
or VLAN P-bits will be
overwritten.
Queue Decision
Causes classification by
defined static MAC
address, without overwriting
VLAN P-bits.
Pbit Override
VLAN P-bits will be
overwritten without
classification to queue.
Queue and Pbit Override
Classification by both
defined static MAC address
and VLAN P-bits overwrite.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 461 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

eth-port

qos-classify-vidoverride

Parameter

If the first criteria is not

Operator
fulfilled, classifies frames
according to VLAN ID, the
second level of
classification criteria for
evaluating incoming frames.

Access

Queue Decision
Causes classification by
defined VLAN to queue
mapping.
Pbit Override
Causes classification by
P-bits.
Queue and Pbit Override]
Overrides classification by
defined VLAN to queue
mapping, and changes the
P-bits accordingly.
eth-port

qos-detach-policer

Command

Detach a policer from the

port.

Operator

eth-port

qos-egress-shaper

Parameter

Enables or disables egress Operator

shaping.

eth-port

qos-egress-shaperrate

Parameter

Configures the egress

shaper rate.

Operator

The value should be in

steps of 64K for values less
than 1 Mbps. 1M steps for
values between 1 Mbps and
100 Mbps. 10M steps for
values between 100 Mbps
and 1000 Mbps (GbE ports
only).
eth-port

qos-policer-name

Parameter

Configures the name for the Operator

policer associated with this
port.

eth-port

qos-schedulingscheme

Parameter

Configures Egress
scheduler options.

eth-port

qos-set-vlan-pbitsprio-remap

Command

Allows you to remap VLAN- Operator

priority bit values 0-7, to
any other preferable value
in the range of 0-7.

eth-port

qos-show-policerclasses

Command

Show policer classes.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Operator

Viewer

Page 462 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

eth-port

qos-show-vlan-pbitsprio-remap

Command

Show VLAN P-bits priority

remap.

Viewer

eth-port

role

Parameter

Indicates the role of the

RSTP port.

Viewer

eth-port

set-allowed-vlans

Command

Configures in which ports

this VLAN is allowed.

Operator

eth-port

show-allowed-vlans

Command

Indicates in which ports this Viewer

VLAN is allowed.

eth-port

show-if-tablecounters

Command

Show IF table counters.

Operator

eth-port

show-meps-list

Command

Show MEPs list.

Operator

eth-port

show-mips-list

Command

Show MIPs list.

Operator

eth-port

show-port-status

Command

Indicates the port status.

Viewer

eth-port

single-collision-frame Parameter

The total number of

successfully transmitted
frames that experienced
exactly one collision.

Viewer

Operator

eth-port

undersize-pkts

Parameter

is enabled on the wayside
port (On or Off).

eth-port

wayside-capacity

Parameter

Indicates the wayside port

Ethernet capacity (Narrow
or Wide).

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Viewer

Page 463 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

eth-port

wayside-duplex

Parameter

Indicates the wayside port's Viewer

duplex value (Half or Full).

eth-port

wayside-ethernet-rate Parameter

Indicates the wayside port

Ethernet port rate (Mbps)

Viewer

eth-port

wayside-only

Parameter

Wayside only

Viewer

eth-port

wayside-port-admin

Parameter

Indicates whether wayside

is activated for this port.

Viewer

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

24.2.1.51
enhanced-tm
Group
Command

Privilege

color classification by
DSCP/TOS bits.

Operator

Read-write

enhanced-tm

class-hier3-reg-prioby-mpls-admin

Parameter

Enable /Disable CoS and Operator

color classification by
MPLS experimental bits.

Read-write

enhanced-tm

class-hier3-reg-prioby-vlan-pbits-admin

Parameter

Enable /Disable CoS and Operator

color classification by
VLAN P-bits and CFI/DEI
bit.

Read-write

enhanced-tm

classifier-cos-toqueue-tbl

Command

CoS to queue mapping

table.

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Operator

Page 464 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

enhanced-tm

classifier-hier1-qosby-known-pdus-tbl

Command

CoS and color

classification by known
PDU MAC addresses
table.

Operator

Read-write

enhanced-tm

classifier-hier1-qosby-mac-tbl

Command

CoS and color

CoS and color

Operator
classification by VLAN Stag P-bits and DEI bit
table.

Read-write

enhanced-tm

clear-all-counters

Command

Clear all Enhanced TM

counters.

Read-write

enhanced-tm

pm-queue-15mininterval

Parameter

Performance monitoring - Viewer

queue counters 15
minutes interval.

Read-only

enhanced-tm

pm-queue-24hrinterval

Parameter

Performance monitoring - Viewer

queue counters 24 hours
interval.

Read-only

enhanced-tm

ptp-optimizedtransport-admin

Parameter

Enable / disable Precision Operator

Time Protocol.

Read-write

Operator

Upon enabling all the

packets classified to the
8th queue will bypass the
scheduler and will be sent
directly to the radio frame.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 465 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

enhanced-tm

ptp-optimizedtransport-mode

Parameter

Configures the PTP

transport mode

Operator

Read-write

In High-CoS-Queue-8
mode all the frames that
will be classified to the
8th queue in the traffic
manager will be send to
the PTP optimized
transport channel.
In IEEE-1588 mode IEEE
1588 frames will be
identified automatically
based on UDP ports
and/or ethertypes .
Options:
h-cos-queue-8
eee-1588
Default value:
h-cos-queue-8
enhanced-tm

queues-queue-sizetbl

Command

Configures the queue

sizes table.

Operator

Read-write

enhanced-tm

schedulerconfiguration-tbl

Command

Configures the priority

and weight schedule
table.

Operator

Read-write

enhanced-tm

shaper-configuration- Command
tbl

Configures the shaper

features for each queue.

Operator

Read-write

enhanced-tm

shaper-global-admin

Parameter

Enables/disables shaping Operator

globally.

Read-write

enhanced-tm

show-classifier-costo-queue-tbl

Command

Show the CoS to queue

mapping table.

Operator

Read-write

enhanced-tm

show-classifier-hier1- Command
qos-by-known-pdustbl

Show the CoS and color

classification by known
PDU MAC addresses
table.

Viewer

Read-only

enhanced-tm

show-classifier-hier1- Command
qos-by-mac-tbl

Show the CoS and color Viewer

classification by
destination MAC address
table.

Read-only

enhanced-tm

show-classifier-hier1- Command
qos-by-udp-ports-tbl

Show the CoS and color Viewer

classification by UDP
source / destination ports
table.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Viewer

Read-only

enhanced-tm

stats-port-counterParameter
1024-max-oct-framestx

Indicates the number of

Viewer
frames transmitted via the
port with a length of 1024
to max octets.

Read-only

enhanced-tm

stats-port-counterParameter
128-255-oct-frames-tx

Indicates the number of

Viewer
frames transmitted via the
port with a length of 128255 octets.

Read-only

enhanced-tm

stats-port-counterParameter
256-511-oct-frames-tx

Indicates the number of

Viewer
frames transmitted via the
port with a length of 256511 octets.

Read-only

enhanced-tm

stats-port-counterParameter
512-1023-oct-framestx

Indicates the number of

Viewer
frames transmitted via the
port with a length of 5121023 octets.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Operator

Read-write

enhanced-tm

stats-queue-greenbytes-passed

Parameter

Indicates the number of

green bytes passed
through the queue.

Viewer

Read-only

enhanced-tm

stats-queue-greenpackets-dropped

Parameter

Operator

Read-write

enhanced-tm

wred-thresholds-tbl

Command

Configures the WRED

thresholds per queue
table.

Operator

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

Page 468 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

24.2.1.52

User Guide

service-oam

Group

Command

Type

Description

service-oam

association

Command

Add / modify / remove a Operator

maintenance association.

Read-write

service-oam

auto-linktrace

Command

Add / remove a remote

MEP to the automatic
linktrace list.

Operator

Read-write

service-oam

auto-linktrace-interval Parameter

maintenance domain.

Operator

Read-write

service-oam

linktrace

Command

Trace a message to a
remote MEP or MIP.

Viewer

Read-write

service-oam

ping

Command

Read-only

service-oam

show-configuredremote-meps

Command

Show all remote MEPs

info.

Viewer

Read-only

service-oam

show-domain-interval Command

Show the domain & VLAN Viewer

CCM interval.

Read-only

service-oam

show-domain-list

Show the maintenance

domain list.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Command

Privilege

Viewer

Access

Page 469 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

service-oam

show-local-meps-list

Command

list.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Privilege

Viewer

Access

Page 470 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.2.2 pdh
24.2.2.1 e1t1-port
Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

e1t1-port

admin

Parameter

Enable / disable the E1 /

T1 port.

Operator

Read-write

e1t1-port

ais-detection-status

Parameter

Indicates the status of the Viewer

AIS detection.

Read-only

Supported only if AIS

detection is activated.
e1t1-port

cable-length

Parameter

Determines the cable

length range.

Read-only

Page 471 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

e1t1-port

line-loopback

Parameter

Configures the loopback

test on the E1/T1.

Operator

Read-write

e1t1-port

line-pm-15[96]

Parameter

alarm threshold for the
E1/T1.

Read-only

lag-port

admin

Parameter

lag-port

auto-negotiation

Parameter

lag-port

24.2.2.2 lag-port
Enable / disable a
LAG port.

Operator

Read-write

Enables / disables auto

negotiation option on the
LAG port.

Operator

Read-write

designated-path-cost Parameter

Indicates the LAG ports

designated path cost.

Viewer

Read-only

lag-port

duplex

Parameter

Configures the LAG ports Operator

duplex value (Half or
Full).

Read-write

lag-port

edge-port

Parameter

Enables the LAG port to

function as an edge port.

Operator

Read-write

lag-port

ethernet-rate

Parameter

Configures the LAG ports Operator

Ethernet rate (Mbps).

Read-write

lag-port

if-table-indiscards

Parameter

Indicates the number of

Viewer
inbound packets which
were chosen to be
discarded even though no
errors had been detected
to prevent their being
deliverable to a higherlayer protocol.

Read-only

lag-port

if-table-inerrors

Parameter

Indicates the number of

inbound packets that
contained errors
preventing them from
being deliverable to a
higher-layer protocol.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Viewer

Page 472 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Enable / disable a
LAG port.

lag-port

admin

Parameter

lag-port

if-table-innucastpkts

Parameter

Indicates the number of

Viewer
non-unicast packets
delivered to a higher-layer
protocol.

Read-only

lag-port

if-table-inoctets

Parameter

Viewer
outbound packets which
were chosen to be
discarded even though no
errors had been detected
to prevent their being
transmitted.

Read-only

lag-port

if-table-outerrors

Parameter

Indicates the number of

outbound packets that
could not be transmitted
because of errors.

Viewer

Read-only

lag-port

if-table-outnucastpkts Parameter

Indicates the total number Viewer

of packets that higherlevel protocols requested
be transmitted to a nonunicast address, including
those that were discarded
or not sent.

Read-only

lag-port

if-table-outoctets

Indicates the total number Viewer

of octets transmitted out
of the interface, including
framing characters.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Operator

Read-write

Page 473 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Enable / disable a
LAG port.

lag-port

admin

Parameter

Operator

Read-write

lag-port

if-table-outucastpkts

Parameter

Indicates the total number Viewer

of packets that higherlevel protocols requested
be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address,
including those that were
discarded or not sent.

Read-only

lag-port

interface-alias

Parameter

Free text used to describe Operator

the LAG port.

Read-write

This description can

contain up to 64
characters.
lag-port

interface-index

Parameter

Interface index

Viewer

Read-only

lag-port

interface-type

Parameter

LAG port interface type

Viewer

Read-only

lag-port

lag-clear-rmon

Command

Clears a LAG ports

RMON statistics.

Operator

Read-write

lag-port

lag-member

Command

Add or remove an
Ethernet port to/from an
aggregation group.

Operator

Read-write

lag-port

lag-members-list

Parameter

Shows the list of

Viewer
members associated with
the LAG port.

Read-only

lag-port

lag-port-remove

Command

Remove an aggregation
group.

Operator

Read-write

lag-port

learning

Parameter

Enables or disables the

MAC address learning
option on the selected
LAG port.

Operator

Read-write

lag-port

mac-address

Parameter

Indicates the LAG port's

MAC address.

Viewer

Read-only

lag-port

management-only

Parameter

Management only

Viewer

Read-only

lag-port

mep

Command

Add or remove a MEP.

Operator

Read-write

lag-port

mip

Command

Add or remove a MIP.

Operator

Read-write

lag-port

msti-port-path-cost

Parameter

Configures the path cost

for each defined MST
instance.

Operator

Read-write

lag-port

msti-port-priority

Parameter

Configures the interface

priority for each defined
MST instance.

Operator

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 474 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Enable / disable a
LAG port.

lag-port

admin

Parameter

lag-port

oper-status

Parameter

priority.

Operator

Read-write

lag-port

protection-only

Parameter

Protection only

Viewer

Read-only

lag-port

qos-classify-default

Parameter

Configures default criteria Operator

for frame classification.

Read-write

lag-port

qos-classify-initial

Parameter

Configures initial criteria

for frame classification.

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Operator

Read-write

Viewer

Read-only

Operator

Page 475 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

lag-port

admin

Parameter

lag-port

qos-classify-mac-daoverride

Parameter

Enable / disable a
LAG port.
Configures MAC DA
based frame
classification, the first
level of classification
criteria for evaluating
incoming frames.

Operator

Read-write

Operator

Read-write

Allows classification of
frames according to their
static MAC destination
addresses, and
overwrites their VLAN Pbits.
Disable
No MAC DA classification
or VLAN P-bits will be
overwritten.
Queue Decision
Causes classification by
defined static MAC
address, without
overwriting VLAN P-bits.
Pbit Override
VLAN P-bits will be
overwritten without
classification to queue.
Queue and Pbit
Override
Classification by both
defined static MAC
address and VLAN P-bits
overwrite.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 476 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

lag-port

admin

Parameter

lag-port

qos-classify-vidoverride

Parameter

Enable / disable a
LAG port.

Operator

If the first criteria is not

Operator
fulfilled, classifies frames
according to VLAN ID, the
second level of
classification criteria for
evaluating incoming
frames.

Read-write
Read-write

Queue Decision
Causes classification by
defined VLAN to queue
mapping.
Pbit Override
Causes classification by
P-bits.
Queue and Pbit
Override]
Overrides classification
by defined VLAN to
queue mapping, and
changes the P-bits
accordingly.
lag-port

qos-schedulingscheme

Parameter

Configures Egress
scheduler options.

Operator

Read-write

lag-port

qos-set-vlan-pbitsprio-remap

Command

Allows you to remap

VLAN-priority bit values
0-7, to any other
preferable value in the
range of 0-7.

Operator

Read-write

lag-port

qos-show-vlan-pbitsprio-remap

Command

Show VLAN P-bits priority Viewer

remap.

Read-only

lag-port

role

Parameter

Indicates the LAG ports

role.

Viewer

Read-only

lag-port

set-allowed-vlans

Command

Set allowed VLANs.

Operator

Indicates the state of the

RSTP port.

Viewer

Read-only

lag-port

type

Parameter

Configures the port type.

Operator

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 477 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Enable / disable a
LAG port.

lag-port

admin

Parameter

Operator

lag-port

vlan

Parameter

Configures the LAG port's Operator

default VLAN ID.

Read-write

lag-port

wayside-only

Parameter

Indicates if the LAG port

is configured as wayside
only.

Read-only

trails

act-all-trails

Command

trails

act-trail-by-id

Command

Activate or reserve a trail

by ID.

Operator

Read-write

trails

add-def-trails

Command

Add default trails (use on

standalone units with an
empty database).

Operator

Read-write

trails

add-trail

Command

Add a trail.

Operator

Read-write

trails

del-all-trails

Command

Delete all trails.

Operator

Read-write

trails

del-trail-by-id

Command

Delete a trail by ID.

Operator

Read-write

trails

del-trail-by-src

Command

a selected configuration
(Primary, Secondary,
None, or Idle).

Read-write

trails

protected-trail-forceactive-by-id

Command

Forces a specific
protected trail to a
selected configuration
(Primary, Secondary,
None, or Idle).

Operator

Read-write

trails

protected-trail-switch- Command
reset

Reset the switch counter

for all protected trails.

Operator

Read-write

Viewer

Read-write

24.2.2.3 trails

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Activate or reserve all

Command

Show all trails PMs.

Operator

trails

show-all-trails

Command

Show all trails.

Viewer

trails

show-local-trailsstatistics

Command

Show local trails

statistics.

Admin

trails

show-trail-by-id

Command

Operator

trails

trail-revertive-switchtimeout

Parameter

Configures the revertive Operator

switch timeout in seconds
for revertive protected
trails.

Read-write

trails

trails-level-trail-trapadmin

Parameter

Enables / disables trail

level traps.

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Command

Activate or reserve all

bit error rate alarm
threshold on the STM1/OC-3 interface.

stm1

expected-traceidentifier

Parameter

Configures the J0 trace

identifier signal that is
expected to be received
on the STM-1/OC-3
interface.

Operator

stm1

force-mute

Parameter

Enables or disables the

mute Tx option on the
interface.

Operator

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Admin

Page 480 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

stm1

interface-type

Parameter

Indicates the interface

type.

Viewer

stm1

line-loopback

Parameter

Configures the type of

loopback to run.

Operator

stm1

line-tx-protectionmode

Parameter

Configures the behavior Operator

of the transmitting line in
a 1+1 HSB configuration.

Access

In normal mode the

stand-by signal is
silenced.
In uni-directional MSP
mode, both units are
transmitting.
stm1

loopback-counter

Parameter

Shows the STM-1/OC-3

line loopback counter.

Viewer

stm1

loopback-timeout

Parameter

STM-1/OC-3 line
loopback timeout, in
minutes.

Operator

0 means no timer.
stm1

max-num-of-vc

Parameter

Indicates the maximum

Viewer
number of low-order path
VC (VC-11/12) in the
SDH interface.

stm1

node-to-nodeconnection

Parameter

Enable / disable
connecting the STM1/OC-3 port with an
additional NE.

Operator

stm1

oper-status

Parameter

Indicates the operational

status of the STM-1
interface.

Viewer

stm1

peer-description

Parameter

Adds a description of the

remote STM1 element.

Operator

stm1

peer-ip-address

Parameter

Configures the IP address Operator

of the remote STM-1/OC3 interface.

stm1

peer-port-number

Parameter

Configures the port

number of the remote
STM-1/OC-3 interface.

Operator

stm1

peer-slot-id

Parameter

Configures the slot ID of

the remote STM-1/OC-3
port.

Operator

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 481 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

stm1

pm-15[96]

Parameter

Shows 15 minute interval Viewer

line performance
monitoring data.

stm1

pm-24[30]

Parameter

Shows 24 hour interval

line performance
monitoring data.

Viewer

stm1

rdi-v-signaling-admin

Parameter

the STM-1/OC-3 signal J0
trace identifier.

stm1

transmit-traceidentifier

Configures the string

used as the transmitted
STM-1/OC-3 signal J0
trace identifier.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

front panel clock is
enabled.

Operator

pwc

front-panel-clock-led

Parameter

UDP/IP traffic

Operator

pwc

ip-subnet-udpip-traffic Parameter

IP Subnet for outbound

UDP/IP traffic

Operator

24.2.4.2 pwc
Group

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Privilege

Access

Page 483 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

command

Type

Description

pwc

protection

Parameter

Viewer
(E1/T1) of this PWC card

command

Type

Description

Privilege

tdm-ports

admin

Parameter

Admin status of the TDM

port

Operator

tdm-ports

assigned

Parameter

Operator
clock reference for loop or
clock-recovery timing
modes

tdm-ports

counter

Parameter

Loopback time left (in

seconds)

Viewer

tdm-ports

idle-code

Parameter

Value transmitted on this

TDM port in unused
timeslots

Operator

tdm-ports

line-coding

Parameter

TDM port line coding

Operator

tdm-ports

line-pm-15

Parameter

Line PM 15 minute
monitoring

Viewer

tdm-ports

line-pm-24

Parameter

Line PM 24 hour
monitoring

Viewer

tdm-ports

line-status

Parameter

Indicates the line status of Viewer

the TDM port

24.2.4.3 tdm-ports
Group

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

CAS pattern received on

this TDM port

Viewer

tdm-ports

show-all-channels

Parameter

Show all DS0 channels:

show-all-channels [id]

Operator

tdm-ports

show-assignedchannels

Command

Show assigned DS0

Operator
channels: show-assignedchannels [id]

Read-only

tdm-ports

show-availablechannels

Command

Show available DS0

channels unassigned to
any DS0 bundle: showavailable-channels [id]

Operator

Read-only

tdm-ports

show-channels-cascodes

Command

Show received and

Operator
transmitted CAS code on
all DS0 channels of a
particular TDM port:
show-channels-cas-codes
<id>

Read-only

tdm-ports

show-portconfiguration

Command

Show port configuration:

show-port-configuration
[id]

Operator

Read-only

tdm-ports

timeout

Parameter

Loopback timeout in
minutes (0 for unlimited)

Operator

tdm-ports

timing-mode

Parameter

Timing mode for signal

Operator
transmission on the TDM
port

tdm-ports

tx-cas-code

Parameter

CAS pattern transmitted

on this TDM port

Viewer

Type

Description

Privilege

24.2.4.4 ds0-bundles
Group
command

Access

ds0-bundles

add-bundle

Command

Add a bundle: add-bundle Operator

<id> <port-num> <chanstart> <chan-end> [desc]

Read-write

ds0-bundles

add-channel

Command

Add channel to a bundle:

add-chanel <id> <portnum> <chan-num>.

Read-write

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Operator

Page 485 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

command

Type

Description

its Id: enable-bundle-by-id
<id>

Read-write

ds0-bundles

enable-bundle-byport-chan

Command

Enable DS0 bundles

assigned to a TDM port:
enable-bundle-by-port
<port-num> [chan-num]

Operator

Read-write

ds0-bundles

oper-status

Parameter

Operational status of the

DS0 bundle

Viewer

ds0-bundles

show-bundle-by-id

Command

Show DS0 bundle by Id:

show-bundle-by-id [id]

Operator

Read-only

ds0-bundles

show-bundle-by-port- Command
chan

Show DS0 bundle by

port/channel: showbundle-by-port-chan
<port-num> [chan-num]

Operator

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Access

Page 486 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

24.2.4.5 tunnels
Group

User Guide

command

Type

Description

Privilege

tunnels

actual-remote-macaddr

Parameter

Actual Remote MAC

Address for this PSN
tunnel.

Viewer

tunnels

c-vid

Parameter

PSN Tunnel C-VLAN Id

Viewer

tunnels

dest-ip-addr

Parameter

Destination IP address for Viewer

UDP/IP tunnel

tunnels

eth-tunnel

Command

Set/remove an Ethernet Operator

PSN tunnel: eth-tunnel
<set/remove> <id> <vlantype> <vlan-id> <p-bits>
[remote-mac-addr]

tunnels

next-hop-ip

Parameter

Next hop IP address for

UDP/IP tunnel

this PSN tunnel

Viewer

tunnels

s-vid

Parameter

PSN Tunnel S-VLAN Id

Viewer

tunnels

tos-dscp

Parameter

PSN Tunnel ToS (DSCP) Viewer

tunnels

tunnel-id

Parameter

PSN Tunnel Id

tunnels

udpip-tunnel

Command

Set/remove a UDP/IP
Operator
PSN tunnel: udpip-tunnel
<set/remove> <id> <destip> <next-hop-ip> <vlantype> <vlan-id> [tos-dscp]

Operator

Access

Read-write

Read-only

Viewer
Read-write

[p-bits]
tunnels

vlan-type

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

VLAN type supported by

this PSN tunnel

Viewer

Page 487 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

24.2.4.6 pw-profiles
Group

User Guide

command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

pw-profiles

add-pw-profile

Command

Add a new PW profile

with default values: addpw-profile <id>

Operator

Read-write

pw-profiles

alarm-thresh

Parameter

Delay (in msecs) for

persistent alarm setting

Operator

pw-profiles

cas-alarm-pattern

Parameter

CAS alarm pattern

transmitted on E1
interface when packets
over/underflow the jitter
buffer

Operator

pw-profiles

clear-alarm-thresh

Parameter

Delay (in msecs) for

persistent alarm clearing

Operator

pw-profiles

conseq-miss-pkts-out- Parameter
sync

Number of consecutive
missing packets required
to enter LOPS.

Operator

pw-profiles

conseq-packets-insync

Parameter

Number of consecutive
packets with sequential
sequence numbers
required to exit LOPS

Operator

pw-profiles

copy-pw-profile

Command

Copy PW profile with a

given id into a new one:
copy-pw-profile <id>
<new-id>

Operator

Read-write

pw-profiles

delete-pw-profile

Command

Delete a PW profile:
delete-pw-profile <id>

Operator

Read-write

pw-profiles

ds0-filler

Parameter

Byte pattern transmitted

on ds0 channels when
packets over/underflow
the jitter buffer

Operator

pw-profiles

excessive-pkt-lossthresh

Parameter

Alarm threshold (in

percent) for excessive
packet loss

Operator

pw-profiles

jitter-buffer-depth

Parameter

Jitter buffer depth (in

milliseconds) to allow
accommodation to the
PSN-specific packet
delay variation.

Operator

pw-profiles

lops-detection

Parameter

If enabled, LOPS
detection is supported.

Operator

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 488 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

command

Type

Description

Privilege

pw-profiles

missing-pkts-to-ses

Parameter

Percent of missing
packets detected in 1
second window to cause
SES to be counted

Operator

pw-profiles

payload-size

Parameter

Number of times DS0

channels are sampled in
order to create one
Ethernet packet.

Operator

pw-profiles

payload-suppression

Parameter

Indicates whether
payload suppression is
allowed for the PW.

Operator

pw-profiles

payload-type

Parameter

Payload type.

Operator

pw-profiles

pkt-loss-time-window

Parameter

Time for computing

average packet loss rate
to detect excessive
packet loss.

Operator

pw-profiles

pw-profile-id

Parameter

PW Profile Id

Viewer

pw-profiles

rtp-header-used

Parameter

pw-profile [id]

Read-write

command

Type

Description

Access

add-pw

Command

Add new PW: add-pw

Operator
<pw-id> <pw-type> <psntype> <tdm-port-ords0bundle> <tdm-profileid> <psn-tunnel-or-groupid> <src-udp-port-or-ecid>
<dst-udp-port-or-ecid>
[cr-master]

24.2.4.7 pws
Group
pws

Privilege

Access

Read-write

[admin]
pws

admin

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Parameter

Admin status

Viewer

Page 489 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

command

Type

Description

pws

clear-pw-stats

Command

Clear PW statistics: clear- Operator

pw-stats <id>

pws

cr-master

Parameter

uses over the network

Viewer

pws

pw-id

Parameter

PW Id

Viewer

pws

pw-jitter-buff-overruns Parameter

Number of jitter buffer

overruns

Viewer

pws

pw-max-jitter-buffdeviation

Parameter

Max Jitter Buffer

Deviation

Viewer

pws

pw-pm-15

Parameter

Line PM 15 minute
monitoring

Viewer

pws

pw-pm-24

Parameter

Line PM 24 hour
monitoring

Viewer

pws

pw-profile-id

Parameter

TDM profile id for this

PW.

Viewer

pws

pw-rcvd-pkts

Parameter

Number of packets
received by this PW

Viewer

pws

pw-transitions-normlops

Parameter

Number of transitions
from the normal state to
the LOPS

Viewer

pws

pw-tx-pkts

Parameter

Number of packets
transmitted by this PW

Viewer

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Privilege

Access
Read-write

Read-write

Page 490 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

command

Type

Description

actual-duplex

Parameter

Actual duplex for Ethernet Viewer

port.

eth-port-pwc

actual-ethernet-rate

Parameter

Privilege

Access
Read-write

Read-write

Page 491 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

command

Type

Ethernet Interworking
frames which were
dropped due free buffer
pool (FBP) Overrun

Viewer

eth-port-pwc

rx-err-fcs

Parameter

The number of frames

received that have a
integral 64 to 1518 byte
length and contain a
Frame Check Sequence
error.

Viewer

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Privilege

Access

Viewer

Page 492 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

command

Type

Description

Privilege

eth-port-pwc

rx-err-mru

Parameter

The number of received

Ethernet Interworking
frames which were
dropped due the
Maximum Receive Unit
frame size being
exceeded.

Viewer

eth-port-pwc

rx-err-nonvalid-mac

Parameter

The number of received

Ethernet frames whose
MAC-DA is not valid.
(Unrecognized by
address recognition
routine in DPS).

Viewer

eth-port-pwc

rx-err-overrun

Parameter

The number of received

Ethernet frames which
were closed (in a middle
of a frame) or discarded
due to a receive buffer
overrun event (no
available buffers).

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

command

Type

Description

Privilege

eth-port-pwc

rx-mac-pause

Parameter

The number of valid

PAUSE MAC Control
frames received.

Viewer

eth-port-pwc

rx-mac-unknown

Parameter

The number of MAC

Control Frames received
that contain an opcode
other than a PAUSE.

Viewer

eth-port-pwc

rx-multicast

Parameter

The number of multicast Viewer

good frames of length 64
to 1518 (non VLAN) or
1522 (VLAN) bytes
excluding Broadcast
frames. This statistic does
not take into account
frames with range/length
errors.

eth-port-pwc

rx-oversize

Parameter

The number of frames

Viewer
received that exceeded
1518 (non VLAN) or 1522
(VLAN) bytes in length,
contain a valid FCS, and
were otherwise well
formed. Note: This does
not look at Range Length
errors.

eth-port-pwc

rx-packets

Parameter

The number of received

packets (including bad
packets, all Unicast,
Broadcast, and Multicast
packets).

eth-port-pwc

rx-undersize

Access

Viewer

Page 494 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

command

Type

Privilege

Access

Viewer

Page 495 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

command

Type

Description

Privilege

eth-port-pwc

tx-frames

Parameter

The number of complete

good frames transmitted.

Viewer

eth-port-pwc

tx-jabber

Parameter

The number of oversized

transmitted frames with
an incorrect FCS value.

Viewer

eth-port-pwc

tx-late-collision

Parameter

The number of frames

Viewer
transmitted that
experienced a late
collision during a
transmission attempt.
Late collisions are defined
using the LCOL[50]

Access

field of the TX Function

control register.
eth-port-pwc

tx-mac-pause

Parameter

The number of valid

PAUSE MAC Control
frames transmitted.

Viewer

eth-port-pwc

tx-mac-pausehonored

Parameter

The number of times a

Viewer
valid PAUSE MAC
Control frame was
transmitted and honored.

eth-port-pwc

tx-multicast

Parameter

The number of Multicast

valid frames transmitted
(excluding Broadcast
frames).

Viewer

eth-port-pwc

tx-multi-collision

Parameter

The number of frames

transmitted which
experienced 2-15
collisions (including any
late collisions) during
transmission as defined
using the RETRY [3-0]

Viewer

field of the TX function

control register.
eth-port-pwc

tx-no-collision

Parameter

The number of frames

transmitted that had no
collision.

eth-port-pwc

tx-oversize

Parameter

The number of oversized Viewer

transmitted frames with a
correct FCS value.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Viewer

Page 496 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

command

Type

Description

Privilege

eth-port-pwc

tx-packets

Parameter

The number of
transmitted packets
(including bad packets,
excessive deferred
packets, excessive
collision packets, late
collision packets, all
Unicast, Broadcast, and
Multicast packets).

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

command

Type

Description

eth-port-pwc

txrx-frames-511

Parameter

The number of good or

Viewer
bad frames transmitted
and received that are 256
to 511 bytes in length
inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including
FCS bytes).

eth-port-pwc

txrx-frames-64

Parameter

The number of good or

bad frames transmitted
and received that are up
to 64 bytes in length
inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including
FCS bytes).

Viewer

eth-port-pwc

tx-single-collision

Parameter

The number of frames

transmitted which
experienced exactly one
collision during
transmission.

Viewer

eth-port-pwc

tx-undersize

Parameter

The number of
transmitted frames less
than 64 bytes, with a
correct FCS value.

Viewer

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Privilege

Access

Page 498 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.2.5 diagnostics
Group

Command

Type

Description

diagnostics

show-files-list

Command

Show downloadable files, Operator

Read-write

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

rmon

clear-all

Command

Clears RMON statistics

from all ports.

Operator

Read-write

rmon

clear-lag-port

Command

Clears a LAG port's

RMON statistics.

Operator

Read-write

rmon

clear-port

Command

Clears RMON statistics

from a specific port.

Operator

Read-write

rmon

get-statistics

Command

Get RMON statistics.

Operator

Read-write

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

line-loopback

counter

Parameter

Shows the loopback

counter.

Viewer

Read-only

line-loopback

Parameter

loopback timeout in
minutes.

Read-write

24.2.5.1 rmon
Group

Privilege

Access

24.2.5.2 loopback
line-loopback

Viewer

(0 for unlimited)
line-loopback

stm1-counter

Parameter

Shows the STM-1/OC-3

line loopback counter.

Viewer

Read-only

line-loopback

stm1-line-loopback

Parameter

Configures the type of

loopback to run.

Operator

Read-write

line-loopback

stm1-timeout

Parameter

STM-1/OC-3 line
loopback timeout, in
minutes.

Operator

Read-write

0 means no timer.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 499 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

line-loopback

timeout

Parameter

Configures the number of Operator

minutes for line loopback
timeout.

Access
Read-write

Use [0] to disable

loopback timeout.

radio-loopback

Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

radio-loopback

counter

Parameter

Shows the loopback

counter.

Viewer

Read-only

radio-loopback

if-loopback[16]

Parameter

Activates IF loopback.

Operator

Read-write

radio-loopback

rfu-rf-loopback

Parameter

Enables / disables RFU

RF loopback.

Operator

Read-write

radio-loopback

timeout

Parameter

Configures the number of Operator

minutes for loopback
timeout.

Read-write

0 means no timer.

24.2.6 xml-interface
Group

Command

Type

Description

Privilege

Access

xml-interface

inv-gen-time

Command

Show inventory
generation time stamp.

Viewer

Read-only

xml-interface

pm-gen-time

Command

Show PM generation time Viewer

stamp.

Read-only

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 500 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

24.3

User Guide

Basic System Configuration Using CLI

This section includes:

Setting IP Addresses
Adding users
Navigating between stacked units
Performing Resets
Configuration backup

Software version management

Using CLI scripts

Radio Parameter Configurations

NTP

SNMP
CFM

Pseudowire Configuration
TDM trail management
TDM Protected Trails (SNCP)
Showing TDM Trail PMs and Status
Configuring the Ethernet Switch Application
Configuring the LAG Ports
Management Ports
VLAN Configuration
QoS Configuration
Auxiliary Channels

Automatic State Propagation, 1+0 Configuration Only

Radio script configuration

Page 507 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.3.7 Using CLI scripts

CLI scripts are text files containing CLI commands that can be downloaded
and run in the main unit only.
24.3.7.1 Setting external FTP client site parameters
To define the FTP settings, at the main unit:
1 Change to the platform/idc-board directory.
Type: /platform/idc-board and press Enter.
2 Type: set host-ip <ip> (the clients IP address), and press Enter.
3 Type: set host-path <path> (the site to the desired file location at the
client), and press Enter.
4 Type: set user-name <user-name> and press Enter.
5 Type: change-user-password and press Enter.
6 When prompted, enter the user password and press Enter.
To download CLI scripts from an FTP client:
1 Change to the platform/idc-board directory.
Type: cd /platform/idc-board and press Enter.
2 Type: set cli-script-file-name<file name> and press Enter.
To download the file from the FTP client
1 Change to the platform/idc-board directory.
Type: cd /platform/idc-board and press Enter.
2 Type: download-archive cli-script, and press Enter.
To see the upload status
1 Change to the platform/idc-board directory.
Type: cd /platform/idc-board and press Enter.
2 Type: get download-cli-script-status and press Enter.
"ready" means "no action was taken, ready to continue"
A successful result will give "succeeded"
24.3.7.2 Managing and Executing scripts
To view the contents of the currently loaded script
1 Change to the platform/idc-board directory.
Type: cd /platform/idc-board and press Enter.
2 Type: cli-script show, and press Enter.
To execute the currently loaded script
1 Change to the platform/idc-board directory.
Type: cd /platform/idc-board and press Enter.
2 Type: cli-script execute, and press Enter.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 508 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

To delete the currently loaded script

1 Change to the platform/idc-board directory.
Type: cd /platform/idc-board and press Enter.
2 Type: cli-script delete, and press Enter.

24.3.8 CLI Script Limitations

User should be aware of the following limitations:
CLI scripts can be loaded only to main units and cannot be written to
configure extensions units. All configurations performed from a main unit are
supported.
In order to echo the messages to the console while the script is being executed,
use the echo command inside the script.
The user is responsible for editing the CLI commands in their logical order
(e.g., script must configure Allowed VLANs on a port only after configuring
the port as a trunk port).
Any bridge-related commands (L2 switch and protocol commands) require a
write operation in order to have them saved.
CLI commands that trigger a cold-reset echo the confirmation message and
then perform a cold-reset to the system if confirmed by the user. The
following commands prompt user confirmation:
MRMC (radio) configuration
Switch application configuration
License upgrade
Reset IDU

Protection copy-to-mate command

Only a single command of this kind can be used per script, and only at the end
of the script!
If such a command is used at the end of the script, when this command is the
next one to be executed, the script will hold and wait until the user enters
confirmation (CQ19326).
A user with operator privileges cannot include user commands that require
higher privileges in a script. Higher privilege commands will not be executed
and will echo error.
SNMPv3 and Add user commands are not recommended for use via CLI
scripts. This is because these commands require user attention. The SNMPv3
commands or FTP password for software configuration or download, for
example, require a password from the user, and therefore should not be
performed via a CLI script.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 509 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.3.9 Radio Parameter Configurations

To set TX frequency:
1 Change to the radio/rfu directory.
Type cd /radio/rfu/ and press Enter.
2 Type set tx-freq <frequency in KHz> and press Enter.
To set RX frequency:
1 Change to the radio/rfu directory.
Type cd /radio/rfu/ and press Enter.
2 Type set rx-freq <frequency in KHz> and press Enter.
To set TX power level:
1 Change to the radio/rfu directory.
Type cd /radio/rfu/ and press Enter.
2 Type max-tx-level <TX level in dBm> and press Enter.
To mute/unmute the TX:
1 Change to the radio/rfu directory.
Type cd /radio/rfu/ and press Enter.
2 Type set mute-tx <disable/enable> and press Enter.
To set ATPC reference level:
1 Change to the radio/rfu directory.
Type cd /radio/rfu/ and press Enter.
2 Type set atpc-ref-rx-level <reference level in dBm> and press
Enter.
To enable ATPC:
1 Change to the radio/rfu directory.
Type cd /radio/rfu/ and press Enter.
2 Type set atpc-admin <enable | disable> and press Enter.
To set RX level PM threshold1:
1 Change to the radio/rfu directory.
Type cd /radio/rfu/ and press Enter.
2 Type set pm-rx-level-threshold-1 <threshold in dBm> and press
Enter.
To set RX level PM threshold2:
1 Change to the radio/rfu directory.
Type cd /radio/rfu/ and press Enter.
2 Type cd /radio/rfu/ set pm-rx-level-threshold-2 <threshold in
dBm> and press Enter.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 510 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

To set TX level PMs threshold:

1 Change to the radio/rfu directory.
Type cd /radio/rfu/ and press Enter.
2 Type set pm-tx-level-threshold <threshold in dBm>, then press
Enter.
To enable/disable MAC header compression:
1 Change to the radio directory.
Type cd /radio/ and press Enter.
2 Type set mhc-admin <enable | disable> and press Enter.
To set Link-ID:
1 Change to the radio/framer directory.
Type cd /radio/framer/ and press Enter.
2 Type set link-id <Link-ID number> and press Enter.
To set radio excessive BER threshold:
1 Change to the radio/framer directory.
Type cd /radio/framer/ and press Enter.
2 Type set radio-excessive-ber-threshold <BER: 1e-3, 1e-4, 1e-5>
and press Enter.
To set radio signal degrade threshold:
1 Change to the radio/framer directory.
Type cd /radio/framer/ and press Enter.
2 Type set radio-signal-degrade-threshold <BER: 1e-6, 1e-7, 1e-8,
1e-9> and press Enter.
To set MSE PMs threshold:
1 Change to the radio/modem directory.
Type cd / radio/modem / and press Enter.
2 Type set mse-threshold <Threshold in dB> and press Enter.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 511 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.3.10 NTP
To enable/disable NTP service:
1 Change to the management/mng-services/time-service/ntp directory.
Type: cd /management/mng-services/time-service/ntp and
press Enter.
2 Type set server 192.168.1.100 and press Enter.
3 Type set admin <enable | disable> and press Enter.
To set NTP offset from GMT:
1 Change to the management/mng-services/time-service directory.
Type: cd management/mng-services/time-service and press
Enter.
2 Type set gmt-offset-hours 2 and press Enter.
3 Type set gmt-offset-minutes 0 and press Enter.
To set Daylight Saving Time:
1 Change to the management/mng-services/time-service directory.
Type: cd /management/mng-services/time-service and press
Enter.
2
3
4
5

Type set
Type set
Type set
Type set

dst-start-month <Apr> and press Enter.

dst-start-day <1> and press Enter.
dst-end-month <Nov> and press Enter.
dst-end-day <1> and press Enter.

To set date and time:

1 Change to the management/mng-services/time-service directory.
Type cd /management/mng-services/time-service and press
Enter.
2 Type set time-and-date <10-3-2009,15:00:00> and press Enter.
The time and date format is: day-month-year, hours: mins: secs

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 512 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

User Guide

24.3.12 CFM
24.3.12.1

Domain

To add a maintenance domain:

1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: domain add <Domain name> <Domain level [1-7]> and press
Enter.
To remove a maintenance domain:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: domain remove <Domain name> <Domain level [1-7]> and press
Enter.
24.3.12.2

Domain & association

To add a maintenance association:

1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: domain add <Domain name> <Domain level [1-7]> <Association
name> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> and press Enter.
To remove a maintenance association:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: domain remove <Domain name> <Domain level [1-7]>
<Association name> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> and press Enter.
24.3.12.3

Association

To add an association:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: association add <Association name> <Domain name> <VLAN ID
[1-4090]> and press Enter.
To remove an association:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 516 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: association remove <Association name> <Domain name> <VLAN ID
[1-4090]> and press Enter.
24.3.12.4

CCM

To enable / disable the change continuity check admin state:

CCM Interval

To modify the CCM interval:

Local MEP

To add a local MEP according to CCM VLAN P-bit priority:

1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type: mep set < MEP ID [1-8191]> < Domain level [1-7]> <VLAN ID [14090]> < Direction [up/down]> <CCM VLAN Pbit priority [0-7]> and press
Enter.
To add a local MEP according to VLAN ID:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type: mep set < MEP ID [1-8191]> < Domain level [1-7]> <VLAN ID [14090]> < Direction [up/down]> and press Enter.
To remove a local MEP:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type: mep remove < MEP ID [1-8191]> < Domain level [1-7]> <VLAN ID
[1-4090]> < Direction [up/down]>, and press Enter.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 517 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

24.3.12.7

User Guide

Remote MEP

To add a remote MEP according to MAC address:

1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: remote-mep set <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]> <Domain name>
<VLAN ID [1-4090]> <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> and press Enter.
To add a remote MEP:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: remote-mep set <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]> <Domain name>
<VLAN ID [1-4090]> and press Enter.
To remove a remote MEP:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: remote-mep remove <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]> <Domain name>
<VLAN ID [1-4090]> and press Enter.
24.3.12.8

MIP

To add a MIP:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: mip add <Domain level [1-7]> and press Enter.
To remove a MIP:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: mip remove <Domain level [1-7]> and press Enter.
24.3.12.9

Loopback (Ping)

To ping message to a remote MEP or MIP according to MAID name and VLAN
P-bit priority:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: ping mac-address <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-name
<Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> and press
Enter.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 518 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

To ping message to a remote MEP or MIP according to MAID name and VLAN
ID:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: ping mac-address <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-name
<Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> and press Enter.
To ping message to a remote MEP or MIP according to MAID level and VLAN Pbit priority:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: ping mac-address <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-level
<Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> and
press Enter.
To ping a message to a remote MEP or MIP according to MAID level and VLAN
ID:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: ping mac-address <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-level
<Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> and press Enter.
To ping according to MAID name and VLAN P-bit priority:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: ping mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]> md-name <Domain
name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> and press Enter.
To ping according to MAID name and VLAN ID:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: ping mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]> md-name <Domain
name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> and press Enter.
To ping according to MAID level and VLAN P-bit priority:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: ping mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]> md-level <Domain
level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> and press
Enter.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 519 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

To ping according to MAID level and VLAN ID:

24.3.13 Pseudowire Configuration

The following is one example of a sequence for configuring a pseudowire
service:
1 Configure a TDM port;
2 Configure a DS0 bundle if needed (for CESoPSN) using add-bundle
command.
3 Configure a PSN tunnel
4 Configure a PW profile
5 Configure a PW service
24.3.13.1

PW T-Card Basic Configuration

The PW T-Card basic parameters include the common clock and

synchronization parameters and the Source IP Address for UDP/IP PSN
packets.
1 Change to the interfaces/pwc directory.
Type cd interfaces/pwc and press Enter.
2 Enable front panel clock support:
Type set front-clock-enabled yes and press Enter.
3 Modify the IP address for UDP/IP traffic.
Type set ip-addr-udpip-traffic [ip address] and press
Enter.
24.3.13.2

Ethernet Traffic Port Configuration

1 Change to the interfaces/pwc/eth-port directory.

Type cd interfaces/pwc/eth-port and press Enter.
2 Verify that the port is set to admin disabled (default value).
Type get-admin and press Enter.
3 Modify the Ethernet Port Rate parameter.
Type set Ethernet-rate 100 and press Enter.
4 Enable the port.
Type set admin enable and press Enter.
5 Modify the ports duplex setting.
Type set duplex half and press Enter.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 524 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

24.3.13.3

User Guide

Configuring a SAToP UDP/IP Unprotected Service

This section provides an example of configuring a pseudowire service from

scratch, assuming the basic PW T-Card configurations have been made and the
Ethernet port have been configured.
Configuring a TDM Port for a SAToP Pseudowire Service

A TDM port used with a PW SATOP service should be E1 unframed and

unchannelized.
1 Go to the PWC TDM ports directory.
Type cd/interfaces/pwc/tdm-ports and press Enter.
2 Set the clock source reference port to loop on itself.
Type set clk-source-ref-port[7] 7 and press Enter.
3 Enable the port.
Type set admin[7] enable and press Enter.
No alarm is expected after activating the port, even though no trail with this
port has been assigned.
Assigning a TDM Port to a Trail

Refer to Defining a TDM Trail on page 528.

To check that the port has been properly assigned to a trail:
1 Go to the PWC TDM ports directory.
Type cd/interfaces/pwc/tdm-ports and press Enter.
2 Type get assigned[7] and press Enter.
Configuring a PSN Tunnel

1 Go to the PWC tunnels directory.

Type cd/interfaces/pwc/tunnels and press Enter.
2 Create a new UDP/IP tunnel with id=100, destination IP 192.168.91.100,
next-hop 192.168.90.1, C-VLAN 11, DSCP 10, Priority bits 7, and MA 11.
Type udpip-tunnel set 100 192.168.91.100 192.168.90.1
c-type 11 10 7 11 and press Enter.
Configuring a Pseudowire Profile

1 Go to the PWC profiles directory.

Type cd/interfaces/pwc/pw-profiles and press Enter.
2 Add a new profile with the ID 10.
Type add-pw-profile 10 and press Enter.
3 Get the internal ID of the new profile.
Type show-pw-profile-by-id 10 and press Enter.
4 Set RTP header usage to enabled, using the profiles internal ID.
Type set rtp-header-used[10] true and press Enter.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 525 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Configure a Pseudowire Service

After all components required for a particular pseudowire service have been
configured, you can set up the service.
1 Go to the PW services directory.
Type cd/interfaces/pwc/pws and press Enter.
2 Create a new service with the ID 1 on TDM port 7, PSN tunnel 100, profile
10, tunnel unprotected, source UDP port 101, destination UDP port 102,
not a Clock Recovery master.
Type add-pw 1 e1-satop udpip 7 10 disable 100 101 102
disable and press Enter.
3 Enable the service. By default, new services are created disabled.
Type modify-pw 1 enable and press Enter.
24.3.13.4 Configuring a CESoPSN UDP/IP Protected Service
This section provides a configuration example of a CESoPSN service, using
some of the configurations described in the previous section.
Configuring a TDM Port

TDM ports used in CESoPSN services should be E1 basic or CAS, channelized.

1 Go to the PWC TDM ports directory.
Type cd/interfaces/pwc/tdm-ports and press Enter.
2 Set the port line type to E1 multiframe (CAS), channelized, and set the
clock source reference port parameters for TDM port 8, which you will use
in the service.
Type set line-type[8] e1-mf and press Enter.
Type set channelization[8] enable and press Enter.
Type set clk-source-ref-port[8] 8and press Enter.
3 Enable the port.
Type set admin[8] enable and press Enter.
After activating the port, an LOF alarm is expected because the port has not
been assigned to any trail.
Configuring a DS0 Bundle

A DS0 bundle is identified by its ID, which is provided by the user.

1 Go to the PWC DS0 bundles directory.
Type cd/interfaces/pwc/ds0-bundles and press Enter.
2 Create a new DS0 bundle with an ID of 20, using the first four channels of
TDM port 8.
Type add-bundle 20 8 1 4 and press Enter.
3 Verify the channel assignment in the TDM port.
Type show-assigned-channels 8 and press Enter.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 526 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Configuring PSN Tunnels

4 Go to the PWC tunnels directory.

Type cd/interfaces/pwc/tunnels and press Enter.
5 Create a new UDP/IP tunnel with id=200, destination IP 192.168.91.100,
default next-hop 192.168.90.1, C-VLAN 20, MA 12.
Type udpip-tunnel set 200 192.168.91.100 192.168.90.1 ctype 11 10 7 12 and press Enter.
6 Create a new UDP/IP tunnel with id=201, destination IP 192.168.91.100,
default next-hop 192.168.90.2, C-VLAN 30, MA 13.
Type udpip-tunnel set 201 192.168.91.100 192.168.90.2 ctype 30 10 7 13 and press Enter.
Configuring a Pseudowire Service

After all components required for a particular service have been configured,
you can set up the service.
1 Go to the PW services directory.
Type cd/interfaces/pwc/pws and press Enter.
2 Create a new service with the ID 2 on TDM port 8, profile 10, src/dest UDP
IP ports 1101 and 1102, respectively.
Type add-pw 2 cas-cespsn udpip 8 10 enable 1101 1102 and
press Enter.
3 Enable the service. By default, new services are created disabled.
Type modify-pw 2 enable and press Enter.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 527 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.3.14 TDM trail management

24.3.14.1

Defining a TDM Trail

To define a TDM trail:

4 Change to the cd /interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
5 Type: add-trail <trail ID> <trail description> <ACM priority>
<operational/reserved> <protected/unprotected> <interface 1 slot #>
<interface 1 type> <interface 1 number> <interface 2 slot #> <interface 2
type> <interface 2 number> and press Enter.
Arguments description:

Trail-ID: up to 16 alphanumeric characters

Trail description: string up to 32 characters
ACM priority: high or low
Operational/reserved: reserved trails are introduced in the database and
the bandwidth will not be used for TDM traffic (it may be used for Ethernet
traffic) but traffic does not flow. For operational trails bandwidth is fully
allocated and traffic flows
Protected/unprotected: unprotected trails are mappings between two
interfaces only. Protected trails are mappings between an end-point
interfaces and two other interfaces, the first of which is the primary path
and the second of which is the secondary path (see SNCP section below).
Interface slot: slot number of the IDU containing the interface (from 1 to 6)
Interface type: line (E1/T1) or radio
Interface number: the number of the E1/T1 interface or radio VC to be
used.
For E1/T1 it can be 1 to 32 (1 to 16 if no extra 16 E1 T-card is
installed)
For radio, the maximum number depends on the radio script being
used

Unprotected trail example:

add-trail id1 desc1 high operational unprotected 1 line 1 1
radio 1.

24.3.14.2

Viewing Trails Defined in the System

To show all trails:

1 Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
2 Type: show-all-trails and press Enter.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 528 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

To show a specific trail by its ID:

1 Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
2 Type: show-trail-by-id <trail ID> and press Enter.
To show a specific trail by its source interface:
1 Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
2 Type: show-trail-by-src <interface 1 slot #> <interface 1 type>
<interface 1 number>, and press Enter.
The trails will be shown in a table as follows (this is an example of a trail from
E1#1 in slot 2 to radio VC#1 in slot 3:
============================================================
Legend: s/i/n/- 's'=slot-id 'i'=if-type 'n'=if-num '-'=Empty
s(0..6) i(l=line/r=radio/s=stm-1/c=chain/s=sync_ethernet)
n(1..180)
===========================================================
Source Dest1 Dest2 Dest3 Dest4 Dest5 Dest6 Dest7 Dest8 Dest9
------------------------------------------------------------IndexInDb = 1, ID = t1, Desc = d1, Prio = high
Act = operational, TS = (0)
2/l/ 1 3/r/ 1 - - - - - - - ------------------------------------------------------------

where 2/l/1 denotes slot 2/line/interface 1.

24.3.14.3

Deleting trails

To delete all trails

1 Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
2 Type: del-all-trails and press Enter.
To delete a specific trail by its ID:
1 Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
2 Type: del-trail-by-id <trail ID>, and press Enter.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 529 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

To delete a specific trail by its source interface:

1 Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
2 Type: del-trail-by-src <interface 1 slot #> <interface 1 type>
<interface 1 number>, and press Enter.
24.3.14.4

Activating and reserving trails

To activate/reserve all trails

1 Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
2 Type: act-all-trails, and press Enter.
To activate/reserve a specific trail by its ID:
1 Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
2 Type: act-trail-by-id <trail ID>, and press Enter.

24.3.15 TDM Protected Trails (SNCP)

All operations for unprotected trails are available for protected trails as well.
The additional operations for protected trails are described in this section.
24.3.15.1

Defining a Protected TDM Trail

To define a TDM trail, at the main unit:

1
2
3
4

Log in.
Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
Type: add-trail <trail ID> <trail description> <ACM priority>
<operational/reserved> <protected/unprotected> <end-point interface
slot #> < end-point interface type> < end-point interface number>
<primary path slot #> < primary path type> < primary path number>
<secondary path slot #> < secondary path type> < secondary path
number>, and press Enter.

Arguments description:

Trail-ID: up to 16 alphanumeric characters

Trail description: string up to 32 characters

ACM priority: high or low

Operational/reserved: reserved trails are introduced in the database and

the bandwidth wont be used for TDM traffic (it may be used for Ethernet
traffic) but traffic does not flow. For operational trails bandwidth is fully
allocated and traffic flows
Protected/unprotected: unprotected trails are mappings between two
interfaces only. Protected trails are mappings between an end-point
interfaces and two other interfaces, the first of which is the primary path
and the second of which is the secondary path

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 530 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Interface slot: slot number of the IDU containing the interface (from 1 to 6)

Interface type: line (E1/T1) or radio

Interface number: the number of the E1/T1 interface or radio VC to be
used.
For E1/T1 it can be 1 to 32 (1 to 16 if no extra 16 E1 T-card is installed)

For radio, the maximum number depends on the radio script being used

Protected trail example:

add-trail id1 desc1 high operational protected 1 line 1 2
radio 1 3 radio 1.

24.3.15.2

Forcing trails to active/standby

Each protected trail can be forced to make either one of its paths active (or
none of them).
To force all trails to one of their paths
1 Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
2 Type: protected-trail-force-active <Id> <path>, and press Enter.
To force a specific trail by its ID
1 Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
2 Type to one of its paths type: protected-trail-force-active-by-id
<Id> <path>, and press Enter.
Arguments description:

<Id> - trail ID
<path> - primary, secondary or none

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 531 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.3.16 Showing TDM Trail PMs and Status

24.3.16.1

Showing TDM Trail PM Measurements

To show PMs of all trails:

1 Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
2 Type: show-all-trail-pms, and press Enter.
To show a specific trails PMs by its ID
1 Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
2 Type: show-trail-pms-by-id <trail ID> <15 min interval | 24h
interval> and press Enter.
<15min/24h interval> is the interval number to be shown, where 0 is the
current interval, 1 is the previous one and so on. If no interval is selected, the
current one will be shown.
24.3.16.2

Showing TDM Trail Status

To show PMs of all trails

1 Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
2 Type: show-all-trail-alarms and press Enter.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 532 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.3.17 Configuring the Ethernet Switch Application

The Ethernet Switch menu includes the Switch configuration, STP protocol,
STP configuration, and QoS & rate limiting items.

The Ethernet switching methods include:

Smart (Single) Pipe - Ethernet switching is disabled, whereby only a single

Ethernet interface is used for traffic and the unit operates as a point-topoint microwave Ethernet radio.
Managed Switch - For Layer 2 802.1Q switching.
Metro switch - Ethernet Q-in-Q provider switch is enabled.

To set the Ethernet switching method:

1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge directory.
2 Type: cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
3 Type: set ethernet-application <Ethernet application type> (Single
pipe, Managed switch, or Metro switch), and press Enter.
The system will reset (automatically).

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 533 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.3.18 Configuring the LAG Ports

You can group different ports into a single LAG (link aggregation) port.
24.3.18.1

Setting load balancing of the LAG

The load balancing of the LAG can be set to Hash function or simple Xor.
To set the LAG load balancing:
1 Change to the interfaces/bridge directory.
2 Type: cd /interfaces/bridge and press Enter.
To set load balancing to Hash function, type: set lag-load-balance
hash, and press Enter.
To set load balancing to simple Xor function, type: set lagload-balance simple-xor, and press Enter.
24.3.18.2

Assigning ports to a LAG

You should only assign ports to a LAG, with these limitations:

Only traffic ports (including the radio port) can belong to a LAG. Ports that
are configured as management or wayside ports cannot belong to a LAG.
A LAG can only be defined in IDUs which are configured as a Managed
switch or Metro switch.
All ports in a LAG group must be located in the same IDU (switch).
There may be a maximum of three LAGs per IDU.
A LAG may contain from one to five physical ports. When you add ports to
a LAG, you must observe the following restrictions:
Ports 1 & 2 (GBE ports) and ports 3 - 7 (FE only ports) cannot be in the
same LAG group. (This is true even if the GBE ports are configured at
100Mbps.)
The Radio port (port 8) can only be in assigned to a LAG with GBE
ports.
To assign ports to a LAG:
1 Change to the interfaces/bridge /eth-port directory.
Type: cd interfaces/bridge /eth-port[< port number>], and press
Enter.
2 Type: set lag-port group- <LAG number> (1 3), and press Enter.
3 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each port that is being added to the LAG.
24.3.18.3

Defining LAG Options

To enable or disable port admin:

1 Change to the interfaces/bridge /eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/bridge/eth-port[< port number>] and press Enter.
2 Type set admin <enable/disable>, and press Enter.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 534 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

To set auto negotiation on/off:

1 Change to the interfaces/bridge /eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/bridge/eth-port[< port number>] and press
Enter.
2 Type set auto-negotiation <on/off>, and press Enter.
To set the port type:
1 Change to the interfaces/bridge /eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/bridge/eth-port[< port number>] and press
Enter.
2 Type set type <access/trunk/hybrid>, and press Enter.
To enable or disable port learning:
1 Change to the interfaces/bridge /eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/bridge/eth-port[< port number>] and press
Enter.
2 Type set learning <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
To enable or disable port service type:
1 Change to the interfaces/bridge /eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/bridge/eth-port[< port number>] and press Enter.
2 Type set service type <network/access>, and press Enter.
To set classify default:
1 Change to the interfaces/bridge /eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/bridge/eth-port[< port number>] and press
Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-default<1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th>, and press Enter.
To set classify initial QoS:
1 Change to the interfaces/bridge /eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/bridge/eth-port[< port number>] and press
Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-initial < ip-tos, ip-tos-over-vlan-pbits, port,
vlan-pbits, vlan-pbits-over-ip-tos>, and press Enter.
To set classify VLAN ID override:
1 Change to the interfaces/bridge /eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/bridge/eth-port[< port number>] and press
Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-vid-override <disable, pbit-override, queueand-pbit-override, queue-override>, and press Enter.
To set classify mac da override:
1 Change to the interfaces/bridge /eth-port directory.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 535 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Type cd interfaces/bridge/eth-port[< port number>] and press

Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-mac-da-override <disable, pbit-override,
queue-and-pbit-override, queue-override>, and press Enter.
To set Egress scheduler:
1 Change to the interfaces/bridge /eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/bridge/eth-port[< port number>] and press
Enter.
2 Type: set qos-scheduling-scheme < all-queues-hrr, all-queues-strict,
fourth-and-third-queues-strict, fourth-queue-strict >, and press Enter.
24.3.18.4

Deleting a LAG

You must remove each port from the LAG to delete the LAG from the system.
To delete a LAG:
1 Change to the interfaces/bridge /eth-port directory.
Type: cd interfaces/bridge /eth-port[< port number>], and
press Enter.
2 Type: set lag-port not-aggregated, and press Enter.
3 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each port that is already assigned to the LAG.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 536 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.3.19 Management Ports

To set the number of management ports
1 Change to the management/networking directory.
Type: cd /management/networking and press Enter.
2 Type: set number-of-ports <no. of ports>(0-3), and press Enter.
To set the management type (inband, outband, VLAN)
1 Change to the management/networking directory.
Type: cd /management/networking and press Enter.
2 Type set type < in-band or out-of-band >, and press Enter.
If you choose in-band, you should configure management VLAN ID:
1 Change to the management/networking directory.
Type: cd /management/networking and press Enter.
2 Type set vlan <no. of VLAN> (1-4090), and press Enter.
24.3.19.1

Port configuration

Flow control

To enable or disable flow control (Smart Pipe only):

1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set flow-control <on | off>, and press Enter.
Managed switch Ethernet ports

To enable or disable port admin:

1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set admin <enable | disable>, and press Enter.
To set port speed rate:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set ethernet-rate <Rate> (10, 100 or 1000 Mbps), and press
Enter.
To set port duplex:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 537 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and

press Enter.
2 Type set duplex < full-duplex | half-duplex >, and press Enter.
To set auto negotiation on/off:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set auto-negotiation <on/off>, and press Enter.
To set the port type:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set type <access or trunk>, and press Enter.
To set the default VLAN ID:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set vlan <VLAN no.> (1-4090), and press Enter.
To enable or disable port learning:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set learning <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
To add, remove, or accept VLANs:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set-allowed-vlans <add, except, remove> <VLAN no.>, and press
Enter.
3 Type set-allowed-vlans < all, no-vlans>, and press Enter.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 538 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.3.20 VLAN Configuration

To add, remove, enable, or disable VLANs:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
2 Type vlan <VLAN no.> <add, remove, enable, disable>, and press Enter.
To add or change the VLAN name:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
2 Type vlan <VLAN no.> name <VLAN name>, and press Enter.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 539 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.3.21 QoS Configuration

24.3.21.1

Ingress Classifier

To set initial classification:

1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-initial < ip-tos, ip-tos-over-vlan-pbits, port,
vlan-pbits, vlan-pbits-over-ip-tos>, and press Enter.
To set classify VID override:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-vid-override <disable, pbit-override, queueand-pbit-override, queue-override>, and press Enter.
To set classify MAC da override:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-mac-da-override <disable, pbit-override,
queue-and-pbit-override, queue-override>, and press Enter.
To set default classification:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-default<1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th>, and press Enter.
24.3.21.2

Egress scheduler

To set Egress scheduler:

1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and press
Enter.
2 Type: set qos-scheduling-scheme < all-queues-hrr, all-queues-strict,
fourth-and-third-queues-strict, fourth-queue-strict >, and press Enter.
24.3.21.3

Egress shaper

To set egress shaper:

1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 540 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

2 Type: set qos-egress-shaper <on/off,> and press Enter.

3 Type: set qos-egress-shaper-rate <rate>, and press Enter.
24.3.21.4

Policer

To add/remove a policer:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type: qos-policer <add, remove> <policer name>, and press Enter.
To add a class to the policer:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type: qos-policer-class <add, remove> <policer class name> <policer
name> <matching type: all, arp, first-queue, second-queue, third-queue,
fourth-queue, broadcast, multicast, non-tcp-udp, tcp-control, tcp-data, udp,
unicast, unknown-unicast, unknown-multicast> <rate> <CBS> <exceed
action: drop>, and press Enter.
3 Type: qos-show-policers to verify the data, and press Enter.
24.3.21.5

QoS tables

To set VLAN Pbits priority remap table:

1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type: qos-set-vlan-pbits-prio-remap <original Pbit> <Remapped
Pbit>, and press Enter.
To set VLAN ID to queue table:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type: qos-vlan-to-queue set/remove <VID> <queue ID: 1st-queue,
2nd-queue, 3rd-queue, 4th-queue >, and press Enter.
To set VLAN Pbits to queue table:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type: cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
2 Type: qos-set-vlan-tag-pbit-val <VLAN_Pbit> <queue ID: 1st-queue,
2nd-queue, 3rd-queue, 4th-queue >, and press Enter.
To set IP Pbits to queue table:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type: cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 541 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

2 Type: qos-set-ip-pbit-val <IP_Pbit> <queue ID: 1st-queue, 2ndqueue, 3rd-queue, 4th-queue>, and press Enter.
To set IP priority options:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type: cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
2 Type: set qos-ip-tos-tc-pbits-option <diffserv, ip-precedence>,
and press Enter.
To set static MAC table:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge directory.
Type: cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
2 Type: qos-static-mac-priority set/remove <MAC address>
<dest.port no.[1-8]> <priority [0-7]> <VLAN ID [1-4090]>, and press
Enter.
To set queue weights table:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge directory.
Type: cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
2 Type: qos-set-scheduler-q-weight <queue ID: 1st-queue, 2nd-queue,
3rd-queue, 4th-queue > <weight:1-32>, and press Enter.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 542 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.3.22 Auxiliary Channels

24.3.22.1

Wayside Channel

To set port admin:

1 Change to the interfaces/wayside directory.
Type: cd interfaces/wayside and press Enter.
2 Type: set admin <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
To set port rate:
1 Change to the interfaces/wayside directory.
Type: cd interfaces/wayside and press Enter.
2 Type: set ethernet-rate <10mbps or 100mbps>, and press Enter.
To set auto negotiation on/off:
1 Change to the interfaces/wayside directory.
Type: cd interfaces/wayside and press Enter.
2 Type: set auto-negotiation <on/off>, and press Enter.
To set port duplex:
1 Change to the interfaces/wayside directory.
Type: cd interfaces/wayside and press Enter.
2 Type: set duplex <full-duplex or half-duplex>, and press Enter.
24.3.22.2

User channel

To set port admin:

1 Change to the interfaces/auxiliary/user-channel directory.
Type: cd interfaces/auxiliary/user-channel and press Enter.
2 Type: set admin <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
To set port type:
1 Change to the interfaces/auxiliary/user-channel directory.
Type: cd interfaces/auxiliary/user-channel and press Enter.
2 Type: set type asynchronous-<rs232 or v-11> and press Enter.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 543 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.3.23 Automatic State Propagation, 1+0 Configuration Only

To set automatic state propagation (GBE-mute-override) in a Smart Pipe
application:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet directory.
Type: cd interfaces/ethernet and press Enter.
2 Type: set-gbe-mute-override <criteria: none, lof-loc, lof-loc-excber,
lof-loc-remote, lof loc-excber-remote >, and press Enter.
To set automatic state propagation ( GBE-mute-override) in a managed or
metro application:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet directory.
Type: cd interfaces/ethernet and press Enter.
2 Type: set-gbe-mute-override <criteria: none, lof, lof-excber, lofremote, lof-excber-remote >, and press Enter.
24.3.23.1

Ethernet Shutdown (Rx) Profile Threshold (ACM Enabled)

To set Ethernet shutdown (Rx) profile threshold:

1 Change to the radio/mrmc directory.
Type: cd radio/mrmc and press Enter
2 Type: set eth-shutdown-threshold-profile < profile-0 to
profile-7 >, and press Enter.
24.3.23.2

Metro Switch and Port Type Configuration

To set Metro switch as the application type:

1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge directory.
Type: cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
2 At the new prompt, type set ethernet-application metro-switch,
and press Enter.
3 Confirm by typing yes, and press Enter.
The system will restart automatically.
To set the port type (CN/PN):
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set type customer-network (or provider-network), and
press Enter.
To set default VLAN on CN ports:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.], and
press Enter.
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 544 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

2 At the new prompt, type set vlan <VLAN ID>, and press Enter.
To set allowed VLANs on PN ports:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.], and
press Enter.
2 At the new prompt, type set-allowed-vlans <add,all,except,novlans,remove> <VLAN ID>, and press Enter.
To set provider port ether type:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.], and
press Enter.
2 At the new prompt, type set provider-port-ethertype <0x88a8,
0x8100, 0x9100, 0x9200>, and press Enter.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 545 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.3.24 Radio script configuration

To set the radio script:
1 Change to the radio/mrmc directory.
Type cd radio/mrmc and press Enter.
2 Type change-script-cmd < Script's name> < Operational mode>
<Maximum profile> disable-adaptive-power, then press Enter.
Parameter values for the radio script include:

Script name
10Mbps-6.5MHz-4QAM-Grade-1
155Mbps-26MHz-128QAM-Grade-1
181Mbps-26MHz-256QAM-Grade-1
20Mbps-6.5MHz-16QAM-Grade-1
39Mbps-26MHz-4QAM-Grade-1
39Mbps-6.5MHz-256QAM-Grade-1
47Mbps-9MHz-64QAM-Grade-1
ACM_181Mbps-26MHz-256QAM-Grade-1
ACM_367Mbps-52MHz-256QAM-Grade-1
ACM_42Mbps-6.5MHz-256QAM-Grade-1
ACM_87Mbps-12.5MHz-256QAM-Grade-1
Operational mode
acm-adaptive-mode
acm-fixed-mode
regular-mode (for non ACM scripts)
Maximum profile
profile-0
profile-1
profile-2
profile-3
profile-4
profile-5
profile-6
profile-7

In regular mode only profile-0 is available.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 546 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

24.3.25 Ring RSTP

To enable Ring RSTP:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge directory.
Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ and press Enter.
2 Set the STP protocol.
3 Type set stp-protocol ring-rstp, and press Enter.
To set bridge priority:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge directory.
Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
2 Type set priority <priority no: range 0-61440, steps of 4096> and
press Enter.
To set interfaces priority:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ethe-port directory.
Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ethe-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set priority <interface priority no: range: 0-240, steps of 16>
and press Enter.
To set interfaces patch cost:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ethe-port directory.
Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ethe-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set path-cost <patch cost> and press Enter.
To set if interface is an edge port or ring port (non-edge port):
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ethe-port directory.
Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ethe-port[port no.] and press
Enter.
2 Type set edge-port <yes | no> and press Enter.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 547 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

25.

User Guide

Appendix B List of Alarms

Name

Severity

101

ext-in-alarm

indeterminate Alarm

201

bridgewarning
configurationloss

Event

Loss of bridge
Power failure during Verify bridge
configuration during configuration
configuration.
reset
change

301

excessive-ber major

Alarm

E1/DS1 excessive
BER on port #%1.

302

loopbacktowards-line

major

Alarm

E1/DS1 loopback
User configured
Cancel loopback
towards line on port system to loopback configuration.
#%1.
mode.

303

loopbackmajor
towards-radio

Alarm

E1/DS1 loopback
towards radio on
port #%1.

304

loss-of-signal major

Alarm

E1/DS1 loss of
1) Line is not
signal on port #%1. properly connected.
2) External
equipment is faulty.

1) Reconnect line.
2) Check line
cables. 3) Check
external equipment.
4) Power cycle the
system.

305

signaldegrade

minor

Alarm

E1/DS1 signal
degrade on port
#%1.

1) Reconnect line.
2) Check line
cables. 3) Check
external equipment.
4) Power cycle the
system.

306

unexpectedsignal

warning

Alarm

E1/DS1 unexpected 1) Port is disabled. 1) Enable relevant

signal on port #%1. 2) Line is connected port. 2) Disconnect
to a disabled port. cable from relevant
port.

307

std-trap-linkup

indeterminate Alarm

E1/DS1 link up trap.

308

std-trap-linkdown

indeterminate Alarm

E1/DS1 link down

trap.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Type

Description

Probable cause

Corrective
Actions

External alarm input User configured

(%1).
input problem.

1) Line is not
properly connected.
2) External
equipment is faulty.

Check source
description, and
correct accordingly.

1) Reconnect line.
2) Check line
cables. 3) Check
external equipment.
4) Power cycle the
system.

User configured
Cancel loopback
system to loopback configuration.
mode.

1) Line is not
properly connected.
2) External
equipment is faulty.

Page 548 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

401

User Guide

Severity

Description

eth-loc-alarm major

Alarm

Ethernet loss of
1) FE cable
1) Check
carrier on port #%1. disconnected. 2)
connection of FE
Defective FE cable. cable. 2) Replace
FE cable.

402

eth-tx-mutealarm

Alarm

Ethernet Tx mute
override on port
#%1.

Radio
Check link.
LOF/EXBER/Link ID
on local or remote
side (in pipe
application).

403

gbe-loc-alarm major

Alarm

Gigabit Ethernet
loss of carrier on
port #%1.

1) Cable is not
connected to the
port. 2) Cable is
defective.

1) Connect cable to
the port. 2) Replace
cable.

404

gbe-sfp-alarm major

Alarm

Gigabit Ethernet
SFP not intact on
port #%1.

SFP is not inserted

1) Check SFP
connector. 2)
Replace fiber.

405

gbe-sfp-txalarm

major

Alarm

Gigabit Ethernet
SFP malfunction.
SFP Tx fault on port
#%1.

406

gbe-tx-mutealarm

warning

Alarm

GBE Tx mute
override on port
#%1.

407

std-trap-linkup

indeterminate Alarm

Ethernet link up
trap.

408

std-trap-linkdown

indeterminate Alarm

Ethernet link down

trap.

409

change-instp-role

warning

Event

Change in RSTP
role for port: %1;
New role: %2; New
state: %3; Root
bridge ID: %4;
Bridge role: %5.

2) Defective IF
cable. 3) Fault in
RFU. 4) Fault in
IDU.

602

radio-link-idmismatch

critical

Alarm

Link ID mismatch.

Link ID is not the

Configure the same
same for both sides link ID for both
of link.
sides of link.

603

radio-lof

critical

Alarm

Loss of frame on
radio.

1) Fade in the link.

2) Defective IF
cable. 3) Fault in
RFU. 4) Fault in
IDU. 5) Different
radio scripts at both
ends of the link.

1) Check link
performance. 2)
Check IF cable, and
replace if required.
3) Replace RFU. 4)
Replace IDU. 5)
Make sure same
script is loaded at
both ends of the
link.

604

radio-signaldegrade

minor

Alarm

Signal degrade on
radio.

1) Fade in the link.

2) Defective IF
cable. 3) Fault in
RFU. 4) Fault in
IDU.

1) Check link
performance. 2)
Check IF cable, and
replace if required.
3) Replace RFU. 4)
Replace IDU.

605

std-trap-linkup

indeterminate Alarm

Radio link up trap.

606

std-trap-linkdown

indeterminate Alarm

Radio link down

trap.

701

alarms-file

major

Alarm

System alarm file

not found.

The alarm file was

deleted or is
corrupted.

Download alarm
file.

702

cold-resetevent

warning

Event

Cold reset event.

Cold reset
command was
issued.

703

configcreationfailed

warning

Event

Configuration
creation failed.

Re-try configuration
creation.

704

configcreationsucceeded

warning

Alarm

Configuration
creation succeeded.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

1) Check link
performance. 2)
Check IF cable, and
replace if required.
3) Replace RFU. 4)
Replace IDU.

Page 550 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Corrective
Actions

Name

Severity

Type

Description

Probable cause

705

configdownloadfailed

warning

Event

Configuration
download failed.

Download failure.

706

configdownloadsucceeded

warning

Event

Configuration
download
succeeded.

707

config-install- warning
failed

Event

Configuration install 1) Corrupt file. 2)

failed.
Internal SW error.

708

config-install- warning
succeeded

Event

Configuration install
succeeded.

709

configwarning
upload-failed

Event

Configuration
upload failed.

710

configuploadsucceeded

Event

Configuration
upload succeeded.

711

entity-init-fail- major
alarm

Alarm

SW failed to
properly initialize.

712

entity-init-fail- major
event

Event

SW error: entity %1 SW error during

Reset system.
initialization failure. system initialization.

713

extremetemperature

warning

Alarm

IDU is in extreme
temperature
condition.

The external
cooling/heating
system is not
operating.

Turn on external
cooling/heating
systems.

714

fan-failure

minor

Alarm

Fan failure.

Defective fan unit.

Replace fan unit.

715

generalhardwarefailure

critical

Alarm

General HW failure
%1.

Defective HW.

1) Reset system. 2)
Replace IDU.

716

kernelbackup

minor

Alarm

Backup kernel is
running.

1) New software
was installed when
system time was
"older" than the time
when the previous
version was
installed. 2) The
kernel
(/boot/uImage) is
corrupted or
missing.

1) Re-install the SW
when system time is
updated. 2) Update
time and run the
following command:
management/mngservices/mngsoftware/ . 3)
Package-reinstall
kernel-2.6.14.7aidc.3.14.e300c2.rp
m kernel-modules0.3.132.6.14.7_aidc.3.14.
e300c2.rpm.

warning

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Re-try download
procedure.

1) Re-install file. 2)
Download and
install file.

Re-try upload
procedure.

SW error during
Reset system.
system initialization.

Page 551 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Name

Severity

Type

Description

Probable cause

Corrective
Actions

717

low-inputvoltage

warning

Alarm

Low input voltage

detected.

Low input to the

system.

Check power supply

voltage.
Note: If the system
includes a dual-feed
power connection,
this alarm may be
raised if only one of
the power inputs is
actually connected,
even though the
system is receiving
adequate power
from the connected
input. You can
configure the
system to avoid
this. See
Configuring Power
Supply Alarms on
page 377.

718

param-setfail-alarm

warning

Alarm

Parameter set
failure.

SW error.

1) Look in Alarm
Log for matching
event. 2) In the
event, look for exact
parameter that has
failed. 3) Set the
parameter again via
the CLI. Note: the
alarm will be
cleared after reset.

719

param-setfail-event

major

Event

SW error:
parameter %1 set
failed.

SW error.

Reset system.

720

warm-resetevent

warning

Alarm

Warm reset event.

SW reset in the
system.

721

cli-scriptdownloadfailed

warning

Event

CLI configuration
script download
failed.

Download failure.

722

cli-scriptdownloadsucceeded

warning

Event

CLI configuration
script downloaded
successfully.

723

cli-scriptexecuted

warning

Event

CLI configuration
script activated.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Re-try download
procedure.

Page 552 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Name

Severity

Type

Description

724

cli-scriptexecutionsucceeded

warning

Event

CLI configuration
script executed
successfully.

725

cli-scriptexecutionfailed

warning

Event

CLI configuration
script failed.

726

public-keywarning
upload-failed

Event

Public key upload

failed.

727

public-keyuploadsucceeded

warning

Event

Public key upload

succeeded.

728

lvdsbackplaneerror-main

major

Alarm

729

lvdsbackplaneerror-extn

major

730

lvds-db-error

731

csr-fileuploadsucceeded

Probable cause

Corrective
Actions

CLI configuration
script execution
failure.

1) Correct CLI
configuration script.
2) Download
corrected script. 3)
Execute script.

Errors in TDM
backplane channel
for slot #%1.

(1) Extension or
main unit equipment
failure. (2)
Backplane failure.

(1) Re-insert unit.

(2) Power-cycle
unit. (3) Replace
unit (4) Check
backplane

Alarm

Errors in TDM
backplane channel
in connection with
main.

(1) Extension or
main unit equipment
failure. (2)
Backplane failure.

(1) Re-insert unit.

(2) Power-cycle
unit. (3) Replace
unit. (4) Check
backplane.

major

Alarm

Errors are detected (1) IDU HW failure.

in connection with (2) T-card HW
T-card.
failure.

warning

Event

CSR file upload

succeeded.

732

csr-filewarning
upload-failed

Event

CSR file upload

failed.

801

corrupted-filecritical
alarm

Alarm

Inventory file (%1)

is corrupted.

1) Inventory file is
1) Reset system. 2)
missing. 2)
Download inventory
Inventory file was
file..
found to be corrupt
upon system power
up.

802

file-not-found- critical
alarm

Alarm

Inventory file (%1)

was not found.

Inventory file is
missing.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

(1) Re-insert T-card.

(2) Power-cycle
unit. (3) Replace Tcard. (4) Replace
IDU.

1) Download
inventory file. 2)
Reset system.

Page 553 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

901

User Guide

Severity

Corrective
Actions

Type

Description

Probable cause

demowarning
license-alarm

Alarm

Demo license is
being used by
customer.

Demo license
activated by user.

1) Terminate demo
license. 2) Activate
operational license.

902

licensewarning
demo-expired

Event

License demo
expired.

Demo trial period

has ended.

Obtain a valid
license.

903

licensedemo-startby-user

warning

Event

User started demo

license.

904

licensedemo-stopby-user

warning

Event

Demo license
stopped by user.

905

license-loadfail

warning

Event

License load failure 1) Invalid serial

%1. License load
number - license
operation failed.
code does not
match unit's serial
number. 2) License
version mismatch.

906

license-loadsuccessful

warning

Event

License load
successful.

907

licenseviolationalarm

warning

Alarm

License violation:
%1.

908

demolicenseabout-toexpire-alarm

major

Alarm

Demo license is
Demo license
about to expire
activated by user.
within 48 hours and
will initiate a system
cold reset.

909

licenseviolationdetected

warning

Event

License violation
detected: %1.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

1) Compare unit's
serial number with
license serial
number (3 left
characters of
license code with 3
right characters of
unit's serial). 2)
Check code license
generation
sequence. 3)
Contact Tech
support.

Unit does not match 1) Check that the

license feature set. code was entered
correctly. 2) Call
tech support for
new license
generation.
1) Terminate demo
license. 2) Activate
operational license.

User configuration (1) Fix configuration

doesn't match
to correspond to
licensed feature set. loaded licenses. (2)
Load proper
license.

Page 554 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

910

User Guide

Severity

Description

licensemajor
signature-fail

Alarm

License code
Product serial
checking failed due number or internal
to invalid product
files error.
serial number.

Change IDU.

1001 cablemajor
disconnected
-alarm

Alarm

Protection cable is
not properly
connected.

1) Cable is not
connected between
protection ports. 2)
Cable is connected
to wrong port. 3)
Cable is damaged.

1) Connect Ethernet
cable to protection
port of both IDUs. 2)
Replace cable.

1002 configuration- major

mismatchalarm

Alarm

Mismatch between
IDUs in protection
mode.

The configurations
of the IDUs are not
identical.

.Apply Copy to Mate

from the desired
IDU.

1003 copy-to-mate- warning

completedevent

Event

Copy to mate
completed.

1004 copy-to-mate- warning

failure-event

Event

Copy to mate failed.

1005 copy-to-mate- warning

started-event

Event

Copy to mate
process started.

1006 exc-berchangeremote-txsent-event

major

Event

Request from
Active Tx at local
remote side to
side is not
perform a protection transmitting.
switch.

1007 force-switchalarm

major

Alarm

Force switch
command was
issued.

1) User command - 1) Clear force

force protection
switch command.
switch.

1009 lockout-alarm major

Alarm

Protection lockout
command was
issued.

User issued
protection lockout.

Clear lockout
command.

1010 lof-changeremote-txsent-event

Event

Remote side
requests protection
switch due to radio
loss of frame.

1) Active Tx at local
side is not
transmitting. 2)
Fade in the link
path.

1) Check the Tx
level of active unit.
2) Check if active
unit was set to
Mute. 3) Check
active unit's RFU. 4)
Check PM for fade
in link path.

warning

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Probable cause

Corrective
Actions

Type

Initiate another
Copy to Mate
command.

1) Check the Tx
level of active unit.
2) Check if active
unit was set to
Mute. 3) Check
active unit's RFU.

Page 555 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Corrective
Actions

Severity

Type

Description

Probable cause

1011 manualswitch-reqevent

warning

Event

Local switch due to

user request.

User request to
perform local
switch.

1012 mate-commfailure-alarm

major

Alarm

IDU cannot
communicate with
its mate IDU.

1) IDU IP addresses
are identical. 2) IDU
IP subnets are not
identical. 3) In
stand-alone
configuration:
protection cable is
not properly
connected. 4) In
stand-alone
configuration:
protection cable is
damaged.

1) Check IP
address and subnet
definition in both
units. 2) In standalone configuration:
check protection
cable connectivity.
3) In stand-alone
configuration:
replace protection
cable.

1013 protectionmodechangedevent

warning

Event

Protection mode
changed to %1 %2.

1014 sd-changeremote-txsent-event

warning

Event

Remote side is
requesting a
protection switch
due to radio signal
degrade.

1) Link fade. 2)
Defective IF cable.
3) RFU fault. 4) IDU
fault.

1) Check link
performance. 2)
Check IF cable. 3)
Check RFU. 4)
Check IDU

1015 bridge-xmlfile-alarm

warning

Alarm

1101 downloadfailed

warning

Event

Software download
failed event.

1) There are no
valid packages for
download at remote
server. 2)
Communication with
remote server is
down. 3) Remote
server access
credentials are not
valid. 4) Remote
server URL is not
valid.

1102 downloadsucceeded

warning

Event

Software download
succeeded event.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 556 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Type

Description

1103 install-failed

warning

Event

Software installation 1) There are no

failed event.
valid packages for
installation at local
update directory. 2)
One or more
package has
unresolved
dependencies, i.e.
requires another
package(s) to be
installed first.

1104 installsucceeded

warning

Event

Software installation
succeeded event.

1105 timed-install

warning

Event

User has either

started or canceled
a timed installation.
SW %1 timer %2
command; timer:
%3 seconds.

1201 firmware-file- critical

missing-alarm

Alarm

Modem firmware file Modem file is

was not found.
missing.

1202 firmwareload-erroralarm

critical

Alarm

Modem firmware
was not loaded
successfully.

1203 modem-wdreset-event

warning

Event

Modem WD reset.

1301 fpga-filecritical
corrupt-alarm

Alarm

Radio script LUT is

not valid.

1) Faulty file.

1) Download radio
script LUT.

1302 fpga-file-notfound-alarm

critical

Alarm

Radio script LUT

not found.

File was not

downloaded to
system.

Download radio
script.

1303 incompatible- critical

script-alarm

Alarm

Incompatible script: Incompatibility

%1 %2.
between RFU and
loaded radio script.

1) Change RFU. 2)
Change Radio
script.

1304 modemcritical
script-filecorrupt-alarm

Alarm

Radio script is not

valid.

File is corrupt.

Download file.

1305 modemcritical
script-file-notfound-alarm

Alarm

Radio script not

found.

File not found.

Download file.

1306 mrmc-filecritical
corrupt-alarm

Alarm

MRMC file not valid. File is corrupt.

Download file.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Probable cause

Corrective
Actions

Severity

1) Download
Modem file. 2)
Reset system.

1) File is corrupt. 2) 1) Download file. 2)

System failure.
Reset system.

Page 557 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Type

Description

Probable cause

Corrective
Actions

1307 mrmc-file-not- critical

found-alarm

Alarm

MRMC file not

found.

File not found.

Download file.

1308 rfu-filecritical
corrupt-alarm

Alarm

RFU file not valid.

File is corrupt.

Download file.

1309 rfu-file-notfound-alarm

critical

Alarm

RFU file not found.

File not found.

Download file.

1310 radio-script- critical

notsupported-byhw-alarm

Alarm

Radio script not

supported by
hardware. Script
capacities above
100 Mbps not
supported by this
hardware.

Configuration from
another system
loaded into F-series
hardware.

1) Change radio
script. 2) Make sure
right hardware is
installed.

1311 acm-profilebelowdefined-thralarm

Alarm

TX ACM profile has Fade in Link

dropped below the
threshold defined by
user.

Make sure
transmission power
and ACM settings
are adequate for
link conditions.

1401 incompatible- major

rfu-txcalibration

Alarm

RFU calibration
tables require IDC
SW upgrade.

Upgrade IDU SW.

1501 remotemajor
communicatio
n-failure

Alarm

Remote
communication
failure alarm.

1) Fade in the link.

Check link
performance.

1601 if-loopbackalarm

warning

Alarm

IF loopback
initiated.

1) User enabled IF
loopback.

Disable IF
loopback.

1602 lock-detectalarm

critical

Alarm

IF synthesizer
unlock.

1) Extreme
temperature
condition. 2) HW
failure.

1) Check
installation. 2)
Reset IDU.

1701 cable-open

major

Alarm

Cable between IDU 1) Cable is not

1) Check IF cable
and RFU is not
connected to IDU or and connectors. 2)
properly connected. RFU.
Verify that N-Type
connector inner pin
is not spliced. 3)
Replace IDU. 4)
Replace RFU.

Name

Severity

warning

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 558 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Corrective
Actions

Severity

Type

Description

Probable cause

major

Alarm

There is a short in
the IF cable.

1) Physical short at
the IF cable.

1) Check IF cable
and connectors. 2)
Verify that N-Type
connector inner pin
is not spliced. 3)
Replace IDU. 4)
Replace RFU.

1703 communicatio warning

n-failure

Alarm

Failure in
communication
between IDU and
RFU.

1) Defective IF
cable. 2) IF cable
not connected
properly. 3)
Defective IDU. 4)
Defective RFU. 5)
RFU software
download in
progress.

1) Check IF cable
and connectors. 2)
Verify that N-Type
connector inner pin
is not spliced. 3)
Replace IDU. 4)
Replace RFU. For
high power RF unit:
1) Check BMA
connector on OCB.
2) Check BMA
connector on RFU.

1704 delaycalibrationfailure-1

warning

Event

RFU delay
Defective RFU.
calibration failure 1.
Rx AGC is not
locked.

1) Reset the
IDU/RFU. 2)
Replace RFU.

1705 delaycalibrationfailure-2

warning

Alarm

RFU delay
Calibration cannot
calibration failure 2. be completed due
to notch detection.

Enter delay
calibration value
manually.

1706 extremetemp-cond

warning

Alarm

RFU temperature is 1) Installation

too high or low.
conditions. 2)
Defective RFU.

1) Check installation
conditions. 2) Verify
operation as per
product's specs. 3)
Replace RFU.

1707 fan-failure

major

Alarm

RFU fan failure.

1) Defective / nonexistent fan drawer.

2) Defective RFUto-fan drawer
connection. 3)
Defective RFU.

1) Check RFU
connection to BP. 2)
Check that fans are
connected to PS. 3)
Replace RFU BP
cable. 4) Replace
specific fan or fan
drawer. 5) Replace
RFU.

Event

Frequency set
automatically.

Defective RFU.

Check if problem
repeats and if
errors/alarms
reported. Replace
ODU.

1702 cable-short

1708 freq-setwarning
automatically

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 559 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Severity

Type

Description

Probable cause

Corrective
Actions

1709 hardwarefailure-1

critical

Alarm

RFU hardware
failure 1 alarm.

1) Defective RFU.

1) Replace RFU.

1710 hardwarefailure-2

critical

Alarm

RFU hardware
failure 2 alarm.

Defective RFU.

Replace RFU.

1711 low-if-signalto-rfu

major

Alarm

RFU is detecting
low IF signal from
IDU.

1) IF cable
connection. 2)
Defective RFU. 3)
Defective IDU.

1) Check IF cable
connectors. 2)
Verify that N-Type
connector inner pin
is not spliced. 3)
Replace IDU. 4)
Replace RFU.

1712 no-signalfrom-rfu

warning

Alarm

IDU is not detecting No RX (140 MHz)

a signal from the
signal from RFU.
RFU.

1) Check IF cable
and connectors. 2)
Verify that N-Type
connector inner pin
is not spliced. 3)
Replace IDU. 4)
Replace RFU. For
high power RF unit:
Check that the BMA
connector center
pin is not spliced
both on RFU and on
OCB.

1713 pa-extremetemp-cond

warning

Alarm

(24v) alarm.

1) Defective IF
cable/connector. 2)
Defective RFU. 3)
Defective IDU.

1) Replace IF
cable/connector. 2)
Replace RFU. 3)
Replace IDU.

1717 power-failure- critical

Alarm

RFU power failure

(6v pro) alarm.

1) Defective IF
cable/connector. 2)
Defective RFU. 3)
Defective IDU.

1) Replace IF
cable/connector. 2)
Replace RFU. 3)
Replace IDU.

Name

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 560 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Type

Description

Probable cause

Corrective
Actions

1718 power-failure- major

6v-sw

Alarm

RFU power failure

(6v SW) alarm.

1) Defective IF
cable/connector. 2)
Defective RFU. 3)
Defective IDU.

1) Replace IF
cable/connector. 2)
Replace RFU. 3)
Replace IDU.

1719 power-failure- major

minus-5v

Alarm

RFU power failure

(6v pro) alarm.

1) Defective IF
cable/connector. 2)
Defective RFU. 3)
Defective IDU.

1) Replace IF
cable/connector. 2)
Replace RFU. 3)
Replace IDU.

1720 power-failure- critical

Event

RFU power failure

(Vd) alarm.

1) Defective IF
cable/connector. 2)
Defective RFU. 3)
Defective IDU.

1) Replace IF
cable/connector. 2)
Replace RFU. 3)
Replace IDU.

1721 resetoccurred

Event

RFU reset event.

1722 rfu-loopback- major

active

Alarm

RFU loopback
alarm

User action.

Disable RFU
loopback.

1723 rfu-modechanged-tocombined

warning

Event

RFU changed mode

to Combined.

1724 rfu-modechanged-todiversity

warning

Event

RFU mode changed

to Diversity.

1725 rfu-modechanged-tomain

warning

Event

RFU changed mode

to Main.

1726 rfu-powermajor
supply-failure

Alarm

RFU power supply

failure.

At least one of the 1) Replace RFU.

PSU voltages is too
low.

1730 synthesizer1-unlocked

major

Alarm

RFU synthesizer is
unlocked.

1) Defective RFU.
2) Defective XPIC
cable connection.

1) Replace XPIC
cable. 2) Replace
RFU.

1731 synthesizer2-unlocked

major

Alarm

RFU synthesizer is
unlocked

1) Defective RFU.
2) Defective XPIC
cable connection.

1) Replace XPIC
cable. 2) Replace
RFU.

1732 synthesizer3-unlocked

major

Alarm

RFU synthesizer is
unlocked.

1) Defective RFU.
2) Defective XPIC
cable connection.

1) Replace XPIC
cable. 2) Replace
RFU.

1733 synthesizerunlocked

major

Alarm

One of the RFU

synthesizers is
unlocked.

One of the RFU

synthesizers is
unlocked.

1) Replace RFU. 2)
In XPIC mode,
replace mate RFU
as well.

Name

Severity

warning

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 561 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Type

Description

1734 tx-level-outof-range

minor

Alarm

RFU Tx level out of 1) Defective RFU

range.
(the RFU cannot
transmit the
requested TX
power).

1) Replace RFU. 2)
Intermediate
solution - reduce Tx
power.

1735 tx-mute

warning

Alarm

RFU Tx mute.

RFU transmitter
muted by user.

Unmute the RFU

transmitter.

1736 unknown-rfu- major

type

Alarm

IDC SW does not

support the RFU.

IDC SW does not

support the RFU.

Upgrade IDC SW.

1737 powerdecreaseddue-to-patemperature

Alarm

Power amplifier
temperature is
extremely high.

1) Incorrect
installation. 2)
Hardware failure.

1) Check installation
conditions. 2) Verify
operation as per
product's specs. 3)
Replace RFU.

1738 atpc-override- warning

tx-higherthan-max

Alarm

ATPC override
transmission level
value is greater
than system
maximum
transmission level.

User configuration.

Change either atpcoverride-tx-level or

max-tx-level value
so that the override
value is less than or
equal to the
maximum value.

1739 atpc-override warning

Alarm

ATPC overridden:
Tx level has been
equal to the max Tx
level for a longer
time than allowed.

Actual transmitted
signal level has
been at its
maximum value for
longer than allowed.
This is probably
caused by a
configuration error
or link planning
error.

1) Correct the
transmission levels.
2) The alarm will be
cleared only upon
manual clearing.

1740 rsl-lowerthan-userdefined-thr

warning

Alarm

The received signal

level is lower than
the user configured
threshold.

1) Low Tx power in
transmitter. 2)
Wrong reference
level if ATPC is
active. 3) Loss in
channel or cables.
4) Threshold
configured too high.

1) Check
Transmission
settings. 2) Check
IDU-RFU cable. 3)
Change threshold
according to link
planning.

1801 uploadfirmwarecanceled

warning

Event

RFU firmware
upload canceled
event.

User action.

major

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Probable cause

Corrective
Actions

Severity

Page 562 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Type

Description

1802 uploadfirmwareerror

major

Event

RFU firmware
upload error.

Retry upload.

1803 uploadfirmwarefailed

major

Event

RFU FW upload
failed.

Retry upload.

1804 uploadfirmwaresucceeded

warning

Event

RFU FW upload
succeeded.

1901 uploadsoftwarecanceled

warning

Event

RFU software
upload canceled.

Retry upload.

1902 uploadwarning
software-error

Event

RFU software
upload error.

Retry upload.

1903 uploadsoftwarefailed

warning

Event

RFU SW upload
failed.

Retry upload.

1904 uploadsoftwarestarted

warning

Event

RFU SW upload
started.

1905 uploadsoftwaresucceededevent

warning

Event

RFU SW upload
succeeded.

2001 cfm-failure

warning

Alarm

Ethernet services
failure.

2101 heartbeat

indeterminate Event

2201 eeprommajor
access-failure

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Alarm

Probable cause

Corrective
Actions

Severity

1) Local MEP error

indication. 2)
Remote MEP error
indication. 3)
Remote MEP loss
of connectivity.

1) Check MAID
definitions. 2)
Check remote MEP
definitions. 3)
Check local MEP
definitions. 4) Run
"CFM traceroute" to
the remote MEP,
then perform "CFM
ping" to each MP
(Maintenance Point)
in order to find the
broken point.

(1) Inserted drawer

not supported. (2)
Hardware error.

(1) Make sure

drawer is properly
inserted. (2) Power
cycle the system.
(3) Replace drawer.

Heartbeat trap
System unable to
detect TDM drawer
type.

Page 563 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Severity

Type

Description

Probable cause

Corrective
Actions

critical

Alarm

TDM backplane
LOF for slot #%1.
No signal is
detected from port.

(1) Extension or
main unit equipment
failure. (2)
Backplane failure.

(1) Re-insert unit.

(2) Power-cycle
unit. (3) Check
backplane.

2302 communicatio critical

n-lost-with-idu

Alarm

Communications
lost with IDU #%1.
Communications
have been lost with
extension units' SW.

(1) Extension or
main unit equipment
failure. (2)
Backplane failure.

(1) Re-insert unit.

(2) Power-cycle
unit. (3) Check
backplane.

2303 extractiondetected

Event

Extraction of IDU
#%1 in the shelf has
been detected.

2304 idu-presence- minor

not-detected

Alarm

IDU #%1 presence

not detected. An
IDU which is
configured as
operational is not
detected as being
physically present in
the shelf.

2305 insertiondetected

Alarm

Insertion of IDU
#%1 in the shelf has
been detected.

2306 mate-version- major

mismatch

Alarm

SW version
mismatch between
two units in
protection mode.

(1) SW update
performed in one
unit only. (2) Units
with different SW
version connected
as protection mate.

Perform SW update
to mate unit.

2307 protectionadminmismatch

minor

Alarm

Protection mode
mismatch for IDU
#%1, %2. A unit is
configured in main
unit as protected
but an indication is
received that the
unit is not under
protection (or viceversa).

(1) Equipment error

in extension IDU.
(2) Backplane
communications
error.

(1) Re-configure XC
settings. (2) Reset
extension unit. (3)
Replace extension
unit.

2308 protectionmodemismatch

major

Alarm

Protection activity
error for IDUs #%1,
%2. Two protected
units chose the
same activity
(active/stand-by).

(1) Backplane
(1) Replace units,
communications
one by one. (2)
failure. (2)
Check backplane.
Equipment failure in
extension units.

Name

2301 bp-lof-alarm

warning

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

IDU with TDM trails (1) Insert IDU in

mapped to it was
shelf. (2) Delete
extracted from
relevant TDM trails.
shelf.

Page 564 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Corrective
Actions

Severity

Type

Description

Probable cause

major

Alarm

SW running version
mismatch with
extension unit in
slot %1. The
software version of
extension unit is
different from that of
the main unit.

(1) SW update
performed in main
unit only. (2) Units
with different SW
version connected
as extensions.

Perform a SW
update for the
relevant extension
unit.

2402 extension-bp- critical

lof

Alarm

No signal is
detected in
backplane
connection with
main IDU.

(1) Extension or
main unit equipment
failure. (2)
Backplane failure.

(1) Re-insert unit.

(2) Power-cycle
unit. (3) Check
backplane.

2403 failure-in-one- warning

or-more-tdmtrails

Alarm

A failure has been

detected in at least
one TDM trail.

2406 invalid-trailstatuschange

major

Event

Invalid trail status

change %1 in trail
%2. Equipment
failure status of one
or more trails
changed.

(1) Trail end-point

failure detected for
one or more trails.
(2) Trail end-point
failure cleared for
one or more trails.

2407 trailexcessiveBER-change

major

Event

Trail excessive BER

status change %1 in
trail %2. Excessive
BER status of one
or more trails
changed.

(1) Trail excessive Check links and

BER detected for
equipment alarms
one or more trails. along the TDM trail.
(2) Trail excessive
BER cleared for one
or more trails.

2408 trail-idmismatch

warning

Alarm

Trail ID of received
data differs from
locally configured.

(1) Trail ID spelling

difference between
trail ends. (2)
Network TDM trail
configuration error.
(3) Errors in
incoming signal.

2309 unit-versionmismatch

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

(1) Perform reset in

end-point IDU if
exists. (2) Replace
end-point IDU.

(1) Check trail ID at

both ends of the
trail. (2) Check
network trail
configuration. (3)
Check trail
performance (BER)
along the trail path
and fix errored links
if needed.

Page 565 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Corrective
Actions

Severity

Type

Description

Probable cause

warning

Event

Trail ID mismatch
status change %1 in
trail %2. The status
of one more trails
has changed.

(1) Trail ID
mismatch detected
for one or more
trails. (2) Trail ID
mismatch cleared
for one or more
trails.

2410 trailwarning
protectedforced-active

Alarm

Trail ID: %1, path: (1) User command - Set force active to
%2 forced active.. force active.
"none" for this trail.
Force active
command has been
issued for the
relevant path in the
trail.

2411 trailprotectedswitch

warning

Event

Trail protection
switch performed in
trail %1 due to %2.
Active trail has been
switched in a pathprotected trail.

(1) Signal failure

along the active
trail's path. (2) User
issued force active
command to standby path.

2412 trail-signaldegradechange

minor

Event

Trail signal degrade

status change %1 in
trail %2. Signal
degrade status of
one or more trails
has changed.

(1) Trail signal

Check links and
degrade detected
equipment alarms
for one or more
along the TDM trail.
trails. (2) Trail signal
degrade cleared for
one or more trails.

2413 trailsmapped-toinexistentinterfaces

warning

Alarm

Trails mapped to
inexistent interfaces
in IDU #%1. There
are trails in the
database that are
mapped to
interfaces not
currently installed in
the system.

(1) One or more

components were
extracted from the
system since trails
were defined. (2)
Radio scripts have
been replaced by
narrower scripts
since trails were
defined.

(1) Replace missing

components (IDUs,
T-cards). (2) Make
sure radio scripts
support required
number of E1/DS1
trails through radio.
(3) Delete relevant
trails.

2414 trail-signalfailurechange

warning

Event

Trail signal failure

status change %1 in
trail %2. AIS
received in one or
more incoming
trails.

(1) Fade in a link

along the trail. (2)
Equipment failure in
a network element
along the trail. (3)
Trail not properly
provisioned along
the path.

Check links,
equipment alarms
and trail
configuration along
the TDM trail.

2409 trail-idmismatchchange

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

(1) Check trail ID at

both ends of the
trail. (2) Check
network trail
configuration.

Page 566 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Severity

Corrective
Actions

Type

Description

Probable cause

2415 illegal-trailwarning
configuration.

Alarm

Conflicting trails are

configured in
protected IDUs %1
and %2. One or
more trails are
configured between
two units configured
in protection mode.

Protection was
enabled in pair of
IDUs between
which trails were
previously
configured.

(1) Erase relevant

trails. (2) Disable
protection in pair.

2416 trail-RDIdetectedchange

warning

Event

RDI received status

%1 in trail %2. An
RDI indication has
been received from
the far-end of the
trail.

1. Far end does not

receive a proper
signal. 2. Trail is
forced active to
secondary in farend

1. Check trail
integrity in primary
path. 2. Configure
force "none".

2417 trail-signalfailure

major

Alarm

Signal failure (AIS

received) in one or
more incoming
trails.

(1) Fade in a link

along the trail. (2)
Equipment failure in
a network element
along the trail. (3)
Trail not properly
provisioned along
the path.

Check links,
equipment alarms
and trail
configuration along
the TDM trail.

2418 local-trail-rdi- warning

detected

Alarm

An RDI indication
has been received
from the far-end of
the trail.

1. Far end does not

receive a proper
signal. 2. Trail is
forced active to
secondary in farend

1. Check trail
integrity in primary
path. 2. Configure
force "none".

2419 local-trailsignal-failure

major

Alarm

Signal failure (AIS

received) in one or
more incoming
trails.

(1) Fade in a link

along the trail. (2)
Equipment failure in
a network element
along the trail. (3)
Trail not properly
provisioned along
the path.

Check links,
equipment alarms
and trail
configuration along
the TDM trail.

2420 invalid-trailstatus

major

Alarm

Equipment failure
status for one or
more TDM trails.

(1) Trail end-point

failure detected for
one or more trails.
(2) Trail end-point
failure cleared for
one or more trails.

(1) Perform reset in

end-point IDU if
exists. (2) Replace
end-point IDU.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 567 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Corrective
Actions

Severity

Type

Description

Probable cause

major

Event

An error has been

detected in the
security log file.

The security log file Log has been

has been tampered automatically
with.
renewed. Previous
data is lost.

2501 unsuccessful- warning

consecutiveloginattempts

Event

Unsuccessful
consecutive login
attempts for user
%1. A user
attempted to log in
using a wrong
password more
than the allowed
number of times.

User mistake or
security event.

2502 corrupt-diffdelay-valfound-event

major

Event

At system boot
corrupt values were
found in the
differential delay
calibration
parameters. Error
automatically fixed.

Inventory file was

1) Download
found to be corrupt inventory file. 2)
upon system power Reset system.
up.

2554 switch-lockalarm

warning

Alarm

Hitless protection
switching is locked
by user. Radio
diversity forced to
%1.

User configuration.

Release switch
lock.

2555 unused-radio- warning

lof-alarm

Alarm

Radio in IDU #%1

unused due to LOF.
IDU not being used
for hitless switching
because no frame is
received at its radio.

1) Configuration
error. 2) Defective
IF cable. 3) Fault in
RFU. 4) Fault in
IDU.

1) Check link
configuration and
performance. 2)
Check IF cable, and
replace if required.
3) Replace RFU. 4)
Replace IDU.

2558 blockingradio-alarm

Alarm

MR: radio traffic

User configuration.
blocked on slot %1.
Multi-radio traffic
distribution to a
radio is blocked by
user.

2500 security-logevent

warning

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Reset the user

account (only
"secure officer" or
above user types
allowed).

Release the radio

lock.

Page 568 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Severity

Corrective
Actions

Type

Description

Probable cause

2560 incompatible- warning

featuresenabled

Alarm

Two or more
mutually exclusive
features have been
enabled. Feature
"%1" and feature
"%2" are mutually
exclusive.

One of the following Enable only

feature
compatible features.
combinations has
been enabled:
Multi-radio and
protection. Multiradio and diversity.
Diversity and XPIC.
Diversity and 2+2.
Diversity and ACM.
XPIC and
protection.

2601 stm1-los

critical

Alarm

No signal is
(1) Line is not
detected from STM- properly connected.
1/OC-3/OC-3 port. (2) Cable is faulty.
(3) Equipment is
faulty. (4) STM1/OC-3 SFP not
attached.

1) Reconnect line.
2) Check line
cables. 3) Check
external equipment.
4) Attach SFP. 5)
Power cycle the
system.

2602 stm1-lof

critical

Alarm

Loss of frame in
incoming STM1/OC-3 signal.

(1) Line is not

properly connected.
(2) Cable is faulty.
(3) Equipment is
faulty. (4) STM1/OC-3 SFP not
attached.

1) Reconnect line.
2) Check line
cables. 3) Check
external equipment.
4) Attach SFP. 5)
Power cycle the
system.

2603 a2ninitializationfailure

critical

Alarm

Failure to initialize
or configure some
component in
access to network
card.

(1) Equipment is
1) Power cycle the
faulty. (2) SW/HW system. 2) Check
versions mismatch. SW versions.

2604 stm1-sfp-not- major

detected

Alarm

Error in SFP
detection.

(1) SFP not inserted 1) Reconnect SFP.

properly. (2)
2) Change SFP.
Incompatible SFP
type. (3) Damaged
SFP.

2605 stm1major
excessive-ber

Alarm

Excessive BER is
above configured
threshold in
incoming STM1/OC-3 signal.

(1) Line is not

properly connected.
(2) Cable is faulty.
(3) External
equipment is faulty.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

1) Reconnect line.
2) Check line
cables. 3) Check
external equipment.
4) Power cycle the
system.

Page 569 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Corrective
Actions

Severity

Type

Description

Probable cause

2606 stm1-signaldegrade

minor

Alarm

Signal degrade excessive BER is

above configured
threshold in
incoming STM1/OC-3 signal.

(1) Line is not

properly connected.
(2) Cable is faulty.
(3) External
equipment is faulty.

2607 stm1-sfp-txfault

major

Alarm

SFP hardware
failure: unable to
transmit.

(1) SFP not inserted 1) Reconnect SFP.

properly. (2)
2) Change SFP.
Damaged SFP.

2608 mute-override warning

Alarm

STM-1/OC-3 mute
override.

User configured
STM-1/OC-3
interface as silent.

Configure STM1/OC-3 interface to

transmit.

2610 loopback-atstm1

major

Alarm

Loopback at STM1/OC-3 interface

alarm status.

User configured
loopback at STM1/OC-3 interface.

Cancel loopback
configuration.

2611 stm1-pllunlocked

critical

Alarm

Unable to lock to
Hardware failure in
input clock for STM- STM-1/OC-3 card.
1/OC-3 signal.

(1) Power cycle the

system. (2) Replace
STM-1/OC-3 card

2612 j0-mismatch

minor

Alarm

Received J0 trace
identifier string not
identical to
configured expected
string.

(1) Error in remote

optical equipment
configuration. (2)
Error in J0 expected
string configuration.
(3) Error in J0
length configuration.

Check that remote

equipment sent J0
string and length
equals expected J0
configuration.

2613 stm1-syncclock-signalfailure

major

Alarm

The TDM trail

configured to carry
the clock for the
STM-1 interface is
not properly
received.

(1) Clock source

configured from
wrong VC. (2)
Radio LOF or
equipment failure
along the path of
the synchronization
trail. (3) LOS or AIS
at the
synchronization
source interface in
the far end of the
trail.

(1) Make sure the

configured VC is the
end-point of the
synchronization
trail. (2) Check
status of
synchronization
trail. (3) Check
status of clock
source interface.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

1) Reconnect line.
2) Check line
cables. 3) Check
external equipment.
4) Power cycle the
system.

Page 570 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

User Guide

Severity

Type

Description

Probable cause

Corrective
Actions

2701 lagdegradationalarm

major

Alarm

Degraded
functionality in LAG
#%1; LAG working
at partial capacity.
At least one
physical port
belonging to a LAG
report link down.

1) Configuration
error. 2) Defective
Ethernet cables or
cables
disconnected. 3)
Fault in external
equipment.

1) Check LAG
physical
configuration in both
sides of link. 2)
Check cables and
replace if required.
3) Replace IDU.

2702 lag-lossalarm

critical

Alarm

LAG #%1 status

down - all physical
ports belonging to
the LAG report a
link down. Traffic
not flowing through
the LAG.

1) Configuration
error. 2) Defective
Ethernet cables or
cables
disconnected. 3)
Fault in external
equipment.

1) Check LAG
physical
configuration in both
sides of link. 2)
Check cables and
replace if required.
3) Replace IDU.

2703 change-instp-role

warning

Event

Change in RSTP
role for port: %1;
New role: %2; New
state: %3; Root
bridge ID: %4;
Bridge role: %5.

2716 unused-txmulti-radioalarm

warning

Alarm

Traffic not being

sent through radio
on slot %1 by multiradio due to radio or
configuration failure.

One of the following

failures is present at
the receiving radio:
1) Radio LOF. 2)
Minimum ACM point
reached. 3) Link ID
mismatch. 4)
Excessive BER. 5)
Signal degraded. 6)
User "radio block"
command. 7) Multiradio disabled in
that IDU.

1) Correct failure. 2)
Disable failure
(Excessive BER,
signal degrade) as
a cause for
blocking. 3) Enable
multi-radio in both
IDUs.

Name

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 571 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Corrective
Actions

Severity

Type

Description

Probable cause

2718 unused-rxmulti-radioalarm

warning

Alarm

Traffic not being

taken from radio on
slot %1 by multiradio. Traffic not
being passed
through this radio
due to radio or
configuration failure.

One of the following

failures is present at
this radio: 1) Radio
LOF. 2) Minimum
ACM point reached.
3) Link ID
mismatch. 4)
Excessive BER. 5)
Signal degraded. 6)
User "radio block"
command. 7) Multiradio disabled in
that IDU.

1) Correct failure. 2)
Disable failure
(Excessive BER,
signal degrade) as
a cause for
blocking. 3) Enable
multi-radio in both
IDUs.

2719 multi-radiolocal-lofalarm

critical

Alarm

Loss of frame on
radio.

1) Fade in the link.

2) Defective IF
cable. 3) Fault in
RFU. 4) Fault in
IDU. 5) Different
radio scripts at both
ends of the link.

1) Check link
performance. 2)
Check IF cable, and
replace if required.
3) Replace RFU. 4)
Replace IDU. 5)
Make sure same
script is loaded at
both ends of the
link.

2801 radiointerfacechanged-byuser-event

warning

Event

Radio interface is
currently %1
(enabled or
disabled) by user
configuration. If
disabled, no traffic
will pass through
local radio.

User configuration.

Enable the radio

interface if use of
the radio is desired

Alarm

Requested traffic
TDM trails and high
capacity (Ethernet + priority Ethernet
TDM) exceeds radio configuration.
capacity. The total
number of high
priority trails and
Ethernet traffic
configured to this
radio exceeds the
total radio capacity.

2802 requestedminor
cap-exceedsradio-capalarm

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Reduce highcapacity Ethernet or

high priority TDM
trails to this radio.

Page 572 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Severity

Corrective
Actions

Type

Description

Probable cause

2901 system-reset- warning

required

Alarm

One of the following

configurations have
been changed;
system reset to be
applied: (1) Radio
enable/disable (2)
Radio script (3)
Ethernet application
(4) Demo license
enable/disable (5)
License code
change (6)
Configuration
restore

One of the following

configurations was
changed: (1) Radio
enable/disable (2)
Radio script (3)
Ethernet application
(4) Demo license
enable/disable (5)
License code
change (6)
Configuration
restore

2902 undermajor
voltagecondition-ps1

Alarm

Under-voltage
1) Power cable
conditions detected disconnected. 2)
in a power supply. Power supply
source failure. 3)
Hardware failure.

1) Connect power
supply cable. 2)
Check power supply
source. 3) Replace
IDU.

2903 undermajor
voltagecondition-ps2

Alarm

Under-voltage
1) Power cable
conditions detected disconnected 2)
in a power supply. Power supply
source failure. 3)
Hardware failure.

1) Connect power
supply cable. 2)
Check power supply
source. 3) Replace
IDU.

3001 insufficientconfig-forxpic

major

Alarm

XPIC cannot be set;

see probable cause
for the possible
reasons.

1) Modem script
Check which
does not support
condition is lacking
XPIC 2) ODU does and resolve it.
not support XPIC 3)
The frequency of
both radios is not
equal. 4) Different
type of ODU 5)
Protection is
enabled 6) One of
the IDUs HW does
not support XPIC.
7) Different scripts
are loaded in the
IDUs

3002 xsm-event

warning

Event

XPIC recovery
event.

A change in the
XPIC recovery
mechanism took
place.

3003 insufficientconfig-forxpic-event

warning

Event

Condition for XPIC

not met.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

(1) Perform system

reboot. (2) Change
relevant
configuration to
current value.

Page 573 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Severity

Corrective
Actions

Type

Description

Probable cause

3100 sync-source- warning

switch

Event

Synchronization
source for the
system has been
switched.

1) LOS/LOF at
previous sync
source interface. 2)
Hardware failure at
previous sync
source interface.

Check status of
incoming signal at
sync source
interfaces.

3101 sync-lineclock-signalfailure

major

Alarm

Sync clock source

1) Make sure all

radio links are
errorless along the
path. 2) Make sure
source PDH signal
is being received. 3)
Re-check
synchronization
path configuration.

3104 sync-radioclock-signalfailure

major

Alarm

Sync clock source

signal failure for %1
interface. The
synchronization
signal driving the
interface's output
clock is not being
received.

1) Radio error along

the sync path. 2)
Invalid clock signal
at clock source. 3)
Configuration error.

1) Make sure all

radio links are
errorless along the
path. 2) Make sure
source PDH signal
is being received 3)
Re-check
synchronization
path configuration.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 574 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Corrective
Actions

Severity

Type

Description

interfaces
configured as
carrying sync
source clock exist in
the system. 2)
Replace T-card. 3)
Replace IDU.

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Page 575 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Corrective
Actions

Severity

Type

Description

Probable cause

3110 sync-ethclock-signalfailure

major

Alarm

Sync clock source

signal failure for %1
interface. The
synchronization
signal driving the
interface's output
clock is not being
received.

1) Radio error along

the sync path. 2)
Invalid clock signal
at clock source. 3)
Configuration error.

3111 sync-nodemode-forced

warning

Alarm

Node
User configuration.
synchronization
source forced to
sync source #%1. A
certain interface has
been forced by user
as the source of the
synchronization
reference signal.

Set node
synchronization
mode to
"automatic".

3112 sync-source- warning

if-status

Event

Change in clock
quality level at sync
source #%1. New
quality is %2. The
quality of a
reference signal
received at a certain
interface has
changed.

1) User changed
quality configuration
in an interface. 2)
SSM received with
new quality value.

1) Change interface
configuration. 2)
Check flow of
reference clock in
the network.

3113 sync-source- warning

system-clock

Event

Change in T0
system reference
clock quality level.
New quality is %1.
The quality of the
system's internal
reference clock
(which is distributed
onwards towards
the network) has
changed.

1) The quality of the

reference source
signal has changed.
2) The interface
taken as reference
has changed.

3333 no-internalmate-alarm

Alarm

IDU cannot
communicate with
second IDU in the
same shelf.

1) Second IDU
faulty. 2) Second
IDU missing. 3)
Hardware error.

major

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

1) Make sure all

radio links are
errorless along the
path. 2) Make sure
source PDH signal
is being received. 3)
Re-check
synchronization
path configuration.

1) Replace
missing/faulty unit.
2) Replace this IDU.

Page 576 of 577

FibeAir IP-10G and IP-10E

Name

User Guide

Corrective
Actions

Severity

Type

Description

Probable cause

4001 eth-clocksourcesignal-failure

major

Alarm

The synchronization
signal driving the
synchronous
Ethernet clock is not
being received.

1) Radio error along

the sync path. 2)
Invalid clock signal
at clock source. 3)
Configuration error.

5001 floating-ipfilter-lockalarm

major

Alarm

Floating IP locked
to fixed unit
following excessive
protection switches.
To allow
management
access to the
system under
permanent
switching, the
floating IP address
is fixed to a single
unit and does not
necessarily
correspond with the
currently active unit.

Constant protection Perform protection

switches due to
lockout.
permanent errors in
radio.

5002 fip-invalidprotectionconf

warning

Alarm

Floating IP is
enabled in a system
configured to 1+0.
An extra IP address
is being
unnecessarily used.

Protection admin is
"disabled" but
floating IP address
is configured (value
is different than
0.0.0.0).

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

1) Make sure all

radio links are
errorless along the
path. 2) Make sure
source PDH signal
is being received. 3)
Re-check
synchronization
path configuration.

(1) Set floating IP

address to [0.0.0.0].
or (2) Enable
protection.

Page 577 of 577

Ceragon FibeAir RFU-HP Technical Description Rev13
67% (3)
Ceragon FibeAir RFU-HP Technical Description Rev13
52 pages
Solving Cellular Coverage Issues: The Ultimate Buyer's Guide
No ratings yet
Solving Cellular Coverage Issues: The Ultimate Buyer's Guide
17 pages
FTIF Transport PDH / Ethernet: Support of TDM Interfaces and Extended Ethernet Connectivity
No ratings yet
FTIF Transport PDH / Ethernet: Support of TDM Interfaces and Extended Ethernet Connectivity
1 page
IP 20N Preliminary Datasheet ANSI Rev A 01
100% (2)
IP 20N Preliminary Datasheet ANSI Rev A 01
49 pages
Ceragon-IP10E CLH ANSI Product Description PDF
No ratings yet
Ceragon-IP10E CLH ANSI Product Description PDF
108 pages
KEYMILE User Guide
No ratings yet
KEYMILE User Guide
56 pages
Trcu TM10P1V01
No ratings yet
Trcu TM10P1V01
1 page
RBS 3518 Installation Guide
No ratings yet
RBS 3518 Installation Guide
33 pages
Mobileaccess1000 System With: Lte Siso Support
No ratings yet
Mobileaccess1000 System With: Lte Siso Support
43 pages
Nec Ipasolink Ex
No ratings yet
Nec Ipasolink Ex
2 pages
7250SAS Alcatel Switch
No ratings yet
7250SAS Alcatel Switch
19 pages
Ceragon IP-20S Installation Guide Rev F
No ratings yet
Ceragon IP-20S Installation Guide Rev F
109 pages
Active Antenna Systems for 5G Explained
No ratings yet
Active Antenna Systems for 5G Explained
5 pages
ION-Evolution - ERA PANOS-RS
No ratings yet
ION-Evolution - ERA PANOS-RS
29 pages
Installation and Interface: Quick Guide
No ratings yet
Installation and Interface: Quick Guide
8 pages
Antennas and Accessories Product Description
No ratings yet
Antennas and Accessories Product Description
84 pages
Nokia Wavence Ultra-Broadband Transceiver
No ratings yet
Nokia Wavence Ultra-Broadband Transceiver
3 pages
Huawei BTS3012 Product Description
No ratings yet
Huawei BTS3012 Product Description
38 pages
CCRP - IP-20N Manual
No ratings yet
CCRP - IP-20N Manual
281 pages
Integra X DS v1.06
No ratings yet
Integra X DS v1.06
6 pages
Handbook - IP-20N Basic Training Course T7.9
100% (3)
Handbook - IP-20N Basic Training Course T7.9
264 pages
Flexi Capacity Extension Submodule (FBBA) Operation
No ratings yet
Flexi Capacity Extension Submodule (FBBA) Operation
1 page
Control Interface For Antenna Line Devices: Antenna Interface Standards Group Standard No. AISG v2.0
No ratings yet
Control Interface For Antenna Line Devices: Antenna Interface Standards Group Standard No. AISG v2.0
41 pages
Minipack, PS System: Quick Start Guide
No ratings yet
Minipack, PS System: Quick Start Guide
32 pages
AWHGEQG AWHGEQH ASiR-pRRH 2T2R 4T4R B1B3n78 1.8W Datasheet
No ratings yet
AWHGEQG AWHGEQH ASiR-pRRH 2T2R 4T4R B1B3n78 1.8W Datasheet
2 pages
Ceragon - 1500R Vender PDF
No ratings yet
Ceragon - 1500R Vender PDF
55 pages
Ceragon - RF Units PDF
No ratings yet
Ceragon - RF Units PDF
3 pages
RCSP RDL 6000 Mod 2 ENB Overview Config R1.3.2 V1.3
No ratings yet
RCSP RDL 6000 Mod 2 ENB Overview Config R1.3.2 V1.3
64 pages
Single RAN Samsung Business
No ratings yet
Single RAN Samsung Business
5 pages
OpenAMIP for Enhanced VSAT Integration
No ratings yet
OpenAMIP for Enhanced VSAT Integration
8 pages
SSU2000 SSU2000e Datasheet
No ratings yet
SSU2000 SSU2000e Datasheet
9 pages
Siklu EH-1200 Installation User Manual - EH1200-InSTL-04 - Issue1 (October 2014)
No ratings yet
Siklu EH-1200 Installation User Manual - EH1200-InSTL-04 - Issue1 (October 2014)
54 pages
Original Siemens Bts Bs240 GSM Base Station Siemens Bts Hard Ware s30861 U566 X-97178527
No ratings yet
Original Siemens Bts Bs240 GSM Base Station Siemens Bts Hard Ware s30861 U566 X-97178527
5 pages
M0128a1d RMC1600
No ratings yet
M0128a1d RMC1600
35 pages
Retail Price List: 3000 Series Hub Primary or Secondary
No ratings yet
Retail Price List: 3000 Series Hub Primary or Secondary
1 page
HARRIS Microwave
No ratings yet
HARRIS Microwave
154 pages
ALLIANCE BIU Product Data Sheet v1.4
No ratings yet
ALLIANCE BIU Product Data Sheet v1.4
4 pages
Remote Radio Unit Installation and Interface: Rrus 32
No ratings yet
Remote Radio Unit Installation and Interface: Rrus 32
19 pages
Mimosa B11 Datasheet
No ratings yet
Mimosa B11 Datasheet
2 pages
5GC001899 CB006926 Nokia CDD CPRI Digital Donor 5G NR Support
No ratings yet
5GC001899 CB006926 Nokia CDD CPRI Digital Donor 5G NR Support
16 pages
Nokia UltraSite GSMEDGE BTS Product Overview
No ratings yet
Nokia UltraSite GSMEDGE BTS Product Overview
67 pages
Motorola DLN6707 Power Supply
No ratings yet
Motorola DLN6707 Power Supply
3 pages
Newtec MDM3310 Satellite Modem For The Newtec Dialog Platform Datasheet
No ratings yet
Newtec MDM3310 Satellite Modem For The Newtec Dialog Platform Datasheet
2 pages
MDGB 900 MHA Datasheet
100% (1)
MDGB 900 MHA Datasheet
2 pages
Alcatel Lucent 9500 MPR A R5 1 0 Upgrade
No ratings yet
Alcatel Lucent 9500 MPR A R5 1 0 Upgrade
59 pages
Ceragon - 1+1 Resilient Microwave Links - Technical Brief
No ratings yet
Ceragon - 1+1 Resilient Microwave Links - Technical Brief
8 pages
NSN Flexi BTS LTE Commissioning
0% (2)
NSN Flexi BTS LTE Commissioning
6 pages
Harris Stratex Best Practices Guide
No ratings yet
Harris Stratex Best Practices Guide
220 pages
Metro Cell Carrier Growth Guide
No ratings yet
Metro Cell Carrier Growth Guide
43 pages
Nokia 7750 SR-s Router Overview
No ratings yet
Nokia 7750 SR-s Router Overview
13 pages
Ceragon FibeAir IP-10G IP-10E User Guide 20120601 Rev A.01
No ratings yet
Ceragon FibeAir IP-10G IP-10E User Guide 20120601 Rev A.01
577 pages
Ceragon - Fibeair Ip-10g - Ip-10e - User - Guide - Rev - d.01 PDF
No ratings yet
Ceragon - Fibeair Ip-10g - Ip-10e - User - Guide - Rev - d.01 PDF
596 pages
Fibeair Ip20g
No ratings yet
Fibeair Ip20g
20 pages
Ceragon FibeAir IP 20G User Guide 8 0 Rev A
No ratings yet
Ceragon FibeAir IP 20G User Guide 8 0 Rev A
703 pages
Ceragon FibeAir IP-20G User Guide 8.0 Rev A
100% (17)
Ceragon FibeAir IP-20G User Guide 8.0 Rev A
703 pages
IP10G-CLI User Guide Version 6.7 March2011
100% (1)
IP10G-CLI User Guide Version 6.7 March2011
124 pages
FibeAir IP-20C S E C8 2 User Manual Rev E
100% (2)
FibeAir IP-20C S E C8 2 User Manual Rev E
576 pages
Ceragon FibeAir IP-20C S E C8.0 User Manual Rev C.01
No ratings yet
Ceragon FibeAir IP-20C S E C8.0 User Manual Rev C.01
531 pages
FibeAir IP-20N A LH User Manual T8.2 Rev G.01
100% (4)
FibeAir IP-20N A LH User Manual T8.2 Rev G.01
876 pages
FibeAir IP-20S C83 U
No ratings yet
FibeAir IP-20S C83 U
597 pages
Antena Parabolica Commscope Pl4-71w-P7a
No ratings yet
Antena Parabolica Commscope Pl4-71w-P7a
10 pages
Manual Cs121 en - Contraseña
No ratings yet
Manual Cs121 en - Contraseña
166 pages
Quantar RSS Manual PDF
No ratings yet
Quantar RSS Manual PDF
362 pages
Cisco 1252 AP Autonomous Setup Guide
No ratings yet
Cisco 1252 AP Autonomous Setup Guide
2 pages
M506 Service Manual
100% (1)
M506 Service Manual
47 pages
Breezeconfig Access VL 3.0 050102
No ratings yet
Breezeconfig Access VL 3.0 050102
99 pages
Advanced ICT SMC Trading Insights
No ratings yet
Advanced ICT SMC Trading Insights
138 pages
Lingguhang Aralin Sa Filipino - (Wika) : Kuwarter 1
No ratings yet
Lingguhang Aralin Sa Filipino - (Wika) : Kuwarter 1
17 pages
Social Movements and Change in India
No ratings yet
Social Movements and Change in India
5 pages
SG 9
No ratings yet
SG 9
11 pages
Hysteresis Control of The Pseudo Boost PFC Converter
No ratings yet
Hysteresis Control of The Pseudo Boost PFC Converter
5 pages
75 - Rutherford County Historical Society
No ratings yet
75 - Rutherford County Historical Society
152 pages
21705257
No ratings yet
21705257
306 pages
Tds Al Jazeera Epoxy Sealer
No ratings yet
Tds Al Jazeera Epoxy Sealer
2 pages
Safety Device Checklists for Installations
No ratings yet
Safety Device Checklists for Installations
27 pages
Imouto Life Fantasy v1.4.3TL F
No ratings yet
Imouto Life Fantasy v1.4.3TL F
12 pages
MCQs On Complaints and Appeals
No ratings yet
MCQs On Complaints and Appeals
4 pages
Pharmacy Jurisprudence Overview
No ratings yet
Pharmacy Jurisprudence Overview
26 pages
Deep Learning
No ratings yet
Deep Learning
5 pages
Color Space Koenderink
No ratings yet
Color Space Koenderink
1 page
Biografia de Ed Sheeran e Frida Kahlo
No ratings yet
Biografia de Ed Sheeran e Frida Kahlo
1 page
Instructions To Candidates - Skill Test - Sr. Computer Programmers
No ratings yet
Instructions To Candidates - Skill Test - Sr. Computer Programmers
2 pages
Manual M240ED PDF
No ratings yet
Manual M240ED PDF
100 pages
Iso-23234-2021 3
No ratings yet
Iso-23234-2021 3
12 pages
TOEFL Reporting Verbs for Vocabulary Mastery
No ratings yet
TOEFL Reporting Verbs for Vocabulary Mastery
6 pages
PDF Study Sqe Course For Everyone
No ratings yet
PDF Study Sqe Course For Everyone
34 pages
Reflection Paper
No ratings yet
Reflection Paper
1 page
Project Details: EDGE Assessment: v3.0.0 Homes
No ratings yet
Project Details: EDGE Assessment: v3.0.0 Homes
24 pages
SIM Math 3
No ratings yet
SIM Math 3
14 pages
Glycerin USP-NF Nutritional
No ratings yet
Glycerin USP-NF Nutritional
1 page
Meme Generator - Imgflip
No ratings yet
Meme Generator - Imgflip
1 page
Ultimate HARMONIC MINOR Poster in C (Color)
No ratings yet
Ultimate HARMONIC MINOR Poster in C (Color)
1 page
Form Design and Control
No ratings yet
Form Design and Control
3 pages
NEET Key - 07
No ratings yet
NEET Key - 07
12 pages
A New Correlation Between Photovoltaic Panel's Efficiency and Amount of Sand Dust Accumulated On Their Surface
No ratings yet
A New Correlation Between Photovoltaic Panel's Efficiency and Amount of Sand Dust Accumulated On Their Surface
16 pages
Chapter 1
No ratings yet
Chapter 1
7 pages